PL300 Multifunction Protection PDF

PL300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION
Instruction Manual
UME_PL300_eng Rev.: AE (08/13)
© All rights reserved. No part of this

publication may be reproduced by whatever
means, without the prior written permission of
Ingeteam Power Technology.
Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the right

to make any changes without prior notice.
INDEX 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................... 10

1.1 54BScope of the manual ......................................................................................................................... 10
1.2 5BFunctions ........................................................................................................................................ 10
1.3 56BModel coding ................................................................................................................................... 12
1.4 57BUser interface .................................................................................................................................. 14
1.5 58BHardware configurations ................................................................................................................... 15
1.6 59BEnvironmental conditions .................................................................................................................. 17
1.7 60BTests ............................................................................................................................................... 17
1.7.1 14BElectrical tests ......................................................................................................................... 17
1.7.2 142BEnvironmental tests ................................................................................................................. 17
1.7.3 143BMechanical tests ...................................................................................................................... 18
1.8 61BWiring diagrams ............................................................................................................................... 19
2. HARDWARE ...................................................................................................................... 39
2.1 62BConstructive characteristics. Horizontal box (PL300H) ........................................................................ 39
2.2 63BConstructive characteristics. Vertical box (PL300V) ............................................................................. 39
2.3 64BConstructive characteristics. TCP mounted ......................................................................................... 39
2.4 65BRear terminals.................................................................................................................................. 40
2.5 6BOptions for rear communications ports: .............................................................................................. 40
2.6 67BRS485 connection detail between several units .................................................................................. 42
2.7 68BEthernet Communication................................................................................................................... 44
2.7.1 14BEthernet by GOF ...................................................................................................................... 44
2.7.2 145BEthernet through RJ45 cable .................................................................................................... 44
2.8 69BTechnical characteristics................................................................................................................... 45
2.8.1 146BAuxiliary power supply voltage ................................................................................................... 45
2.8.2 147BOutput contacts ....................................................................................................................... 45
2.8.3 148BDigital inputs (optoisolated) ...................................................................................................... 46
2.8.4 149BIRIG-B input ............................................................................................................................ 46
2.8.5 150BAnalogue outputs ..................................................................................................................... 47
2.8.6 15BPhase and neutral current circuits (single rated current 1/5 A) .................................................... 47
2.8.7 152BSensitive neutral or isolated neutral current circuits ................................................................... 48
2.8.8 153BVoltage circuits ........................................................................................................................ 48
2.8.9 154BMeasurement accuracy ............................................................................................................. 48
2.9 70BOperating frequency ......................................................................................................................... 48
2.10 71BPhase order.................................................................................................................................... 49
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................... 50
3.1 2BP7 rogramming of digital inputs and logic inputs ................................................................................... 50
3.2 3BF 7 licker management in digital inputs ................................................................................................. 52
3.2.1 15BGeneral description .................................................................................................................. 52
3.2.2 156BSettings range for flicker management ....................................................................................... 53
3.3 74BProgramming of digital outputs .......................................................................................................... 53
3.4 75BProgramming of LEDs ....................................................................................................................... 53
3.5 76BProgramming of General settings ....................................................................................................... 54
3.5.2 158BSetting ranges (table 0, single) ................................................................................................. 55
3.6 7BCommunication configuration ............................................................................................................ 56
3.6.1 159BCommunication via front door (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2) (COM 1) .......................... 56
3.6.2 160BCommunication via rear port no. 1 (Port 2) (COM 2) ................................................................... 56
3.6.3 16BEthernetCommunication ........................................................................................................... 57
3.7 78BOther configuration settings .............................................................................................................. 59
3.7.1 162BAccessible via the keyboard/display and the Protections Console ................................................. 59
3.7.2 163BAccessible only via keyboard/display .......................................................................................... 60
4. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS .................................................. 61
Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.
PL300 User Manual III

INDEX 
4.1 9BP7 hase overcurrent protection ............................................................................................................. 61

4.1.2 165BSettings ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................. 61
4.1.3 16BTiming cancellation .................................................................................................................. 62
4.1.4 167BTimed phase inhibition setting (6 tables) ................................................................................... 62
4.1.5 168BSettings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) ....... 62
4.1.6 169BSettings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) .................................... 63
4.2 80BNeutral overcurrent protection ........................................................................................................... 63
4.2.2 17BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) .................................... 63
4.2.3 172BSetting range of neutral time inhibition (6 tables) ...................................................................... 63
4.2.4 173BSettings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2) ....... 64
4.2.5 174BSettings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) .................................... 64
4.3 81BInstantaneous special operation ......................................................................................................... 64
4.4 82B2nd harmonic restraint ..................................................................................................................... 66
4.5 83BManual closing protection function locking ......................................................................................... 67
4.6 84BDirectionality of the phase and neutral overcurrent protections ............................................................ 67
4.6.1 175BPhase directional in quadrature (67) ......................................................................................... 68
4.6.2 176BPhase directional by sequences (67) ......................................................................................... 69
4.6.3 17BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S0 (V0) ...................................................................... 71
4.6.4 178BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S- (V2) ....................................................................... 72
4.6.5 179BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+S- (V0+V2) ........................................................... 72
4.6.6 180BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by I ................................................................................ 73
4.6.7 18BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+I (V0+Ipol) ........................................................... 73
4.6.8 182BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S-+I (V2+Ipol) ............................................................ 74
4.6.9 183BNeutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+S-+I (V0+V2+Ipol) ................................................ 74
4.6.10 184BNeutral directional (67N); Watimetric directional ..................................................................... 74
4.6.11 185BNeutral directional (67N); I*cos( ) / I*sen( )directional ........................................................... 75
4.7 85BSensitive neutral overcurrent protection ............................................................................................. 77
4.7.2 187BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) (normal y HIGH2) ........................................ 77
4.7.3 18BSetting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (single level) (6 tables) (normal y HIGH2) ......... 77
4.7.4 189BDirectionality ........................................................................................................................... 78
4.8 86BCurrent unbalance protection ............................................................................................................ 81
4.8.2 19BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................... 81
4.8.3 192BSetting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) ....................................................... 81
4.9 87BDirectionality of the current UNBALANCE protection ........................................................................... 82
4.9.1 193BNegative Sequence Directional .................................................................................................. 82
4.10 8BBroken conductor protection ........................................................................................................... 82
4.10.1 194BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 82
4.10.2 195BSettings range (6 tables) ........................................................................................................ 83
4.10.3 196BBroken Conductor Mode 1 ...................................................................................................... 83
4.11 89BPhase characteristic voltage control (function 51V/50V) .................................................................... 84
4.12 90BHigh Current Lockout ...................................................................................................................... 85
4.12.1 19BDescription ............................................................................................................................ 85
4.12.2 20BSetting (table 0, single) .......................................................................................................... 86
4.13 91BCold Load Pickup ........................................................................................................................... 86
4.13.1 201BDescription ............................................................................................................................ 86
4.13.2 20BSettings (table 0, single) ........................................................................................................ 86
4.14 92BIsolated neutral protection .............................................................................................................. 88
4.14.2 204BSetting ranges ....................................................................................................................... 89
4.15 93BOvervoltage protection .................................................................................................................... 89
PL300 User Manual IV

INDEX 

4.15.2 206BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................. 90
4.15.3 207BSetting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) ..................................................... 90
4.16 94BUndervoltage protection .................................................................................................................. 91
4.16.2 209BSetting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................. 91
4.16.3 210BSetting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) ..................................................... 92
4.17 95BVoltage unbalance protection .......................................................................................................... 92
4.17.1 21BTimed characteristic .............................................................................................................. 92
4.17.2 21BInstantaneous characteristic ................................................................................................... 92
4.18 96BZero sequence overvoltage protection ............................................................................................... 92
4.18.1 213BSetting range (6 tables) .......................................................................................................... 93
4.19 97BFrequency protection ...................................................................................................................... 93
4.19.1 214BMinimum frequency ............................................................................................................... 94
4.19.2 215BMaximum frequency ............................................................................................................... 94
4.19.3 216BFrequency gradient ................................................................................................................ 94
4.20 98BFuse failure .................................................................................................................................... 96
4.21 9BTeleprotection ................................................................................................................................ 97
4.21.1 217BOperation .............................................................................................................................. 97
4.21.3 219BProtection trip mask (6 tables) ................................................................................................ 98
4.21.4 20BUsed signals .......................................................................................................................... 99
4.22 10BThermal image ............................................................................................................................. 104
4.22.1 21BGeneral description .............................................................................................................. 104
4.22.2 2BSettings .............................................................................................................................. 104
4.22.3 23BTrip times ........................................................................................................................... 105
4.22.4 24BHeating curves ..................................................................................................................... 105
4.22.5 25BCooling curves ..................................................................................................................... 107
4.23 10BField loss protection ..................................................................................................................... 108
4.23.2 27BGeneral setting range ........................................................................................................... 108
4.23.3 28BMHO zone setting range ....................................................................................................... 109
4.24 102BPower protection .......................................................................................................................... 110
4.24.1 29BGeneral ............................................................................................................................... 110
4.24.2 230BMinimum power protection ................................................................................................... 110
4.24.3 231BMaximum power protection ................................................................................................... 111
4.24.4 23BReverse power protection ...................................................................................................... 111
4.24.5 23BReactive power reverse protection ......................................................................................... 111
4.24.6 234BMinimum apparent power protection ..................................................................................... 112
4.24.7 235BMaximum apparent power protection ..................................................................................... 112
4.25 103BBreaker monitoring ....................................................................................................................... 113
4.25.2 237BSetting range (6 tables) ........................................................................................................ 113
4.25.3 238BCoil supervision example ...................................................................................................... 114
4.26 104BOperation logic ............................................................................................................................. 114
4.26.2 240BSetting ranges (6 tables) ...................................................................................................... 115
4.27 105BBreaker failure protection .............................................................................................................. 115
4.27.2 24BSetting ranges (6 tables) ...................................................................................................... 115
4.28 106BTap Changer Locking (50TCL Function) ......................................................................................... 116
4.29 107BLocking of the protection functions ................................................................................................ 116
4.30 108BFault locator ................................................................................................................................ 116
4.30.1 243BIntroduction ........................................................................................................................ 116
4.30.2 24BProgramming settings and collecting results .......................................................................... 116
4.30.3 245BLocal Source Zero Sequence Impedance Setting .................................................................... 119
4.30.4 246BLocator operation ................................................................................................................. 120
PL300 User Manual V

INDEX 
4.31 109Bundercurrent PROTECTION (37) .................................................................................................... 124

4.31.2 248BSettings range ..................................................................................................................... 124
5. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................. 125
5.1 10BRecloser ........................................................................................................................................ 125
5.1.2 250BOperation .............................................................................................................................. 126
5.1.3 251BSetting ranges (6 tables) ........................................................................................................ 128
5.1.4 25BTrips enabling (6 tables) ......................................................................................................... 128
5.1.5 253BEnable of reclosings (6 tables) ................................................................................................ 128
5.1.6 254BOther operation characteristics ................................................................................................ 129
5.2 1BSequence coordination ................................................................................................................... 130
5.3 12BReclosing after tripping by minimum frequency ................................................................................ 130
5.3.2 256BSettings ................................................................................................................................ 130
5.4 13BSpecial recloser to operate with protections with single-pole trip ........................................................ 131
5.5 14BSynchrocheck................................................................................................................................. 131
5.5.2 258BSettings ................................................................................................................................ 132
5.6 15BClose locking with presence or absence of voltage ............................................................................. 133
5.7 16BAutomation function for distribution centres ..................................................................................... 133
5.7.1 259BSlack springs automation functions ......................................................................................... 133
5.7.2 260BVoltage presence .................................................................................................................... 134
5.7.3 261BLocking ................................................................................................................................. 134
6. OTHER SETTINGS........................................................................................................... 135
6.1 17BProgramming of logic outputs .......................................................................................................... 135
6.2 18Blogic Selectivity functions ............................................................................................................... 136
6.3 19BMeasurements chronological record ................................................................................................. 136
7. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................... 137
7.1 20BE1 vents reports ................................................................................................................................ 137
7.2 21BFault records .................................................................................................................................. 139
7.3 2BM 1 easurements ................................................................................................................................ 141
7.3.1 26BMeasurements at the secondary .............................................................................................. 141
7.3.2 263BMeasurements at the primary .................................................................................................. 142
7.3.3 264BVn-Vsinc measurement ........................................................................................................... 144
7.4 123BMeasurements historical report ........................................................................................................ 144
7.5 124BStatistical data ............................................................................................................................... 145
7.6 125BProtection status ............................................................................................................................ 145
7.6.1 267BBy keyboard / display ............................................................................................................. 145
7.6.2 268BThrough PC (Protections Console) ........................................................................................... 145
7.7 126BOscillograph data recorder ............................................................................................................... 146
8. OTHER FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................ 147
8.1 27BT1 ime setting ................................................................................................................................... 147
8.1.1 269BSynchronization ..................................................................................................................... 147
8.2 128BControl messages ........................................................................................................................... 147
8.3 129BLocal/Remote command .................................................................................................................. 152
8.4 130BCommands by keyboard and front pushbuttons ................................................................................. 153
8.5 13BPower supply supervision ................................................................................................................ 153
8.6 132BExternal supply supervision ............................................................................................................. 154
8.7 13BTemperature supervision ................................................................................................................. 154
8.8 134BTest Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 154
PL300 User Manual VI

INDEX 
9. OPERATION MODE ......................................................................................................... 155

9.1 35BT1 hrough keyboard/display ................................................................................................................ 155
9.1.1 270BIntroduction .......................................................................................................................... 155
9.1.2 271BElements of the keyboard /display unit .................................................................................... 155
9.1.3 27BOperating mode ..................................................................................................................... 156
9.2 136BThrough the PC .............................................................................................................................. 159
10. RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS ......................................................... 160
10.1 137BReception and storage .................................................................................................................. 160
10.2 138BConnecting procedure ................................................................................................................... 160
10.3 139BUnit addressing ............................................................................................................................ 161
10.4 140BCommissioning ............................................................................................................................. 161
APPENDIX I. 0BKEYBOARD/ DISPLAY .......................................................................................... 162
APPENDIX II. 1BCURVES FOR TIME CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................... 186
II.1. 1BC
2 EI 255-4 / BS142 Curves ............................................................................................................ 186
II.2. 2BANSI Curves ................................................................................................................................. 199
II.3. 3BU2 ser curve .................................................................................................................................... 208
APPENDIX III. 2BLIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS ............................................................................ 210
APPENDIX IV. 3BCOMMUNICATION PROTOCOL DNP 3.0 RTU ....................................................... 218
IV.1. 24BSettings ....................................................................................................................................... 218
IV.2. 25BOperation indications .................................................................................................................... 220
IV.2.1 273BSpontaneous message indicating ............................................................................................ 220
IV.2.2 274BSynchronization .................................................................................................................... 220
IV.2.3 275BTreatment and detection of digital changes ............................................................................. 220
IV.2.4 276BTransfer of spontaneous messages .......................................................................................... 220
IV.2.5 27BParticular aspects of the operation ......................................................................................... 220
IV.3. 26BDevice Profile Document ............................................................................................................... 222
IV.4. 27BImplementation table .................................................................................................................... 223
IV.5. 28BSignal list .................................................................................................................................... 225
IV.5.1 278BDigital signals ....................................................................................................................... 225
IV.5.2 279BAnalogue measurements ........................................................................................................ 234
IV.5.3 280BCounters............................................................................................................................... 236
IV.5.4 281BCommands ........................................................................................................................... 236
IV.6. DNP FAULT REPORT .................................................................................................................... 237
IV.6.1 Fault number ........................................................................................................................ 237
IV.6.2 Fault current and fault voltage measures ................................................................................. 237
IV.6.3 Relay operating time .............................................................................................................. 238
IV.6.4 Breaker operating time ........................................................................................................... 238
IV.6.5 Flag of the operated phase ..................................................................................................... 238
IV.6.6 Fault Distance ....................................................................................................................... 238
IV.6.7 Event (trip or start) ................................................................................................................ 238
IV.6.8 Operation .............................................................................................................................. 238
APPENDIX V. 4BMODBUS RTU PROTOCOL ................................................................................... 241
V.1. 29BProtocol characteristics .................................................................................................................. 241
V.1.1 28BMessage format...................................................................................................................... 241
V.1.2 283BMODBUS functions ................................................................................................................ 241
V.1.3 284BMessage examples ................................................................................................................. 242
V.1.4 285BUnit status request ................................................................................................................. 246
V.1.5 286BChange request of digital signals ............................................................................................. 247
V.1.6 287BData request by user map ....................................................................................................... 248
V.1.7 28BSynchronization ..................................................................................................................... 248
V.1.8 289BCommand execution ............................................................................................................... 249
V.1.9 290BError codes ............................................................................................................................ 249
PL300 User Manual VII

INDEX 
V.2. 0BP
3 arameters.................................................................................................................................... 249
V.3. 1BU3 nit addresses map ....................................................................................................................... 250
V.4. 2BD 3 ata formats ................................................................................................................................. 251
APPENDIX VI. 5BIEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL ............................................. 255
VI.1. 3BSettings ....................................................................................................................................... 255
VI.2. 34BTables ......................................................................................................................................... 258
VI.3. 35BInteroperability profile IEC 870 5 101 ...................................................................................... 261
VI.3.1 291BSystem or device (system specific parameter) ......................................................................... 261
VI.3.2 29BNet configuration (net specific parameter) .............................................................................. 261
VI.3.3 293BPhysical layer (net specific parameter).................................................................................... 262
VI.3.4 294BLink layer (net specific parameter) ........................................................................................ 263
VI.3.5 295BApplication layer ................................................................................................................... 264
VI.3.6 296BApplication basic functions .................................................................................................... 268
APPENDIX VII. 6BIEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL ........................................................................... 272
VII.1. 36B870-5-103 Communication Protocol Function ............................................................................... 272
VII.2. 37BSettings ...................................................................................................................................... 273
VII.3. 38BControl signals ............................................................................................................................ 273
VII.4. 39BControl analogue measurements ................................................................................................... 274
VII.5. 40BCommands.................................................................................................................................. 274
APPENDIX VIII. 7BIEC 61850PROTOCOL ..................................................................................... 275
VIII.1. 41BIntroduction ............................................................................................................................... 275
VIII.2. 42BPrevious steps toconfigurethe deviceTr......................................................................................... 276
VIII.2.1 297BIED Import to project .......................................................................................................... 277
VIII.3. 43BProtection Configuration ............................................................................................................. 278
VIII.3.1 298BIED Properties .................................................................................................................... 278
VIII.3.2 29BCommunications ................................................................................................................. 279
VIII.3.3 30BDatasets ............................................................................................................................. 281
VIII.3.4 301BReport Control Blocks (RCB) ................................................................................................ 282
VIII.3.5 302BGoose Control Blocks (GOCB) .............................................................................................. 283
VIII.3.6 30BGooseSubscription .............................................................................................................. 283
VIII.3.7 304BSettings ............................................................................................................................. 284
VIII.3.8 305BCommands ......................................................................................................................... 284
VIII.3.9 306BPrivate parts ....................................................................................................................... 284
VIII.4. 4BProtection update ....................................................................................................................... 285
APPENDIX IX. 8BPREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................. 287
IX.1. 5BF
4 ailure detection .......................................................................................................................... 287
IX.2. 6BE4 rror handling procedure ............................................................................................................... 288
APPENDIX X. 9BRECEPTION TESTS ............................................................................................. 289
X.1. 47BMaterial needed ............................................................................................................................ 289
X.2. 48BMeasurement test .......................................................................................................................... 289
X.2.1 307BMeasurements in display ........................................................................................................ 289
X.2.2 308BMeasurements in console........................................................................................................ 289
X.3. 49BProtection functions....................................................................................................................... 290
X.3.1 309BHardware status ..................................................................................................................... 291
X.3.2 310BInstantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency) ...................................................................... 291
X.3.2.1. Pickup and dropout in the trip ............................................................................................. 291
X.3.2.2. Speed of the instantaneous trip ........................................................................................... 291
X.3.2.3. Instantaneous trip with additional time ................................................................................ 292
X.3.2.4. Function locking test .......................................................................................................... 292
X.3.3 31BTimed units (current and voltage) ............................................................................................ 292
X.3.3.1. Pickup and dropout ............................................................................................................ 292
X.3.3.2. Definite time ...................................................................................................................... 292
PL300 User Manual VIII

INDEX 
X.3.3.3. Tripping times through curves ............................................................................................. 292

X.3.4 312BCurrent unbalance units ......................................................................................................... 292
X.3.4.1. Pickups ............................................................................................................................. 293
X.3.4.2. Trip times .......................................................................................................................... 293
X.3.5 31BBroken conductor unit ............................................................................................................ 293
X.3.5.1. Pickups ............................................................................................................................. 294
X.3.5.2. Trip times .......................................................................................................................... 294
X.4. 50BRecloser........................................................................................................................................ 294
X.4.1 314BInitial tests ............................................................................................................................ 295
X.4.1.1. TRIP (D),RECLOSURE (R),NORMAL (N)) ............................................................................. 296
X.4.1.2. D,R,D,R,N ......................................................................................................................... 296
X.4.1.3. D,R,D,R,D,R,N ................................................................................................................... 297
X.4.1.4. D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R. ............................................................................................................... 297
X.4.1.5. D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R,. DEF. TRIP ............................................................................................. 297
X.4.2 315BEnabling checking test ........................................................................................................... 298
X.4.2.1. Enabling of allowed trips ..................................................................................................... 298
X.4.2.2. Recloser enabling ............................................................................................................... 299
X.4.3 316BTests with/without reference voltage ........................................................................................ 299
X.4.4 317BRecloser locking test .............................................................................................................. 299
X.4.5 318BTime measurements ............................................................................................................... 299
X.4.5.1. Recloser time ..................................................................................................................... 299
X.4.5.2. Reclaim time ..................................................................................................................... 299
X.5. 51BCoil supervision ............................................................................................................................. 300
X.6. 52BChecking of the display and clock operation .................................................................................... 300
X.7. 53BTime setting of the unit .................................................................................................................. 301
APPENDIX XI. 10BDEFAULT SETTINGS .......................................................................................... 302
PL300 User Manual IX

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The equipment of the family PL-300 are multi-function protection relays using numerical technology, and they constitute the
basic element of protection, measurement and control for cogeneration facilities or for HV/MV electrical bays. They can be used
as autonomous elements of protection, control and measurement of an electric bay, or integrated within an Integrated Protection
and Control System.
Inside the family different models exist that differ to each other for some hardware aspect or for their functionality. The Firmware
is common for all the models; the available functions for the user in each model are defined in a circuit of programmable logic
(PLD). The Firmware is chargeable in the equipment through the serial port, what facilitates the versions updating.
1.1 SCOPE OF THE MANUAL

54B
This manual not only applies to a certain PL300 model, but to the whole family. For each specific model only the physical
characteristics and functions of the model are applied. The manual consists of two volumes: the first contains the information
regarding configuration, functions etc. and the second contains the following appendixes: curves for the operation of the
timed functions, communication protocols, keyboard/display menu structure, etc.
describes the functions of the specific model and its

interconnections diagram.
1.2 FUNCTIONS
5B
Protection
 Standard functions
 Three phase overcurrent protection (3x50/51, with two instantaneous levels)
 Neutral overcurrent protection (50N/51N, with two instantaneous levels)
 Phase current unbalance protection (46)
 Broken conductor protection (46BC)
 Breaker monitoring
 Close and trip circuit monitoring
 Breaker failure
 2nd harmonic restraint
 Functions depending on model
 Sensitive neutral overcurrent (50SN/51SN)
 Directionality for the phase overcurrent (3x67)
 Directionality for the neutral overcurrent (67N)
 Isolated neutral directional (67IN)
 Second directional overcurrent unit (67,67N), independent of the first unit
 Voltage controlled overcurrent (50/51V), Cold Load Pickup, High Current Lockout
 Special functions (zones, pilot protection, negative sequence directional...)
 Phase voltage protection: overvoltage (3x59), undervoltage (3x27), unbalance (47)
 Zero sequence overvoltage protection (59N, 64)
 Frequency protection: maximum (81M), minimum (81m), df/dt (81R)
 Power protection (32): maximum, minimum, reverse
 Fuse failure surveillance
PL300 User Manual 10

 Thermal image (49)

 Fault locator
 Field loss (40)
 Undercurrent protection (37)
Automations
 Functions depending on model
 Three-phase recloser (overcurrent trips)
 Recloser for single-phase overcurrent trips
 Recloser for restoration after frequency trips
 Synchrocheck
 Special automatisms for distribution centres (Slack springs, Voltage presence)
Measurements
 Phase and neutral current measurement (optional: sensitive neutral)
 Simple and compound voltage measurement
 Active, reactive and apparent power measurement
 Active and reactive energy measurement
 Power factor measurement
 Current maximeter
 Negative sequence measurement (I2/I1) in %
Data acquisition
 Events chronological reports
 Fault chronological reports
 Maximum and minimum measurement historical
 Oscillograph data recorder
Other characteristics
 Settings tables. Except for the configuration settings, which are single table settings, there are 6 tables for the
various setting groups. One of the 4 tables is the active one in a certain moment. The active table selection can
protections console or by activation of a digital input.

1.3 MODEL CODING

56B
The PL300 protection family has the following models:
Non directional:
NB: 50/51 + 50/51N + 46 + 46BC + 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC
NC: Model NB + 50/51SN + 49 + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50TCL + 68FF
ND: Model NC + 59 + 27 + 47 + 59N + 81O/U + 81R + 25
NE: Model ND + FL
(for all of them, the 79 function is optional)
Directional:
DB: 67 + 67N + 46 + 46BC + 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC
DC: Model DB + 67SN + 67IN + 49 + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50TCL + 68FF
DD: Model DC + 59 + 27 + 47 + 59N + 81O/U + 81R + 25 + 37
DE: Model DD + 2nd unit 67/67N + 50BF (single-phase)
DF: Model DE + FL
(for all of them, the 79 function is optional)
Distributed generation interconnection:

IB: 50/51 + 67N + 46 + 46BC+ 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC + 68FF + 59 + 27 + 47 +
59N + 81O/o + 81R + 25 + 32 + 79 + 79 (81o) + High current lockout
IC: Model IB + 49 + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50TCL + 2nd unit 67/67N + 37
For distribution centres:

CR: 50/51 + 50/51N + 46 + 46BC+ 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC + 49 + 79 +High
Current Lockout + Special automatisms
Special models: they are those that, in their functionality, do not exactly correspond to any of the
families described:
E1: 67 + 67N + 67NS + 46 + 46FA + 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC + 51V + 79 +High
Current Lockout + LF
E2: 67 + 67N +67NS + 51V + 27 + 59 +59N + FF + 81 + 32 + 49
E3: 50/51 + 50/51N + 50/51NS + 67NA + 7
E4: 67 + 67N + 67NS + 46 + 46FA + 50BF (three-phase) + 74TC/CC + 51V + 79 +High
Current Lockout + Cold Load Pickup + 50CSC + 81 + 25 + 32 + LF
E5: 67 + 67N + 67NA + 67NS + 46 + 46FA + 74TC/CC + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50CSC
+ 27 + 59 + 47 + 68FF + 81 + 50 BF (three-phase) + 49 + High Current Lockout + 79
E6: 67 + 67N + 67NA + 67NS + 46 + 46FA + 74TC/CC + 51V + Cold Load Pickup + 50CSC
+ 27 + 59 + 47 + 68FF + 81 + 50 BF (three-phase) + 49 + LF + High Current Lockout + 79
E7: 50/51 + 50/51N + 50/51NS + 46 + 46FA + 74TC/CC + 51V + Cold Load Pickup +
50CSC + 27 + 59 + 47 + 68FF + 81 + 50 BF (three-phase) + 49 + High Current Lockout +
79

Model coding:

Transformer arrangement:
T4 T5 T9
Model NB IN
Model NC IN ISN
Model ND* IN ISN VSYNC VO calculated
Model ND* IN VO VSYNC IN calculated
Model NE* Same transformer arrangement as model ND
Model DB IN VO
Model DB + current polarized 67N IN VO IO
Model DC IN ISN VO
Model DC + current polarized 67N * IN ISN IO VO calculated
Model DC + current polarized 67N * ISN VO IO IN calculated
Model DD* IN ISN VSYNC VO calculated
Model DD* ISN VO VSYNC IN calculated
Model DD + current polarized 67N ISN IO VSYNC IN and VO calculated
Model DE* Same transformer arrangement as model DD
Model DE + current polarized 67N Same transformer arrangement as model DD + current polarized 67N
Model DF* Same transformer arrangement as model DD
Model DF + current polarized 67N Same transformer arrangement as model DD + current polarized 67N
Model IB IN VO VSYNC
Model IB + current polarized 67N * IN IO VSYNC VO calculated
Model IB + current polarized 67N * VO IO VSYNC IN calculated
Model IC Same transformer arrangement as model IB
Model IC + current polarized 67N * Same transformer arrangement as model IB + current polarized 67N
Model CR IN
The units that have a V0 measuring input enables selecting the functions and protections related to this magnitude and this
can be done directly with an average value or with the vector sum of the three phases of tension.
See transformer arrangement examples in the wiring diagrams.
1.4 USER INTERFACE

57B
 Local. The front board has:

 16 key keyboard
 4 signalled push-buttons
 I: breaker closure
 O: breaker opening
 L/R: Local / Remote
 unwished manoeuvres. It must be pushed at
the same time you push the other buttons for them to have effect.
 These pushbuttons must be pushed at least for 0.5 seconds to be considered active.


 2 line, 16-character LCD

 7 red LEDs and one green/red
 RS232 connector for direct connection with a PC. Procome protocol.
 Remote. Depending on model, the rear board has one or two ports which can be Glass fiber optic (ST type
connector), Plastic fiber optic, RS232 or RS485 for connection to PC, modem or Substation Control unit (in
Integrated Systems). The protocol can be Procome, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or IEC 870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-103.

 Ethernet communication (RJ45, GFO)

 It is only applied in those models equipped with an Ethernet port
 PROCOME encapsulated
 DNP encapsulated
 Peer to peer communications.
 61850
 IEC 61850 communication options
 Single RJ45 Ethernet
 Single FOC Ethernet
 Double GFO Ethernet redundancy
 For serial communication these IEC 61850 models (R-type box) include:
 1 RS232 port Procome protocol
 1 GFO (unique option in case of double GFO Ethernet) or RS485 protocol DNP3.0.
1.5 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

58B
Here below is a description of the hardware possibilities defined in specific models:
Box type:
 Horizontal
 Vertical
Terminal type:
 For pin type terminals
 For closed terminals
Terminals:
 Torque of terminals mounted on the rear panel.
 Supply terminals
 Minimum: 0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)
 Maximum: 0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)
 I/O terminals:
 Current and voltage terminals (plug-in connector)
 Current and voltage terminals (closed terminals)
 Terminal wiring
The terminal cables must be made of single-section copper AWG 12 to 18 (4 mm2 to 0.8mm2)
 Supply terminals
 Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)
 I/O terminals:

 Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)

 Current and voltage terminals
 Section AWG 12 cables (4 mm2)
Power supply:
 125 / 220 Vdc
 24 / 48 Vdc
*For more details see 2.8.1.Auxiliary power supply voltaje section.
Digital inputs voltage range:

 Extended (low): 18 up to 160 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).
 Extended (high): 86 up to 280 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).
 Restricted 24 Vdc: 18 up to 34 Vdc. They are single-directional inputs (with polarity).
Number of digital inputs/outputs:
 Standard:
 8 inputs (5 independent, 3 with a common point)
 7 outputs (4 independent, 3 with a common point)
 Extended (option 1): adds to the standard
 9 inputs (6 independent, 3 with a common point)
 5 independent inputs
 2 analogue inputs (0 to 5 mA); ask the factory about other ranges.
 27 inputs (first 12 with a common point and next 15 with another common point).

Rear communication:
 Glass optical fiber (GOF)
 Plastic optical fiber (POF)
 RS232
 RS485
 GOF + GOF
 POF + POF
 RS232 + RS232
 RS485 + RS232
 GOF + RS232
 GOF + Ethernet (RJ45)
 GOF + Ethernet (OF)

 RS232 + Ethernet (RJ45)

 RS485 + Ethernet (RJ45)
In case of having two rear ports, the one mentioned in second place is in parallel with the front RS232 (they occupy the same
port) except in the case it is Ethernet.
Analogue inputs:
The unit can have up to 9 analogue inputs (through transformer).
Inputs 1, 2 and 3 are used for phase currents measurement.
Input 4 is used for neutral current measurement.
Input 5 depends on model. There are the next possibilities:
 No input
 Sensitive neutral or isolated neutral current measurement
 Zero sequence voltage measurement V0
Inputs 6, 7 and 8 are used for the phase voltages measurement.
Input 9 depends on model. There are the next possibilities:
 No input
 Line voltage measurement for the Synchrocheck function
 Zero sequence voltage measurement V0
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

59B
Operating temperature -20 up to 85 ºC

Storage temperature -40 up to 85 ºC
Relative humidity up to 95% without condensation
1.7 TESTS
60B
1.7.1 Electrical tests

14B
Measurement of dielectric rigidity s/ IEC255-5, series C (2 kV, 1 minute)

Measurement of insulation resistance s/ IEC 255-5, > 10 Gigaohms at 500 Vdc
Pulse (shock wave) s/ IEC -255-5, appendix E., class III
HF disturbances s/ IEC -255-22-1, class III
Fast transients s/ IEC 61000-4-4, class IV
Immunity to electrostatic discharges s/ IEC 61000-4-2, class IV
Voltage pulses s/ IEC 61000-4-5, class IV
Micro-cuts s/ IEC 60870-2-1, 100ms at 110 Vdc
Radiated electromagnetic interference s/ EN 61000-6-4
Immunity to radiated fields s/ IEC 61000-4-3, class III
Immunity to conducted radiofrequency signals s/ IEC 61000-4-6, class III
Immunity to low frequency radiated fields s/ IEC 61000-4-8
1.7.2 Environmental tests

142B
Cold s/ IEC 68-2-1 (-40ºC)

Dry heat s/ IEC 68-2-2 (+85ºC)

Humid heat s/ IEC 68-2-3 (+70ºC, 93% relative humidity)

Change of temperatura s/ IEC 68-2-14 (-20º/70ºC 2 4-hour cycles)
Operating range -10ºC. up to 55ºC
1.7.3 Mechanical tests

143B
Vibration test s/ IEC 255-21-1 class II

Shock and bump test s/ IEC 255-21-1 class I

1.8 WIRING DIAGRAMS

61B
All the following wiring diagrams show one of the possible digital input and output programming (very simple). See all the
In the outputs with change-over contact the common point is the middle one.
- .
NB and CR models

NC model

ND, NE, DD, DE y DF models (with V0 calculated cod. ** **1*****01)

ND, NE, DD, DE and DF models (with IN calculated, , cod. ** **1*****02)

DB model (cod. DB **1******0)

DC model (cod. DC **1*****00)

DC model with polarization with 67N current (V0 calculated cod. DC **1*****11)

DC model with polarization ith 67N current (IN calculated, cod. DC **1*****12)

DD, DE and DF models with polarization by 67N current (IN and V0 calculated, cod. ** **1*****13)

IB, IC models (cod. I* **1*****00)

IB, IC models with polarization by 67N current (V0 calculated cod. I* **1*****11)

IB, IC models with polarization by 67N current (IN calculated, cod. I* **1*****12)

Special models
Some special models only have its functionality as special. For example, the wiring diagram of E1 Type models is the same as
that of NC family.
EH3030/EH8030 model (Special type E1)

Sometimes, the units can be used with different wiring to those indicated.
Examples:
EH3018 model (Special type E2)

EH8007 model (special type E3)

EH3211 model (special type E4)

EH3273model (special type E5) and EH3272model (special type E6)

EH8274model (special type E7)

The terminal numbers indicated in the previous wiring diagrams is for units with pin type terminals. If the units have closed
type terminals, the only difference lies on those terminals corresponding to T6 and T9 transformers, because VA, VB and VC
measurement transformers, have a common point (compound voltages cannot be connected with closed type terminals, but
only single voltages can).
Connections of the analogue inputs in models with closed type terminals:
Connections of the extension boards (optional)

Block diagram

HARDWARE 
2. HARDWARE
2.1 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. HORIZONTAL BOX (PL300H)

62B
Unit external dimensions
2.2 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. VERTICAL BOX (PL300V)

63B
2.3 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. TCP MOUNTED

64B

HARDWARE 
2.4 REAR TERMINALS

65B
Standard (all for pin type terminals)
Option with closed type terminals for analogue inputs
2.5 OPTIONS FOR REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORTS:

6B
Single port
OF (glass or plastic) RS485 RS232

HARDWARE 
Double port
OF + OF RS485+RS232 RS232+RS232 OF+RS232 Ethernet OF +OF
Ethernet RJ45+ OF Eth.RJ45+RS232 Eth.RJ45+RS485

HARDWARE 
2.6 RS485 CONNECTION DETAIL BETWEEN SEVERAL UNITS

67B
DB9 Female
type rear
SCREEN SCREEN connector (in
the unit)
COMPU SCREEN PL/PD/PM UNIT

Screened
TER twisted pair
NETWORK
END R 120
Ohms SCREEN
SCREEN
PL/PD/PM UNIT
LAST UNIT
SCREEN
NETWORK
END R120
Ohms PL/PD/PM UNIT
Rest of DB9
connector
terminals
without3 inner
Although there is an internal connection in the unit between 1 and 2 pin and between pin number and 4, if a connection is
done on the bus side, as it is shown in the figure, a unit can be removed without causing a loss in the
connection chain continuity.

HARDWARE 
Optical fibre connection to radio modem

HARDWARE 
2.7 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION

68B
2.7.1 Ethernet by GOF

14B
The characteristics of the optical channels are as follows:
 Baud rate: 100Mb

 Connector: ST
 Optical transmitter: LED
 Optical receiver: PIN Photodiode
 Optical output: Without modulating.
 Work wave length: Glass c = 1300nm
 BER 10-9
 Multimode glass optical fiber: 62.5/125 m.
 The values consider the temperature range from 20ºC to +85ºC.
 Losses depending on the Fibre type.
Max. allowed losses Losses Km Connection losses
Glass 62.5/125 m 8 db 4 db 0.5 db
The transmission maximum distance is given by:
PP PC ME
l
 PP= Losses allowed in the link

 PC= Inset losses of additional connections
 ME= Aging margin. 3 db must be considered
 = Cable loss in db/Km

 Reachable maximum distance:
Under the worst conditions In the best conditions
Glass 62.5/125 m 1.25 Km 2 Km
2.7.2 Ethernet through RJ45 cable

145B
 Interface through isolated transformer of 600 impedance ohms

 Insulation 500 V
 Connector RJ45 (female)
 Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
 Cable type: Shielded
 Cable length: 100 m max

HARDWARE 
2.8 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

69B
2.8.1 Auxiliary power supply voltage

146B
Power supply technical data:
Auxiliary power supply

24-48 Vdc
Range 18-60 Vdc
Ripple 20 % over the rated current
110-125-220 Vdc
Range 86-280 Vdc
Ripple 20% over the rated current
Burden 8W min/ 18W max
The units have been designed to be installed and run in environments equipped with a safe and stable direct current
supply. The switched, high-capacity power supplies can be used with alternating current within the following limits:
 From 18 to 60 Vdc peak values for the 24-48 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 14 Vac to
42 Vac RMS approximately.
 From 18 to 280 Vdc peak values for the 110-125-200 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of
70 Vac to 195 Vac RMS approximately.
The digital outputs can operate both in DC and in AC power supply systems.
The units have been tested and certified to IEC standards for installation and operation in direct current systems. They
have not been tested to AC equipment standards.
2.8.2 Output contacts

147B
Relays 1 to 6 and 8 to 13:

 Carry 5 A at 25ºC
 Make (0.5 s) 30 A
 Breaking capacity (resistive load)
 for 220 Vdc: 0.4 A
 for 125 Vdc: 1A
 for 48 Vdc: 3A
 Breaking capacity (L/R=40 ms)
 for 220 Vdc: 0.2 A
 for 125 Vdc: 0.5 A
 for 48 Vdc: 0.5 A
Relays 7 to 14:
 Carry 5 A at 25ºC
 Make (0.5 s) 30 A
 Breaking capacity ( resistive load)
 for 220 Vdc: 0.15 A
 for 125 Vdc: 0.4 A
 for 48 Vdc: 2A

HARDWARE 
 Breaking capacity (L/R=40 ms)

 for 125 Vdc: 0.3 A
 for 48 Vdc: 0.5 A
2.8.3 Digital inputs (optoisolated)

148B
Extended range:
 High: Operating range 86 up to 280 Vdc (inactive below 60 Vdc)
 Low: Operating range 18 up to 160 Vdc (inactive below 13 Vdc)
 Burden: < 3 mA
They are single-directional. In the interconnection diagrams they are presented as follows:
n
n+1
And the corresponding polarity is:
n +
n+1 -
Restricted range:
 24 Vdc: operating range 18 up to 34 Vdc (inactive below 13 Vdc)
 Burden: <=3 mA
They are two-directional (they do not have polarity)
2.8.4 IRIG-B input

149B
 Demodulated input, TTL level

 Type of cable: 2 shielded twisted wires
 Isolation: 500 V

HARDWARE 
Connections:
The input circuit is a 390 ohm serial resistance with an optocoupler; for a 5 V signal, the approximate burden is 10 mA.
The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator depends on its capacity of supplying output current;
a typical value could be 70 mA, so 6 units could be connected, (although the length and the type of wire can also
influence). The wire must be shielded and twisted.
2.8.5 Analogue outputs

150B
 Range: 0 to 5 mA
 Accuracy: +- 1% of the scale background
 Maximum load: 1200 Ohms
 Isolation: 1 kV
2.8.6 Phase and neutral current circuits (single rated current 1/5 A)
15B
 Thermal capacity
 Continuous 20 A
 For 1 second: 500 A
 For ½ cycle 1250 A
 Burden for In = 5 A <0.2VA
 Burden for = 1 A 0.02VA

HARDWARE 
2.8.7 Sensitive neutral or isolated neutral current circuits

152B
 Continuous 20 A
 For 1 second 500A (1 sec.)
 Burden for In = 0, 25 A 0.002VA
2.8.8 Voltage circuits

153B
 Continuous 260V
 For 1 second 5 Un
 Burden for 63.5 V 0.015 VA
 Burden for 100 V <0.03 VA
2.8.9 Measurement accuracy

154B
 Current
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*In)
 With In = 1: class 1 (1% of In)
 With In = 5: class 0.5 (0.5% of In)
 Protection range (0.1 to 200 A)
 1% of the real value, for I >1 A
 3% of the real value, for I <1 A
(In the zone in which the measurement range and the accuracy protection are overlaid, the accuracy will be the
best one)
 Voltage
 Accuracy 0.5% of the nominal voltage Un up to 1.2*Vn
 Dephase angle
 Accuracy 1º
 Active power
 Measurement range (0 to 1.2*In*1.2*Vn)
 With In = 1: class 1 (1% of Pn)
 With In = 5: class 0.5 (0,5% of Pn)
 Frequency
 Accuracy 0.01Hz
2.9 OPERATING FREQUENCY

70B
 Rated: 50 or 60 Hz (programmable)
 Operating range: fn 5 Hz

HARDWARE 
2.10 PHASE ORDER

71B
ABC or CBA (programmable)

UNIT CONFIGURATION 
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
The settings that are defined next configure the unit, for what they are basic.
Some are only accessible by keyboard/display; others are also accessible by Console.
All of them are of single table (Table 0). By keyboard/display you access the programming of the table 0 through the menu
.
3.1 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL INPUTS AND LOGIC INPUTS

72B
In the unit there are two different types of inputs: the digital inputs (physical, wired in the field) or logical inputs (internal).
h
at the same time.
The programming of digital inputs is as follows:
ht.
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG CONFIG. INPUTS
SELECT. N0/NC
INPUTS ACTIV. T.
CONFIG INPUTS allows programming a digital input among the following possibilities:
 Breaker status
 Reference voltage (for the recloser)
 External protection (79/50BF). It causes reclosure (depending on the enables) and activates the Breaker failure
function (three-phase)
 Close command. It activates the closure relay
 Open command. Activates the general trip
 Instantaneous inhibition. If it is active, the overcurrent instantaneous does not trip, but they count the time
passed since their picking up. So, when de input is deactivated and the additional programmed time is elapsed,
they trip instantaneously.
 Set table 1. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 1 as the active table:
 Set table 2. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 2 as the active table.
 Set table 6. If a pulse is received, sets settings table 6 as the active table
 Set Local command/Remote
 Close circuit supervision 1 with 52 open
 Close circuit supervision 1 with 52 close
 Trip circuit supervision 1 with 52 open
 Trip circuit supervision 1 with 52 close
 Close circuit supervision 2 with 52 open
 Close circuit supervision 2 with 52 close
 Trip circuit supervision 2 with 52 open

 Trip circuit supervision 2 with 52 close


to fault recognition for keyboard/display.
 df/dt breaker (Level 1 to Level 4). Option for 81R function
 Teleprotection reception (for 85 function)
 Guard signal loss (for 85 function)
 Zone 3 address reverse (for 85 function)
 79/50BF. External protection A, B, C. They cause reclosure (depending on the enables) and they activate the
respective Breaker Failure functions (single-phase).
 Slack springs. For the corresponding automation
 Fuse failure. It activates the function with the same name.
 Thermal image reposition. It resets the thermal image temperature.
 67 NS Isen(phi) or Icos(phi). It allows using any algorithm, regardless of the setting in the neutral directional.
 67 NS Isen(phi) or Icos(phi). It allows using any algorithm, regardless of the setting in the sensitive neutral
directional.
 Close locking, it locks all the close commands, recloser, pushbutton, command, and digital input.
 Relay locking; while it is active, it sets the relay out of service.
 Recloser locking. If it is active, it locks the recloser and it does not allow its unlocking by communications.
 TOC phases trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.
 TOC neutral trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.
 TOC sensitive neutral trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.
 TOC unbalanced trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.
 TOC phases High trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.
 TOC neutral High trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.
 TOC neutral sensitive High trip lock. Locks the trip of this unit.
 Not allocated. The input can be used by the protection for lockout or logical, or not be used, anyway its state can
be transmitted to control
You should not program more than one input with a determined function.
SELECT. NO/NC. It defines if the input must be interpreted like active when it is viewed closed or when it is viewed open.
Regardless of what has been selected, the digital inputs programmed in outputs, logics, leds, state signalling will display one
when there is voltage in the input and zero when there is no voltage in the input.
For example, for the status of the circuit breaker, if we use a contact 52a we should program the corresponding input as NO
(when it closes it will indicate closed circuit breaker), while if we use a 52b we should program it as NC (when it opens it will
indicate closed circuit breaker).
T.ACTIV.INPUTS (inputactivation time). It is a software filter for the activation / deactivation of digital inputs. The HW filter is
of 1 ms, and it can be extended by software in the number of programmed milliseconds (range 0 to 20 ms).
The programming of logical inputs is as follows:
re of the two located on the right.
By keyboard/display:
PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG CONFIG. INPUTS LOGICAL INPUTS
SELECT. N0/NC

A logical input is a virtual input (not physical), where its status depends on the status of the corresponding logical input
(input 1 corresponds to signal 1, input 15 to signal 15). Its function is the one that has been programmed (the programming
possibilities are the same as for the digital inputs).
This procedure enables the assignation of the relay internal signals to those inputs as if they were wired field signals. Up to
15 logical inputs are permitted (there are only 15 logical signals).
NO/NC selection, input active when the logic is active or inactive.
Delay is not applied to the activation.
Example: if pr
when logical input 3 is active.
digital input and as logical input.
3.2 FLICKER MANAGEMENT IN DIGITAL INPUTS

73B
3.2.1 General description

15B
The flicker consists of a rapid and continuous change in a digital input, normally associated to a failure in the input
contact. This function enables to perform a control that will disable the inputs or digital signals that flicker avoiding that
they could interfer in the integrated control system because when a digital signal has been disabled, it will not display the
status changes.
Three settings have been added in the digital inputs in order to management the flicker:
 Minimum Nº of changes to mark the flicker: Minimum Nº of changes of a signal that should be generated
in a specific interval of time in order to consider that the contact is faulty and that the mentioned signal
will be disabled. (changes are not updated nor its status is refreshed).
 Maximum Nº. of changes to mark the flicker: Maximum Nº of changes of a signal that should be generated
in a specific interval of time in order to consider that the contact is not faulty and that a signal previously
disabled is enabled.
 Flicker time interval (sec.): Time interval is calculated in seconds in order to enable and disable the
digital signals by flicker.
Once a higher number of programmed changes have been detected, the signal will be displayed as invalid; a Procome
change will be generated indicating the change as invalid and from this moment, the mentioned signal will not detect
anymore changes.
There are three options in order to enable the signals previously disabled:
 Unit manual reset.

 Automatic enable: if a digital input previously disabled changes status less time than the maximum
number of changes that mark the flicker (parameter), in the flicker time interval (parameter), the
mentioned input will be enabled. If the parameter for the máximum number of changes in the flicker has
value 0, the automatic enabling for the digital signals will not be carried out.
 Operator enable: default order or programmed by the user (general order that can be sent from the console
or from the Control Center) by giving orders to the unit to enable all of the digital inputs that are
disabled.The order will enable the disabled digital inputs without affecting the flickering management,
which means that if after the order a flicker is detected in the inputs, they will automatically be disabled.

3.2.2 Settings range for flicker management

156B
Setting Min. Max. Step Remarks

Minimum number of changes necessary to
0 255 1
establish intermittence
Maximum number of changes necessary to
0 255 1
eliminate intermittence
Time interval for intermittence (sec.) 1 60 1
3.3 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL OUTPUTS

74B
By console it is carried
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG PROG. OUTPUTS
OUTPUT ACTIV. T.
The functionality of each digital output can be programmed like an OR of the logical signals available in this unit (see point
In the programming through Console (recommended), for each digital output it is clicked with the mouse in the cells
corresponding to the signs whose OR wants to be activated by the output (dot-matrix programming).
w
the output carries out the sealing logic (if the sealing setting is set to YES) and that of opening failure. If it is of the type
e is
keyboard/d
The time of activation of outputs defines the minimum time of operation of each physical output once it has been activated
(in seconds). The range is 0.05 to 5 sec. It appears in the last line of the screen.
the following possibilities
NO SIGNAL (the output remains without assigning, but it can be activated by control commands)
SAME SIGNALS (it is not wished to change the current programming)
signals with the arrow ; when we arrive to a
indicated.
3.4 PROGRAMMING OF LEDS

75B
Through Consol
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG PROG. LEDs
The proceedings are totally analogous to the programming of digital outputs, except that the activation time is not
programmed and that the
keyboard/display, digital input or command

3.5 PROGRAMMING OF GENERAL SETTINGS

76B

157B
Relay in service: it has to be at Yes in order to have the protection fully operative. If it is at NO the protection responds to
the communications and the keyboard/display in order to be put in service; besides it activates the relay and/or LED
Breaker number: it is an identifying text. It can be programmed as alphanumerical by communications, but by keyboard
only as numerical.
Event mask: In the

masked, from the PC. They can not be masked from the keyboard.
Transformation ratios: used by the protection only to give measurements referred to the primary.
Nominal voltage: it is the nominal single-phase voltage. It is used by the protection to give measurements in Procome
format (the scale range of the voltage measurements is 1.2 times the nominal voltage).
- -
phase). In the case of units with closed terminals only the single ones can be applied.
Voltage measurement: it indicates over which voltages the voltage protections must be applied.
tings of voltage Type and Measurement
On the same Console screen, and by keyboard/display on CORRECTION FACTOR (at the same level as PROG.CHART 0)
can be found the following settings:
number for which the counter is increased in one unit.
ans the
kVARh number for which the counter is increased in one unit.
and reactive power given to control (it does not affect to data given by display). It is, in per unit values, the scale range in
which measurements are given related to the corresponding power to 1.2In and 1.2 Vn. It means that if the range required
0T POWER BACKGROUND
0T6U U0T6
3 × 1.2 In × 1.2 Vn
Example 1. In = 5 A, Vn = 63.5 V (110 / 3)

0T 0T
If it is required that the power scale range should be the power corresponding to 6 A (1.2 * 5) and 76.2 V (1.2 * 63.5).
POWER BACKGROUND = 3 * 6 * 76.2
POWER SCALE = 1
Example 2. In = 5 A, Vn = 63.5 V (110 / 3)

0T 0T
It is required a power scale range of 1000 W.

POWER BACKGROUND = 1000
POWER SCALE = 1000 / (3 * 1.2 *5 *1.2 * 63.5) = 0.729
Only by keyboard/display in IRIG-B FORMAT (at the same level of PROG.TABLA 0) the following setting can be found:
" IRIG-B Format ": it determines if the year is taken into account or it is not in the Irig synchronization. The options are:
the unit disposes of two analogue outputs, which offer an output in milliamperes proportional to the
measured value. They can be programmed among the following options (only through a console):
 I maximum, secondary current maximeter. Background scale 6A

 VA, VB, VC and V average, secondary simple voltages. Background scale Vn*1.2
 VAB, VBC, VCA, U Compound average, secondary compound voltages. Background scale 3*Vn * 1.2
 IN, IA, IB, IC, I average, secondary currents. Background scale 6A
 [P(Active Power)], Secondary P absolute value. Background scale 3*Vn*1.2*6
 [Q(Reactive Power)], Secondary Q absolute value. Background scale 3*Vn*1.2*6
 [S(Apparent power)], Secondary S absolute value. Background scale 3*Vn*1,2*6
 [Cos A], Absolute value of phase A power factor. Background scale 1
 [Cos B], Absolute value of phase B power factor. Background scale 1
 [Cos C], Absolute value of phase A power factor. Background scale 1
 [Cos average], Absolute value of average power factor. Background scale 1
 Distance to fault, expressed in % of the line total length
 The operation of the analogue output used to give distance to fault is explained in the section
3.5.2 Setting ranges (table 0, single)

158B
Setting Min. Max. Step Notes

Relay in service YES/NO
Breaker number 5 alphanumeric char.
Events mask
Phase curr. turn. ratio 1 3,000 1
Neutral cur. turn. ratio 1 3,000 1
Sens. N. cur. turn ratio 1 3,000 1
Voltage turn. ratio 1 9,999 1
Simple rated voltage (V) 40.0 200.0 0.1 It is referred to the simple voltage
Type of voltage Simple/Compound
Measurement of voltage Phases in which it is measured
B002 (without year) / B002 IEEE
IRIG-B Format
1344 (with year)
Analogue output 1
Analogue output 2

Active energy constant (kWh) 1 9999 1
Reactive energy constant (kVARh) 1 9999 1
Power correction factor 0.010 2.000 0.001

3.6 COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION

7B
3.6.1 Communication via front door (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2)
159B
(COM 1)
The PL300 unit has an address identifying number, which makes possible to identify the messages sent to the unit, from
the PC, via its front port (or via its rear port in parallel), with protocol PROCOME. This address is programmable from the
s Console.
The units leave the factory with the address 4. This number is the one used in the Engineering program when defining the
installation.
If, for any reason, this number is changed in Engineering, the address programming has to be changed, and vice versa.
If the PL300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as They are also
parity, 1 bit of Stop.
In addition to the keyboard/display, the settings may be displayed/programmed from a PC using the Protections Console.
115200 baud rate or higher, they are only used for firmware teleload, and not to be used in normal operation.
3.6.2 Communication via rear port no. 1 (Port 2) (COM 2)

160B
"SELEC.COMMU. COM2" or from the "GENERAL SETTINGS", "Configuration General" screen in the Protections Console.
The options are: Procome, DNP, MODBUS, IEC870-5-101 or IEC870-5-103 .
Procome:
a setting group is programmed which is analogous to the one defining the front port (it is not necessary that they have the
same values).
DNP:
If the option chosen is DNP, the address is programmable from the keyboard/di
one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address and the rest of
DNP parameters without being programmed. They have to be programmed by the user.
If a replacement of the PL300 unit by other is made, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
The unit also has an identification number of the Master unit to which is connected, and which only accepts messages
address 0. The baud rate, the parity and the number of STOP bits are also programmable. The units leave the factory at
9600 baud, without parity, 1 Stop bit.
Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC with the Protection Console.
For more detail on communication DNP, see the corresponding Appendix

MODBUS:
If the chosen option is MODBUS, the address is programmable from
This address does not need to be the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units
leave the factory with the address and the rest of the MODBUS parameters without been programmed. They have to be
3T
programmed by the user. 3T
If the PL300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
They are also programmable the baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary timers for activation and deactivation of the RT
signal (internal).
Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC with the Protection Console.
For more detail on MODBUS, see the corresponding Appendix.
IEC 870-5-101:
If the chosen opti
e front port, but it is convenient to avoid

confusions. The units leave the factory with the address and the rest of the 101 parameters without been programmed.
They have to be programmed by the user.
signal (internal).
The established communication settings can be seen on displa
Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC
For more detail on 101 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
This protocol can not be used with RS485 port.
IEC 870-5-103:
oes not need to be the

same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address
and the rest of the 103 parameters without been programmed. They have to be programmed by the user.
signal (internal).
Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC
For more detail on 103 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
3.6.3 EthernetCommunication
16B
It is only applied in models with Ethernet port.

In order to configure the Ethernet port the fist parameter to be configured corresponds to the TCP/IP communication
selection. It is programmed from the keyboard/display, by entering "CHANGE SETTINGS", "PROG. TABLE 0",
The options of this parameter are: Procome, DNP, Procome+DNP, Comm.
Horizontal and No. the operation according to this parameter is as follows:
Procome
Through Ethernet port communication with Procome protocol is possible. In this case the selection of Procome protocol in
col,
whilst in the second rear port (if available) communication is carried out through the selected protocol, except Procome.
DNP:
Through Ethernet port communication with DNP protocol is possible. In this case the selection of DNP protocol in the
other DNP protocol, whilst in
the second rear port (if available) communication is carried out through Procome protocol.
Procome + DNP:
Through Ethernet port communication with Procome and DNP protocols. In this case no communication is allowed by the
other port Procome and DNP protocol, whilst in the
second rear port (if available) the setting is "No".
Horizontal Com.
Through Ethernet, communication among several protection relays is possible, according how they are programmed. Each
relay can communicate with other two relays sending 8 different programmable signals to each of them. These
programmable signals can be selected among those available in the unit and it will receive 8 signals from each of the
1 to 8. the necessary parameters to configure the horizontal communication are the
 Protection IP address. It indicates the protection IP address (server unit). They are 32 bits, in decimal
0T 0T
notation separated by dots.

 Relay 1 IP address (Identifier). It indicates the protection 1 IP address with which communication is
0T 0T
desired. They are 32 bits, in decimal notation separated by dots. If the IP address is programmed as
0.0.0.0 , then it will not communicate with that relay.
 Signals to be transmitted Relay 1. They are the signals that are going to be sent to Relay 1 (that with the
0T 0T
protection programmed in the previous parameter as the protection IP address).

 Relay 2 IP address (Identifier). It indicates the protection 2 IP address with which communication is
0T 0T
desired. They are 32 bits, in decimal notation separated by dots. If the IP address is programmed as
0.0.0.0 , then it will not communicate with that relay.
 Signals to be transmitted Relay 2. They are the signals that are going to be sent to Relay 2 (that with the
0T 0T
protection programmed in the previous parameter as the protection IP address).

 The operation is as follows: each relay communicates with the other two, by sending the state of these
signals every 10 ms; if a change is detected in the programmed signals, it immediately sends the states
and repeats them 5 ms and 10 ms later. If there are no new changes it goes back to its normal operation
and it sends the states every 10 ms again. In order to determine communication failures it is necessary to
wait 40 ms; if within this time no communication is received from the relay 1 or 2, failure will be given
with the corresponding relay.

unit itself, that is, they can be made logics, move them to outputs and so on etc.
NO
Communication is not carried out through Ethernet port. In this case, the second rear port (if available) communicates
through the selected protocol, Procome is allowed.
The remaining configuration parameters of Ethernet port are configured with the Sipcon console, in the menu
These parameters are those below:
 Generals

 Protection IP address. It shows the protection IP address (server unit). They are 32 bits, in decimal
0T 0T
notation separated by dots.

 Subnet mask. It defines which part of the IP address identified by the network. They are 32 bits, in
0T 0T
decimal notation separated by dots. All those IP addresses that do not fulfil the net mask, that is, those
which do not have the part of the net mask at 1 are not considered to belong to the net and they are
not treated. For example, the mask 255.255.255.000 allows 256 server addresses that would share
the first three values of the address.
 Gateway. Link gate. It shows the IP address the messages will be sent to for those servers tat do not
0T 0T
belong to the local net. It will be the IP address of the unit in charge of carrying out the router
functions of the net.
 No. of connections. It is fixed at 1.
0T 0T
 Procome
 IP master address. It shows the PC address (customer unit)
0T 0T
 Port. It shows the port the master unit is connected to.

0T 0T
 UCL address. It is the protection address the protocol responds to.

0T 0T
 DNP
 Communicates with any master regardless of the IP it have.The port to connect is 20,000
 All other settings related to the protocol would be the same than serial except related itself to serial
communication
3.7 OTHER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

78B
These settings may be accessed via the keyboard/display or the Protections Console. When accessing via the Console,
3.7.1 Accessible via the keyboard/display and the Protections Console

162B
Frequency
It can be 50 Hz or 60 Hz. It is a fundamental protection setting. If it is not the correct one, the measurements and,
therefore, the protection operation will be wrong.
Language
It can be English or Spanish. It relates to the texts shown on display.
Phase order
It can be A, B, C or C, B, A. It affects only to the protection functions of broken conductor and unbalance (currents
and voltages). To verify that the order correspo
inverse/direct component is close to 0%, when introducing 3 balanced currents of about 1 A.
Push-buttons enabling/ LEDs and locking by command

- ur settings:
pushbuttons and the keys can be used to order commands. These buttons will be only effective when the unit is in
associated to this pushbutton. Then the unit is set in local and the functional pushbuttons can be used.

nothing.
enabling
Functional keys enabling in remote mode

Enables the keys to be used as push buttons when the unit is in remote mode. This is applicable to programmed,
functional and command keys.
Allows locking via protocols

Enables an order issued via a communications protocol to lock a protection function. When the setting is
the locking commands received via communications are ignored.
Enabling power supply
for its operation
Neutral parameter
es
3.7.2 Accessible only via keyboard/display

163B
Calibration
This menu position is exclusively to be used by the Ingeteam Power Technology SA technicians, according to a certain
procedure. It should not be used by the user.
Testing mode
This position of the menu must exclusively be used by the technicians of Ingeteam Power Technology SA, according to a
certain procedure. It can not be used by the user.
Display contrast setting

The procedure to follow is the following one:
 By pushing key -key keyboard) for 3 to 5 seconds, you can enter the contrast setting menu
-
 ↑ and ↓ ↑ ↓
 In
already carried out.

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS 
4. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
4.1 PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

79B

164B
Three-phase overcurrent protection, with the next selectable characteristics (function 50/51):
Timed characteristic
 Inverse normal time( I BSC or I ANSI)
 Inverse short time(IC BSC)
 Inverse long time (IL BSC)
 Very inverse time (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
 Extremely inverse time (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
 Very inverse special time (MIEs BSC)
 Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
 4 User curve(USER 1 to USER 4)
 Definite time
 Drop out with disc emulation option
Instantaneous characteristic
 Two instantaneous elements
 Additional time
The operation of this protection is coordinated with the reclosing function.
Some protection families have a second directional overcurrent function (67,67N), independent of the first one, and
which will be called HIGH2.
4.1.2 Settings ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables)

165B
PHASES TIME chart.

Enable YES/NO/pickup/YES+drop out
Pickup (A) 0.05 200.0 0.01
Definite time
Normal curve, very inverse, extrem.
Curve type
Inverse, etc.
User curve 1 to 4
0.05 1.09 0.01 For IEC curves
Time index
0.5 30.0 0.1 For ANSI curves
Definite time (s) 0.0 600.0 0.01 Definite time if it is TF type
They can be modified depending on the voltage, if
If the Enable setting is set at YES, the function can generate trips, if it is at NO it is not carried out. If it is at PICK UP, it
P, This happens by emuling the disc (see below). This is
general for overcurrent functions.
The pick up current is set in Amperes in the secondary.

Working in definite time, the relay trips after the set time, since the starting current has been exceeded, is elapsed,
independently from the current value.
Working with curve, the time to trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the current value. The curves
which are normal, very inverse and extremely inverse can be selected as corresponding to the standard BS142 (IEC 255-
4) or ANSI. Besides, there is a special very inverse BSC and the moderately inverse ANSI. In Appendix II graphics and
formulas for calculating the time are given, as a function of the ratio between the current and the pickup current. If the
ratio is higher than 40, 40 will be taken for calculating.
Besides, there is the possibility of programming 4 user curves.
The unit allows setting the drop time characteristics, emuling the induction disc of the electromechanical relays and
allowing a better coordination of the protection.
If the enabling is set at YES + REDROP and the current decreases below the 95% of the set value, the trip drops
instantaneously and the pickup drop time will depend on the selected curve (family and index) and o the current. If the
selected curve is definite time, the pickup will drop when the programmed time since it decreases below the pick up
If the enabling is set at YES and the current decreases below the 95% of the set value, the trip and the pick up drop
instantaneously.
The maximum error in times, for values higher than 50 ms, is 30 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the higher of the
two). For the definite time setting of 0 ms, the behaviour is the same as for the instantaneous characteristic (see next
paragraph).
Note. If an unacceptable index value is programmed for a type of curve, the unit takes the closest acceptable value.
4.1.3 Timing cancellation

16B
CANCELATION) a digital or logical input can be programmed for every overcurrent timed , so that if the function is
activated it is not timed any more and behaves as instantaneous.
4.1.4 Timed phase inhibition setting (6 tables)

167B
Setting Min. Max Step Remarks

TOC lock if IOC started YES/NO
This setting enables the inhibition of the timed characteristic in the event of the pick-up of the instantaneous
characteristic
4.1.5 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6

168B
tables) (normal and HIGH2)

These settings can be found PHASES INSTANTANEOUS
chart.
Setting Min Max. Step Notes

Enable YES/NO/Pick up
Phase instantaneous trip (A) 0.05 200.0 0.01
Additional time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
Special function(only in normal)
The trip current is set in secondary Amperes.

If additional time 0 is programmed, for current values between the tripping current and 1.5 times that value, it trips
between 40 and 50 ms; for 2 times the tripping current between 35 and 40 ms, and from 3 times the tripping currents,
on 30 to 35 ms. If an additional time is programmed, this is added to the indicated time
With additional times higher than 50 ms the maximum time error is 30 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the higher of
the two).
4.1.6 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6

169B
tables)
INSTANTANEOUS (HIGH) chart.
Setting Min... Max. Step Notes

Phase instantaneous trip (A) 0.05 200.0 0.01
The characteristics of the times are the same as in the previous paragraph.
4.2 NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

80B

170B
In neutral earthed installations, the neutral overcurrent protection has the same possible characteristics as the described for
phase overcurrent, and independent settings (function 50N/51N).
4.2.2 Setting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) (normal and HIGH2)
17B
GROUND TIME chart.

Enable YES/NO/pickup/YES+Drop
Pickup (A) 0.05 200.0 0.01
Definite time
Normal curve, very inverse, extrem.
Curve type
Inverse, etc.
User curves
Index
Definite time (s) 0.0 600.0 0.01 Time if the type is TF
Ground type (only in HIGH2) Trafo / Calculated
The remarks about curves and accuracy are the same as the ones quoted for phases.
4.2.3 Setting range of neutral time inhibition (6 tables)

172B

Limit current (A) 0.05 200.0 0.1
TOC lock if IOC started YES/NO
The neutral time inhibition setting allows the inhibition of this characteristic from the moment the neutral instantaneous
characteristic picks up onwards.

The limit current is the one after which it stops following the curve and it trips in the time the curve gives for this value,
that is, the curve turns into a horizontal line from this value. If you do no want to use it, program the maximum value.
4.2.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6

173B
tables) (normal and HIGH2)

GROUND INSTANTANEOUS
chart.

Neutral instantaneous time (A) 0.05 200.0 0.01
Instantaneous additional time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
Special operation
Ground type (only in HIGH2) Trafo / Calculated
The trip current is set in secondary Amperes.
The remarks about functioning time are the same as the ones quoted for phases.
4.2.5 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6

174B
tables)
(
INSTANTANEOUS (HIGH)chart.

Neutral instantaneous trip (A) 0.05 200.0 0.01
The characteristics of times are the same as the ones indicated for phases.
4.3 INSTANTANEOUS SPECIAL OPERATION

81B
The settings corresponding to the phase, neutral and sensitive neutral instantaneous (only in the low level), are extended with
the settings below:
 Special operation: Options:

 NO
 Enab. after closing (Enable ONLY after closing)
 T. after closing (Timing after closing )
 T. after reclosing 1 (Timing after reclosing 1)
 Special fixed time. It is the instantaneous operation time, during the special operation.
 Special operation time. It is the time during which the special operation is maintained
Note 1. In the trip permission screen there are independent masks for every instantaneous level.
Note 2. The operation described below implies the setting E be at YES and that the recloser is In (although it can be blocked).
It is enabled at NO; the instantaneous is disable under any condition.
If the recloser is out of service, the masks do not have any effect.
 Operation (with setting of the function Enable at YES):


the instantaneous is disabled.
If the corresponding mask is at NO, the instantaneous is disabled.
 Option
a true instantaneous.

 If the corresponding mask is at NO, the instantaneous is disabled.
 rmission screen
 If the corresponding mask is at NO, the instantaneous is disabled.

 In other closings, different to the first reclosing, the unit operates as it does no, that is, it depends on the
masks and when it is enabled, it is with the normal additional time.
4.4 2ND HARMONIC RESTRAINT

82B
It locks the first level of the units 51, 50, 51N, 50N and 46 (time and instantaneous unbalance). For 50/51 units, restraint
is available for a single phase or for all phases.
If it is programmed as restraint of the phase itself:
In order to activate the locking, the following must be given at least in this phase and simultaneously:
 The fundamental current must be higher than the minimum value for inrush.
 The ratio between the 2nd harmonic value and the fundamental one must exceed the threshold set.
 The 2nd harmonic must be higher than 50mA.
In order to deactivate the locking, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 This phase is below the 95% of the minimum current, or

 This phase is below the 95% of the restraint percentage threshold
In this case it is the same for neutral. In the absence of a Neutral transformer, a Neutral 2nd harmonic restraint is effected
with the calculated measurement.
If the conditions are given in one phase or in neutral, it is enough to lock the unbalance functions.

The settings (6 tables) are those below:

NO
Phase enabling Restraint for phase
Restraint for all phases
NO
Neutral enable
YES
2nd harmonic threshold (%) 5 100 1
Phase minimum threshold (A) 0.1 200 0.01
Neutral minimum threshold (A) 0.1 200 0.01
4.5 MANUAL CLOSING PROTECTION FUNCTION LOCKING

83B
Note.- this function is only available in the EH3211 model.
This function is only active when the unit is manual, that is, when the recloser is locked either by command, input, R key, or
by setting. If the unit does not have recloser, this functionality is always active.
This function is an OR of one function that checks the modules and another function which checks the angle of the direct
and inverse sequence currents.
The conditions for the activation of the locking signal are the following ones:
 I2 > k * I1 , where k can be set

 Ang(I2) - Ang (I1) > Aj.angle, where Aj.angle can be set
Each condition has its own enabling; if both are enabled, the output will be an OR of both of them. If the direct and reverse
sequences are lower than 0.15A, the output of the function will be zero. Functions cannot be locked in such a situation.
The settings (6 tables) are as follows:
Setting Min Max Step Notes

NO
Enable module
YES
Module k constant 0 10 0.01
NO
Enable angle
YES
Angle 0 359 1
4.6 DIRECTIONALITY OF THE PHASE AND NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTIONS

84B
Depending on model, the described protection functions can be directional.
if it is FOWARD or REVERSE, it indicates that the function must act as directional (in one direction or in the other one) and if
it is set as NO it must act as NON DIRECTIONAL.
For the neutral directional there are 4 directional types: the angular, the watimetric, the I*cos( ) and the I*sen( ).

Watimetric directional and the cosen type directional are practically equal, with the only exception that one is set to W and
the other one to A.
Note. even when the Torque Control set at YES (FOWARD or REVERSE), the directionality can be blocked (make it operate as non-directional) by
tion.
possibilities are related next and afterwards the functions operation is described.
 Phase direction criteria. It is applied in the phase directional function (67). Next are the possibilities:
 Phase angle (degrees). Programmable from 0 to 360º. It is applied in the phase directional function (67) and in
the neutral directional function (67N) in case the S- neutral direction criterion has been chosen.
 Neutral polarization. This setting is only for models that have the possibility to polarize the neutral direction by
current. In this case, the possibilities are V (polarization by voltage only), I (polarization by current only) or V+I
(polarization by both parameters).
 Neutral directional type. It can be pro
 Neutral direction criteria. It is applied in the neutral directional function when it is polarized by voltage. The
possibilities are: S0 (zero voltage polarization), S- (polarization by negative voltage sequence), or S0+S-
(polarization by both parameters).
If several polarization criteria combinations are used, the fault will be decided to be forwards if some of the criteria show it is
forwards.
 Neutral angle (degrees). Programmable from 0 to 360º. It is applied in the neutral directional function (67N) in
case the S0 neutral direction criterion has been chosen.
 Minimum active power. It is used forWatimetric directional. Setting range from 0 to 2000W in steps of 1W.
P=Vn*In*cos( - c)
0T =Angle between Vn and In.
 If the power is higher than this value in negative it is considered to be forward fault. If it is higher than this value
in positive value it is backwards fault.
 Minimum current. It is used forI*cos( ) and I*sen( )directional. Setting range from 0.05 to 200A in steps of
0.01A. I minimum=In*cos( - c)
0T = Angle between Vn and In.
 If. the I minimum is higher than this value in negative it is considered to be forward fault. If it is higher than this
value in positive value it is backwards fault.
 Polarization voltage. It is the minimum value of the polarization voltage, below which it is considered that the
direction is not known with certainty.
 Vn minimum threshold. In order to allow the pick up of the neutral directional unit, a Vn minimum threshold must
be exceeded.
 Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional). If it is set as YES allows the overcurrent trip if the
polarization voltage is lower than the minimum polarization voltage; if it is set as NO in those conditions the
overcurrent trip is not allowed.
 Phase zone width and neutral zone width. They are settings that show the angle that the trip zone of the phase
and neutral units will respectively cover. That is, if the maximum torque line is set to 0º and the pick up zone
width is set to 70º the relay will trip between +35º y 35º. This zone has to be added 5º at each side to obtain
the locking zone. In this zone the relay maintains the last state in which it was (Front or back). That is, if it comes
from a trip zone, this trip is maintained until the locking zone is crossed. If it comes from a non-trip zone it is
maintained without tripping until crossing that zone.
For example, if we want the tripping zone between
4.6.1 Phase directional in quadrature (67)

175B
Operation
For the phase directionality detection, the polarization voltage is the one corresponding to the connection in quadrature
(90º), where each phase current is compared with the compound voltage between the other two phases.

Locking zone
Cycle no.-4
Phase directional
It works as three single-phase units in which the polarization voltages are the voltages composed by the healthy phases.
These voltages will be obtained through calculation or through transformer measurement depending if the setting voltage
type shows that the introduced signals are simple voltages (calculation) or compound (measurement).
In case the phase order ABC is polarized with Vab, Vbc and Vca against Ic, Ia, and Ib. In case the phases order CBA is
polarized with Vba, Vcb and Vac against Ic, Ia and Ib.
There is a 5th zone between the locking zone and the trip zone, for which the present directional status is maintained.
Memory
It is polarized by the positive sequence voltage while it is higher than a threshold. If the voltage is lower than this value it
is polarized by means of the voltage memorized 2 cycles before disappearing the voltage. This memorization is maintained
0.5 seconds.
Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional)

This setting is used when the polarization voltage falls below a threshold (Polarization V setting), so that if it is set as YES,
it indicates forwards (trip permission) and if it is set as NO, it indicates reverse (no permission).
The memory treatment would have been previously done.
Signalling
It provides forward and reverse signalling per phase.
Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as NO if the polarization magnitudes are below the
threshold, the direction is not signalled.
Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional)set as YES if the polarization magnitudes are below the
threshold, it signals reverse and forward.
4.6.2 Phase directional by sequences (67)

176B
Operation
 Negative sequence directional

 The direction is determined comparing the negative sequence voltage and current, being I2 higher than a
threshold and V2 higher than a threshold.

90-setting angle < arg(I2)-arg(V2)<270-setting angle

3T
Negative sequence directional locking

 If the negative sequence voltage is lower than a threshold (Polarization V setting) the positive sequence
directional is carried out.
 If the negative sequence current is lower than a threshold (0.068 A) the previous selection is maintained.
Positive sequence directional

The direction is determined comparing the positive sequence voltage and current.
90-setting angle > arg(I1)-arg(V1) > 270-setting angle

3T
Memory
6TU
It is polarized by the positive sequence voltage while it is higher than a threshold. If the voltage is lower than this value, it
is polarized by means of the voltage memorized 2 cycles before the voltage disappears. This memorization is maintained
0.5 seconds.
6TU

Trip permission without Vpol (in display locking directional).
This setting is used when the polarization voltage(V1) falls below a threshold (setting), so that if it is set as YES, it
indicates forwards and if it is set as NO, it indicates reverse.
The memory treatment would have been previously done.
Signalling
6TU
It provides forward and reverse signalling. If the direction is forwards, the signals Forward A, Forward B and Forward C get
activated. If the direction is reverse, the signals Reverse A, Reverse B and Reverse C get activated.
With trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold,
the direction is not signalled.
With trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold,
it signals reverse and forward.
4.6.3 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0 (V0)

17B
Operation with polarization by V0, zero sequence voltage

The direction is determined using the neutral current (3·I0) with the neutral voltage as polarization, (3·V0). The angle
determines the range in which the fault is considered forwards and reverse. The fault is considered forwards if:
90-setting angle<arg(I0)-arg(V0)<270-setting angle

3T
The measurement of 3V0 can be obtained through a transformer or calculated using the phase simple voltages. If the
The measurement
that measurement

This setting is used when the polarization voltage (3·V0) falls below the threshold (Setting Vpolarization), so that if it is set
as YES, it indicates forwards and if it is set as NO, it indicates reverse.
Signalling
It provides forward and reverse signalling.
Being the trip permission set as NO if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, the direction is not signalled.

Being the trip permission set as YES if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold, it signals reverse and forward.
4.6.4 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S- (V2)

178B
Operation with Polarization by V2, reverse sequence voltage

The direction is determined using the negative sequence current with the negative sequence voltage (V2) as polarization.
The angle determines the range in which the fault is considered forwards and reverse. The setting angle is the same as
that used for the phase directional.

3T

This setting is used when the polarization voltage (V2) falls below the threshold (Vpolarization Setting), so that, if it is set
Signalling
Being the trip permission set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold the direction is not signalled.
Being the trip permission set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold signals reverse and forward.
4.6.5 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+S- (V0+V2)

179B
Operation with polarization by V0 and V2

The direction is determined regardless of the previous criteria. If any of them determines that the direction is the trip
direction, the trip permission is given.

This setting is used only when in both of the previous units the polarization magnitude is below the threshold
(Vpolarization setting).
Signalling
It provides forward and reverse signalling. The directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and
polarization by current units so that the trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion.
Being the trip permission set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold the direction is not signalled.

Being the trip permission set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold signals reverse and forward.
4.6.6 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by I

180B
Operation with polarization by current

The direction is determined comparing the earthing current (Ipol) with the neutral current. The trip direction happens
when both currents are in phase.
For the direction to be checked the following condition must be fulfilled Ipol>0.068 A.
There is a 5th zone between the locking zone and the trip zone, for which the present directional status is maintained,
both if it is polarized by voltage or by current.
Locking by lack of polarization

If the polarization current (Ipol) falls below a threshold (0.068A), it indicates that the fault is reverse and there is no trip
permission.
Signalling
4.6.7 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+I (V0+Ipol)

18B
Operation
The direction is determined regardless of the previous criteria (V0 and I). If any of them determines that the direction is
the trip direction, the trip permission is given.
The earth fault directional output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the trip
permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion.

(Vpolarization setting) in the case of the V0 and below 68 mA in the case on the current.
Signalling
Being the permission trip set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold the direction is not signalled.
Being the permission trip set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the threshold signals reverse and forward.

4.6.8 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S-+I (V2+Ipol)

182B
Operation
The direction is determined regardless of the previous criteria (V2 and I). If any of them determines that the direction is
the trip direction, the trip permission is given.
The earth fault directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the
trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion.

(Vpolarization setting) in the case of the V2 and below 68 mA in the case of the current.
Signalling
Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the
threshold the direction is not signalled.
Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the
threshold signals reverse and forward.
4.6.9 Neutral directional (67N); polarization by S0+S-+I (V0+V2+Ipol)

183B
Operation
The direction is determined regardless of the previous criteria (V0, V2 and I). If any of them determines that the direction
is the trip direction, the trip permission is given.
The earth fault directional units output is an OR of the polarization by voltage and polarization by current units so that the
trip permission criterion prevails over the locking criterion.

This setting is used only when in the three units the polarization magnitude is below the threshold (Vpolarization setting)
in the case of the V0 and the V2 and below 68 mA in the case of the current.
Signalling
Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as NO, if the polarization magnitudes are below the
threshold the direction is not signalled.
Being the trip permission without Vpol (locking directional) set as YES, if the polarization magnitudes are below the
threshold signals reverse and forward.
4.6.10 Neutral directional (67N); Watimetric directional

184B
It is used for lines with compensations by means of Petersen coil.
In order to allow the pick up of the directional unit the following must be fulfilled:
Exceed the VN minimum threshold:
 For forwards faults the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque
angle, and must be between 97 and 263.
 97<Ang(I0)-angle (V0)+angle characteristics 63

 For backwards faults the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque
 277<Ang(I0)-angle(V0)+ angle characteristics <83
 The power P=Vn·In·cos( - c) must exceed the P minimum threshold in absolute value. If P sign is
negative, the fault is forward. It is positive it is reverse.
The equation to calculate P is the following one:
P Re (V) cos Im(V) sin Re (I) Im(V) cos Re (V) sin Im(I)
4.6.11 Neutral directional (67N); I*cos( ) / I*sen( )directional

185B
) operation mode
changes to I*sen( ). This input, if programmed, cancels the setting: if it is deactivated the algorithm I*cos( ) is carried
out and if it is activated, the I*sen( ), regardless the setting. It does not affect the watimetrical directional or the angular.
4.6.11.1 I*cos( ) directional

In order to allow the pick up of the directional unit, the following must be fulfilled:
Exceed the VN minimum threshold:
The minimum current I minimum=In·cos( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold in absolute value. If the
sign is negative , the fault is forward. If it is positive, it is reverse.
 For forwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque
 97<Ang(I0)-angle(V0)+ Characteristic angle <263
 For backwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque
The trip zone will depend on the angle between the zero sequence voltage and the zero sequence current. If we are in
the trip zone, the directional gives trip permission when the Io·cos( - c) value exceeds the setting (in negative value).
Re ( V) cos Im( V) sin Re ( I) Im( V) cos Re ( V) sin Im( I)

I·cos v i
V

As the neutral units allow the trips with forward and reverse faults the characteristics will have the following form:
4.6.11.2 I*sen( ) directional

In order to allow the pick up of the directional unit, the following must be fulfilled:
Exceed the VN minimum threshold
 The minimum current I minimum=In·cos( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold set in absolute value.
If the sign is negative , the fault is forward. If it is positive, it is reverse.
 For forwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque
 For backwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque
 7<Ang(I0)-angle (V0)+ Characteristic angle <173
Im( V) cos Re ( V) sin Re ( I) Re ( V) cos Im( V) sin Im( I)

I·sin v i
V

Lockin Tripping
g zone zone
4.7 SENSITIVE NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

85B

186B
Sensitive neutral overcurrent protection, with the same possible characteristics as the ones described for phases (except
that there is only one instantaneous element), and independent settings (function 50SN/51SN).
4.7.2 Setting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) (normal y HIGH2)

187B

Enable YES/NO/Pickup/YES+Drop
Pickup (A) 0.005 10.000 0.001
Definite time
Normal inverse curve, Very inverse curve,
Curve type
Extremely inverse curve
User curve
Time index
Definite time (s) 0.0 1800.0 0.01
The remarks about curves and accuracy in times are the same as the ones quoted for phases.
4.7.3 Setting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (single level) (6

18B
tables) (normal y HIGH2)

Sensitive neutral instant. trip (A) 0.005 10.0 0.001
Special function (only in normal)

The tripping current is set to secondaryAmps.
The remarks about operating times are the same as the ones quoted for phases.
4.7.4 Directionality
189B
not).
There are four types of directional for the sensitive neutral. The angle (polarization byV0, it works as the neutral one), the
watimetric, the I·cos( ) and the I·sen( ).
The directional watrimetic and the cosine type directional are almost the same, with the only difference that one is set o
W and the other one to A.
They work as a torque control of the sensitive neutral units. These units will be set in order to trip backwards or forwards.
Setting Range Step Description

Angular
Directional type I·cos( ) / I·sen( )
Watimetric
For the watimetric directional
P=Vn·Ins·cos( - c)
Minimum active =Angle between Vn and In.
0-100W 0.01W
power (homopole) If the power is higher than this value in negative value it is considered as a
forward fault it is higher than this value in positive, it will be a backwards
fault...
For all the sensitive neutral directional
Characteristic Setting that allows taking into account the characteristics of the system that
0-350º 1º
angle c can be used in lines with isolated neutral or with Petersen coil
Common setting with the cosine directional of Fi.
It is used for the directional I·cos( )and the I·sen( )
minimum I =Ins·cos( - c)
Minimum I 5mA 10 A =Angle between Vn and Ins.
If the minimum I is higher than this value in negative value, it is considered to
be forward fault If it is higher than this value in positive it is a backward fault.
4.7.4.1 Watimetrical directional

It is use for those lines with compensation via Petersen coil.
In order to allow the directional unit pickup, the following must be fulfilled:
 Exceed a minimum threshold of VN.

 For forwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle, and
must be between 97 and 263.
 97<Ang (I0)-angle (V0) + Characteristic angle <263
 For backwards faults, the angle between the current and the voltage, displaced the maximum torque angle,
and must be between 277 and 83.
 277<Ang (I0)-angle (V0) + Characteristic angle <83
The power P=Vn·Ins·cos ( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold of P in absolute value. If P sign is negative, the
fault is forwards. If it is positive, it will be backwards.

The equation to be done to calculate P is the following one:
P Re (V) cos Im(V) sin Re (I) Im(V) cos Re (V) sin Im(I)
4.7.4.2 I*cos( ) / I*sen( ) directional

It works as a torque control of the neutral sensitive unit.
It has an input
I·cos( ) to I·sen( ). This input, if programmed cancels the setting; if deactivated it carries out the algorithm I*cos( )
and if it deactivated the I*sen( ), regardless the setting. It does not affect the watrimetic or the angular directional.
4.7.4.2.1 I*cos( )directional

In order to allow the picking up of the directional unit the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 Exceed a VN minimum threshold.

 The minimum current I minimum=Insects( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold in absolute value. If
the sign is negative, the fault is forwards. If it is positive, it is backwards.
 97<Ang(I0)-angle(V0)+Characteristic angle<263
 277<Ang(I0)-angle (V0)+ Characteristic angle <83
 The trip zone will depend on the angle between the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence pole
current. In the trip zone, the directional allows the trip when the Io·cos( - c) value exceeds the setting (in
negative value).
Re ( V) cos Im( V) sin Re ( I) Im( V) cos Re ( V) sin Im( I)

I·cos v i
V

As the sensitive neutral units allow the trip with forwards and backwards faults, the characteristics will be as follows:
4.7.4.2.2 I*sen( ) directional

In order to allow the picking up of the directional unit the following conditions must be fulfilled:
 Exceed a VN minimum threshold.

 The minimum current I minimum= Ins·sen( - c) must exceed the minimum threshold in absolute value.
If the sign is negative, the fault is forwards. If it is positive it is backwards.
187<Ang(I0)-angle(V0)+Characteristic angle<353
7<Ang(I0)-angle(V0)+ Characteristic angle <173
Im( V) cos Re ( V) sin Re ( I) Re ( V) cos Im( V) sin Im( I)

I·sin v i
V

Lockin Tripping
g zone zone
4.8 CURRENT UNBALANCE PROTECTION

86B

190B
It contains the timed and instantaneous unbalance protection functions.
The protection works exactly in the same way as the phase overcurrent protection, taking as measurement input 3 times
the modulus of negative sequence current
   
3 • I2 Ia a 2 • Ib a • Ic where a=1|120º
It must be taken into account that the phase sequence A-B-C or C-B-A is programmable, so that the I2 depends on that
setting.
4.8.2 Setting ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables)

19B
UNBALANCE TIME chart.

Pickup.(A) 0.1 200.0 0.01
Definite time
Curve type
Extremely inv. curve
User curve
Time index
Definite time (s) 0.1 600.0 0.01 Time if TF type
The remarks about curves are the same as the ones quoted for phases.
4.8.3 Setting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables)

192B
UNBALANCE TIME chart.


Unbalance instantaneous trip (A) 0.1 200.0 0.01
The remarks about curves are the same as the ones quoted for phases
4.9 DIRECTIONALITY OF THE CURRENT UNBALANCE PROTECTION

87B
BACKWARDS, indicates that the function is desired to work as directional (in one or other direction); if it is at NO, it will work
as NO DIRECTIONAL. The inverse directional sequence is employed for the unbalance directional.
4.9.1 Negative Sequence Directional

193B
The direction is determined using the negative sequence current with the negative sequence voltage (V2) as polarization.
The angle determines the range in which the fault is considered forwards and reverse. The setting angle is the same as
that used for the phase directional.

3T

This setting is used when the polarization voltage (V2) falls below the threshold (Vpolarization Setting), so that, if it is set
4.10 BROKEN CONDUCTOR PROTECTION

8B
4.10.1 General description 194B
This is a definite time protection unit.

There are three operating modes:
The pick-up value varies in accordance with the mode selected
4.10.2 Settings range (6 tables)

195B
BROKEN CONDUCTOR Table
Setting Min Max Step Remarks

YES / NO / Start (mode 1) / Yes (mode 2) / Yes (mode 3) / Start
Enabled
(mode 2) / Start (mode 3)
Expressed as a decimal. I2/I1 (mode 1 and mode 2)
Pick-up (expressed as a decimal) 0.10 0.50 0.01
Expressed as a decimal. I2/In (mode 3) In = Rated current (5A)
Definite time (sec) 0.05 300.0 0.01
Minimum phase current threshold (A) 0.30 5.00 0.01
I0/I1 maximum (mode 2) Expressed as a decimal. I0/I1 (mode 2)
0.000 0.500 0.001
I0/In maximum (mode 3) Expressed as a decimal. 10/In (mode 3) In = Rated current (5A)
When the open-phase protection is enabled as Start Up (mode 1, 2 or 3), the unit does not trip, but rather it actives
"Broken Conductor Alarm" signal once the set time elapses as of the detection of the broken conductor.
4.10.3 Broken Conductor Mode 1

196B
 Pick-up. The pick-up value to be set is, expressed as a decimal, the ratio in modules between the inverse
sequence and direct sequence current.
   
I2 Ia a 2 • Ib a • Ic
   
I1 Ia a • Ib a 2 • Ic
In which=1|120º
The relay trips once the programmed time has elapsed from the moment the pickup setting value is exceeded.

197B
sequence and direct sequence current.
   
I2 Ia a 2 • Ib a • Ic
   
In which=1|120º
 I0/I1 maximum setting of zero sequence percentage in relation to direct sequence I0/I1.
The unit must register that I0/I1 is below a threshold in order to permit a trip.
   
I0 IaIb Ic
   
In which=1|120º
In order to detect a broken conductor, the following conditions must be met:
 The ratio in modules of the inverse sequence current between direct sequence current must exceed the
pick-up setting value.
 The I0/I1 reading must be below a threshold in order to permit a trip.


current threshol
is closed.
 The direct sequence as inverse must have a value of at least 0.15 A (all secondary).
The relay when the programmed time elapses following the detection of the broken conductor.

198B
In this operating mode, the inverse and zero sequences are calculated in relation to the rated current.
sequence and the rated current (5A).
   
I2 Ia a 2 • Ib a • Ic / 3
 
I nom I nom
In which=1|120º
 I0/I maximum rated current. Zero sequence percentage setting in relation to rated current (5A) I0/Inom.
 The unit must register that I0/Inom is below a threshold in order to permit a trip.
   
I0 Ia Ib Ic / 3
 
I nom I nom
In which=1|120º
In order to detect a broken conductor, the following conditions must be met:
 The ratio in modules of the inverse sequence current between the rated current must exceed the pick-up
setting value.
 The I0/In reading must be below a threshold in order to permit a trip.

econdary), and there must be no current in one or in two of the phases when the
breaker is closed.
 The direct sequence as inverse must have a value of at least 0.15 A (all secondary).
The relay when the programmed time elapses following the detection of the broken conductor.
4.11 PHASE CHARACTERISTIC VOLTAGE CONTROL (FUNCTION 51V/50V)

89B
The timed phase overcurrent protection function can be controlled by voltage, in the way that the starting current decreases if
the voltage control is lower than the nominal voltage. To activate this function the setting "voltage acceleration" of the settings
-CURRENT PROT.-PHASE TOC.-ACCEL.
ENABLE) must be set to "YES". (If it is set to NO, the effective settings are the ones programmed in the time delay phase
overcurrent unit).
The control by voltage has two possible operation ways, depending on the setting of the "voltage control" on the screen
number 3 of the overcurrent protection settings (or by keyboard/display in PROTECT. FUNCTION-PA.CRTLV-ENABLE). If it is
set to NO, the unit operates in control mode 1 and if it is set to YES, in control mode 2.
Mode 1 (51V).
The pickup current is controlled by the compound voltage V, corresponding to that phase, used as control. This function
affects both levels of timing.
When the control voltage is 10% of the nominal voltage, the controlled pickup current is 10% of the programmed value.
When the control voltage is 90% of the nominal voltage, the controlled pickup current is 90% of the programmed value.

Between both values, the pickup current variation is lineal in respect to the control voltage.
For control voltage values higher than 90% of the nominal voltage, the pickup current is the programmed one.
Mode 2 (51V).
When the control voltage is lower than the control voltage (one programmed value), the effective settings of the function 51
stop being the programmed in "phase time unit", to
This function is subordinated to the phase timed unit, in the sense of making it operative with other settings, but if the phase
time delayed function is not enable, the function 51V has no effect. This function affects
The settings are the following:
Enable control by voltage : YES/NO (as it has been said YES means operating in mode 1, NO in mode 2, as long as the phase
time delay "Acceleration" is set to YES)
Voltage control: 10 to 200 V
Mode 2 (50V).
In an analogue way to the former one, when some of the compound voltages are lower than the control voltage (one
programmed value), the effective settings of the function 50 stop being those programmed in "phase instantaneous unit" (as
This function is subordinated to phase instantaneous, in the sense of making them operative with other settings, but if both
phase instantaneous functions are not enabled, the function 50V has no effect. All the instantaneous functions (normal,
The settings are the following:
Enable: YES/NO (YES means operating in mode 2, NO means not operating)
Voltage control: 10 to 200 V
Settings of phase instantaneous
Summary:
The function 51V can operate in Mode 1 or Mode 2
The function 50V can operate only in Mode 2.
It is possible the operation of the function 51V in Mode 1 and the function 50V in Mode 2.
The setting change does not affect the enabling of the functions affected.
4.12 HIGH CURRENT LOCKOUT

90B
4.12.1 Description
19B
There are two other instantaneous settings groups, one for phases and other for neutral (not for sensitive neutral). They are
different from the usual ones for the two following characteristics:
If they give a trip, it will be moved on to Definitive Trip.
The number of trip is programmable (1 to 4) within the sequence of Running Cycle from which the function is active.

4.12.2 Setting (table 0, single)

20B
They are accessible through keyboard/display in "Table 0" - "Protection" - "High current lockout", or through Console in
 For phases (PHASES chart)

 Enable: YES/NO
 Pickup (A): 0.05 to 200 A
 Definite time: 0 to 60 sec
 Trip number: 1 to 4
 For neutral (NEUTRAL chart)
 Neutral enable: YES/NO
 Pickup: 0.05 to 200 A
 Additional time: 0 to 60 sec
 Trip number: 1 to 4
4.13 COLD LOAD PICKUP

91B
4.13.1 Description
201B
This function aims to avoid non wished trips in the following situation: after being the line de-energized for a period of
time and re-energized later, the load can exceed the protection setting without the presence of a fault. This may be due to
the accumulative inrush current caused when connecting all the loads (furnaces, heaters, coolers etc.) at the same time.
This phenomena can occur not only at the moment of the breaker manual closing, after having remained open for a
certain time, but also with the breaker permanently closed due to the operation of another upstream breaker.
What the function does is detecting when those conditions are given and changing the tripping settings during a
programmable time.
The function is activated when the current in the 3 phases is below 0.1 A, then the programmed time starts to run to
d lead to the cold
load situation). Once that time has expired and the current has not exceeded again 0.2 A, the value of the current is
checked again. If the current is below 0,1 A, the protection value settings normally used are replaced by the cold load
settings.When any of the phase current exceed 0.2 A, a counter with programmable time starts, during which the setting
are the cold load pickup ones, when expiring this time, the setting are again the usual ones.
4.13.2 Settings (table 0, single)

20B
They are accessible through keyboard/display in "Table 0" - " Special Protections" - "Cold load" , or through Console on the
-
given:
 Phase time unit

 Neutral time unit
 Phase instantaneous unit
 Neutral instantaneous unit
 Sensitive neutral time unit
 Sensitive neutral instantaneous unit
They are also under the name "Cold load pickup" the ones which define the function activity range:
 YES/NO

 Cold load time: 0 to 10000 sec. Time for determining the cold load.
 Operating time: 0.1 to 3600 sec. (1 hour) with 0.01 second resolution. It is the operation time of the
all the overcurrent protection
Remarks:
s de-
assumed by the Reclosing function.
Example with breaker opening and closure

Example with very low load
4.14 ISOLATED NEUTRAL PROTECTION

92B

203B
isolated neutral systems (67 IN function ). It can be used as non directional.
 Input signals
 Zero sequence current (IG): Comes from the connection in parallel of the secondaries of 3 phase
current transformers or from a toroid transformer embracing the 3 phases.
 Zero sequence voltage (VG): If there are simple voltage signals for each phase, it can be calculated
internally. Other ways, it is measured from the open delta of three voltage transformers, with secondary
nominal voltage of 110/ 3 V. A setting indicates which of the procedures is used.
 Measurements range
 Current: 2mA to 1 A
 Voltage: 0.5V to 200V (3*110/ 3)
The characteristic curve of this protection function is the following:
VN
VN
TRIP ZONE
TRIP ZONE
VH
VH
VL
VL
IL IH IN
IL IH IN

They are settable parameters:
 Enable. If it is set to YES allows the protection units actuation; set to NO inhibits the actuation and in
PICKUP it operates but without tripping.

 Low current (IL in the characteristic curve). Range 0.005 to 1 A, with 1 mA resolution.
 High current (IH). Range 0.005 to 1 A, with 1 mA resolution.
 IH >= IL must be fulfilled.
 Low voltage (VL). Range 0.5 V to 60 V. 0.1 V resolution.
 High voltage (VH). Range 0.5 V to 60 V. 0.1 V resolution. VH >= VL must be fulfilled.
 First trip timing. Range 0 to 60 sec. 0.01 sec. resolution
 Switch to instantaneous timing. Range 0 to 10 sec. 0.1 sec. resolution
Operating as directional, the relay will trip when the point defined by the measured VG and IG values is within the trip
zone of the characteristic curve, being the DELAYED with respect to VG an angle in the interval 90º 50% of thesetting,
ithin the characteristic zone, regardless of the
angle.
The first trip is timed according to the corresponding setting parameter, the successive trips that happen during the time
us; the first one from that time is timed again.
4.14.2 Setting ranges

204B
Parameter Min. Max. Step Notes

Enable YES/NO
Torque control
Low current (A) 0.005 1 0.001
High current (A) 0.005 1 0.001
Low voltage (V) 0.5 60.0 0.1
High voltage (V) 0.5 60.0 0.1
First trip timing (s) 0.00 60.0 0.01
Switch to instantaneous timing 0.0 10.0 0.1
Neutral zone coverage (degrees) 90 170 1
4.15 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

93B

205B
Three-unit overvoltage protection, which can be simples or

characteristics to choose from (function 59):
Timed characteristic :
 Inverse time. ( I BSC or I ANSI)
 Short Inverse time (IC BSC)
 Long Inverse time(IL BSC)
 Very inverse time. (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
 Extremely inverse time. (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
 4 User curves.( USER 1 to USER 4)

 Definite time.
Instantaneous characteristic:
 Instantaneous unit.
 Additional time.
The functioning of this protection does not cause automatic reclosing

206B

Enable YES/NO
Pickup (V) 6 200 0.1
Definite time
Curve type
Extremely. Inv. curve
User curve
Time index
Definite time (s) 0.0 600.0 0.01
The timed curves are the same as the ones used by the overcurrent protection units.
The pickup voltage is set to secondary Volts.
Working with definite time, the relay will trip at the end of the programmed time since the pickup voltage is exceeded,
independently of the voltage value.
Working with curve, the tripping time depends on the selected curve (family and index) and on the voltage value. In the
Appendix II are given the graphics and formula for calculating the time, in function of the ratio between the voltage and
the pickup voltage.
The remarks about accuracy in times are the same as the given for the overcurrent function.

207B
Setting Min. Max. Step notes

Enable YES/NO
Phase instantaneous trip (V) 6 200 0.1
These settings can
The tripping voltage is set to secondary Volts.
The remarks about times are the same as those given for the overcurrent function.
8TNote.- Both in the time and instantaneous function, once the unit is picked up, the drop occurs when the voltage drops to the 99% of the
value programmed as pick up, if it is higher than 50 V (or to the 98% if it is lower).

4.16 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

94B

208B
Three-unit overvoltage protection, which can

characteristics to choose from (function 27) :
Timed characteristic:
 Inverse time. ( I BSC or I ANSI)
 4 User curves.( USER 1 to USER 4)
 Definite time.
The functioning of this function does not cause automatic reclosing.

209B

Enable YES/NO
Pickup (V) 6 200 0.1
Definite time
Curve type
Extremely inv. curve
User curve
Time index
The timed curves are the same as the ones used by the overcurrent protection units.
The pickup voltage is set to secondary Volts.
Working with definite time the relay trips once expired the programmed time since descending below the pickup voltage,
independently of the voltage value.
Working with curve, the tripping time depends on the selected curve (family and index) and on the voltage value. In the
Appendix II are given the graphics and formula for calculating of time, in function of the ratio between the starting voltage
and the voltage.
The remarks about times are the same as the ones quoted for the overcurrent function.


210B

Enable YES/NO
Phase instantaneous trip (V) 6 200 0.1
The tripping voltage is set to secondaryVolts.
The remarks about times are the same as the ones quoted for the overcurrent function.
8TNote.- Both in the time and instantaneous function, once the unit is picked up, the drop occurs when the voltage goes up to the 101 % of the
value programmed as pick up, if it is higher than 50 V (or to the 102 % if it is lower).
4.17 VOLTAGE UNBALANCE PROTECTION

95B
4.17.1 Timed characteristic

21B
It is a definite time protection unit. The pickup value set is, in per unit the ratio between the negative and positive
sequence voltage modulus.
The relay trips once expired the programmed time since the pickup value is exceeded.
Settings ranges (6 tables)

Enable YES/NO
Pickup 0.10 0.50 0.01 In per unit. V2/V1
4.17.2 Instantaneous characteristic

21B
It is a definite time protection unit. It only checks if the phase order is the programmed one or the opposite one... In the
case that the order is opposite to the programmed one it will trip after a programmed time.
Setting ranges (6 tables)

Enable YES/NO
Definite time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
4.18 ZERO SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

96B
Zero sequence overvoltage protection (function 64 or 59N). The pickup value set is the zero sequence voltage coming from
the open delta connection of the secondaries of the three voltage transformers or the calculated zero sequence voltage (3 Vo)
as vectorial sum of the phase simple voltages.

)
possibiliti
The function has the following characteristics to choose from
Timed characteristic (IEC or ANSI programmable curves):

 Inverse time. (I BSC or I ANSI)
 4 User curves.(USER 1 to USER 4)
 Definite time.
The functioning of this protection does not cause an automatic reclosing.
The function can be deactivated by setting (timed and instantaneous at the same time).
4.18.1 Setting range (6 tables)

213B
Setting Min. Max Step Notes

Enable YES/NO
Pick up (V) 2 200 0.1
Definite time
Normal inverse
Curve type Very inverse
Extremely inverse
User
Time index
Definite time(s) 0 600.0 0.01 Definite time(s)
Instantaneous pickup (V) 2 200 0.1 Instant pickup (V)
Additional time (s) 0 60.00 0.01
8T
The time delay curves are the same as the ones used by the overcurrent protection units.
The starting voltage is set to secondary Volts.
On definite time, the relay trips when the programmed time expires since the starting voltage is exceeded, independently
of the voltage value.
4.19 FREQUENCY PROTECTION

97B
This function has 5 steps, programmable as minimum frequency or maximum frequency.

The following settings are independent for each step (6 tables):
Parameter Min Max Step Notes

Enable YES/NO
Value (pick up) (Hz) 40 70 0.01
Definite time (s) 0 600.00 0.01
Type Maximum/Minimum
The setting common to all the step are the following ones:
Parameter Min Max Step Notes

Supervision minimum voltage (V) 12 200 1
No. of frequency pick up cycles 3 15 1
The response time of this unit will be the one corresponding to the number of pick up cycles programmed in the setting plus
35 ms.
4.19.1 Minimum frequency

214B
ops out if during two

cycles the frequency is correct.
Locking
allowed.
4.19.2 Maximum frequency

215B
This unit causes pick up if the frequency is above the set value during a number of cycles equal or higher than the setting
two cycles the frequency is correct.
Locking
If the
allowed.
4.19.3 Frequency gradient

216B
4.19.3.1 General description

This function has 4 steps. In each step, a relay is activated if the frequency variation per time unit is higher than the
set value.
There are three options.
 Detection of NEGATIVE variations, i.e., a decrease in frequency.

 Detection of POSITIVE variations, i.e., an increase in frequency.
 Detection of BOTH variations, i.e., a decrease and an increase in frequency.

4.19.3.2 Settings (6 tables)

NO/NEGATIVE/POSITIVE/BOTH
Enable. df/dt.
(for all steps)
Max. frequency supervision(Hz) 40 70 0.01 (for each step)
Supervision minimum current (A) 0 100.0 0.1 (for all steps)
Pickup value (df/dt) (Hz/s) 0.20 5 0.05 (for each step)
Definite time (s) 0 2 0.01 (for each step)
Nº of pickup cycles D81 3 15 1 (for all steps)
The frequency measurement of each cycle is executed refreshing it each half cycle, as the figure shows.
The algorithm is executed every 5ms only if the phase B voltage has crossed zero.
Both positive and negative crosses are measured but the frequency measurement is executed in complete cycles. The
frequency is measured up to 35Hz. Below this value, the frequency units are not activated.
The functioning of the frequency rate of change for the NEGATIVE variations options is described below. The same
operating function applies to the other options, with the exception of positive or both variations. Always consult the
frequency difference.
The algorithm stores the periods of the last 5 cycles of the signal and calculates the frequency derivative comparing
the frequency measurement of the present cycle with the measurement 5 cycles before having in account the time
space between both.
df/dt=(f1-f5)/(T1+T2+T3+T4)
Being:
f5 =frequency measurement 4 cycles ago

f4 =frequency measurement 3 cycles ago T 4 period of the 4th cycle starting from the end
f3 =frequency measurement 2 cycles ago T3 period of the 3rd cycle starting from the end
f2 =frequency measurement 1 cycle ago T2 period of the 2nd cycle starting from the end
f1 =Last frequency measurement T1 period of the last cycle
F (Hz) f3 f1
f5 f4 f2
=Arc tan
(df/dt)
T4 T3 T2 T1 T

This calculus is repeated having in account the measurements separated by two cycles so that it makes sure that the
frequency has been falling the whole time, that is, it is not a spurious measurement that can lead to a trip.
For the unit to pickup, the frequency gradient must be exceeded in module during the set number of cycles.
The pickup happens only if the value of df/dt is negative, that is if the present frequency value is lower than the value
5 cycles before.
During the pickup process one measurement is allowed to be out of the pickup range without restarting the process.
That is, if for example 3 cycles are required to cause pickup, it is enough if the threshold is exceeded 3 times out of 4
consecutive measurements.
Once the unit has picked up, for it to trip, the frequency rate of change measurement must remain between the value
of df/dt set and a dropout value equal to df/dt minus 0.05Hz/s during the set time.
Cycle
Df/dt<df/dt setting
no.-4 T addict. TRIP
(step 1)
Df/dt
f<f supervision (step 1) Df/dt (step 1
(Step 1) ) (step1)
TRIP
Cycle
f<f 81minimum
no. Df/dt (step 1)
(level 1)
& 81m (step 1))
If some of the inputs are programmed as breaker associated to the frequency gradient, the trip is locked until that
output is viewed open.
Once the unit has picked up, for it to dropout the measurement of df/dt must be seen 0.05Hz/s below the set value.
Locking
The frequency derivative units are locked by:
 Minimum supervision current. If the minimum current that flows through the phase A is lower than the
an the
threshold appears, the relay waits 10 cycles before starting to execute the frequency gradient function.
 Minimum supervision voltage. If the voltage in phase B is lower than the setting, the pickup of the
llowed. When a voltage higher than the threshold appears, the
relay waits 10 cycles before starting to execute the frequency gradient function
4.20 FUSE FAILURE

98B
Fuse failure conditions are the following ones:
 Direct sequence current I1 above 0.1 % of the background scale (200A)

 The increase and decrease of current direct sequence I1 and of the neutral current IN regarding the current
measured 2 cycles before must be lower than 0.1 of the background scale (200A).
Voltage direct sequence V1 memorized 2 cycles before must exceed VFF
Voltage direct sequence V1 must be lower than the 95% of VFF
50
VFF VN ( V)
63.5
being VN the single nominal voltage.
in the display (Table 0 Protections-Fuse failure)). The function is activated until V1 voltage exceeds VFF.
fuse failure outputs is not activated because what the relays has detected is a fault and not a fuse failure situation.
programmed time. Fuse failure will only deactivate if the inputs is deactivated.
Fuse failure may be used as a blocking signal for other functions.
4.21 TELEPROTECTION
9B
4.21.1 Operation
217B
It is based upon the use of teleprotection signals between both end terminals of the line. The effect upon the output
terminals
In these schemes, the zones 1, 2 and 3 (F, Forward) look forward and the zone 3R (R, Reverse) looks backward. Zone 3
direc
function (50), even if the function is enabled or not. If torque control is set as NO, the direction is forward.
Zone 1 units include the three overcurrent units (timed and the two instantaneous levels)
There are two basic types of schemes:
 Locking scheme: The signal received indicates that the fault falls outside the zone to be protected. An
overreach zone may trip if the lockout signal is not received after a given waiting period.
 Permission scheme: The signal received gives permission for an instantaneous trip within the overreach
zone. Additional ECO and reverse direction blocking ca be used.
The following protection schemes may be selected:
 Permissive overreach
 Permissive underreach
 Directional locking
 Directional unlocking
Additionally, together with the schemes, the following can be selected:
 ECO
 Inverse direction locking


218B
Setting Min Max Step Remarks

Permissive overreach
Permissive underreach
Protection scheme
Directional locking
Directional unlocking
Drop off time for input RTP 0 1 0.01
Additional lockout time (s) 0 1 0.01
Guard signal loss time (s) 0 0.15 0.01
Enable ECO YES/NO
Minimum RTP time for ECO (s) 0 9.99 0.1
Enable inverse direction lockout YES/NO
Inverse direction lockout time 0 9.99 0.1
 Protection scheme: selects the type of scheme.

 RTP (TRTP) drop time: time during which the teleprotection reception input (RTP) remains stored.
 Additional block-out time (TBLQ): Waiting time of the block-out signal.
 Guard signal loss time (TPSG): Waiting time after receiving the channel loss input.
 Enabling ECO: Enables the ECO function.
 Minimum RTP time for ECO (TMIN): Time during which the RTP input must be seen so that the ECO
signal is activated.
 Enabling of reverse direction block-out: It enables the storage of the reverse direction.
ercurrent prot.
keyboard/display.
4.21.3 Protection trip mask (6 tables)

219B
This setting can only be programmed using a PC, not by keyboard/display.
taking into account the masks.
the pilot wire scheme. Unconditional trip output and general trip output are activated.
( overreach, underreach or directional unlocking) are selected in trip logic settings. If a trip with acceleration is given,
be activated and not general trip output.
will be activated and not general trip output.
You can simultaneously select for a function unconditional and permissive or unconditional and locking, in this way the
trips of the units indicated in the permissive and blocked mask can be accelerated, if the adequate conditions are given.
It has to be taken into account that these masks are examined in the moment of giving the trip command; therefore it has
after closing, after second reclosure. During security time after second reclosure it will not trip by neutral instantaneous,
because this command will not even be executed.

4.21.4 Used signals 20B
Below the meaning is explained:
ETP is called the teleprotection signal sent by a terminal. In any event, the ETP signal sent by a terminal is kept active for
3T 3T
at least 50 ms, even though the reason that has caused its activation may disappear.
RTPE and RTP. Both are different, and therefore the RTPE is the input of the teleprotection received by a terminal; while
3T 3T
the RTP follows the RTPE input in order to get activated, but it keeps the input stored for the TRTP time in order to be
deactivated. If TRTP is adjusted equal to zero, then the RTP coincides with the RTPE input. In the teleprotection
schemes, RTP is used.
Teleprotection Reception
Z3(R)MEM: Locking signal due to reverse direction change. See the section that corresponds to reverse direction locking.
3T 3T
MINC trip: OR of enabled protection units for unconditional trips that have trip. These units will trip after the time set,
3T 3T
without taking into account the pilot wire schemes.
MPER pickup: OR of enabled protection units for permissive trips that have picked up. These units will trip if they have
3T 3T
pickup when the teleprotection signal /RTP MEM) reach them. If they do not receive permission by this input, they do not
trip.
MBLOQ pickup: OR of enabled protection units for blocked trips that have picked up. These units will trip, if they
3T 3T
continue in pickup status, after exceeding the locking signal time (TBLQ) and the signal (RTP) has not arrived. If they
were locked by this input, they would not trip.
4.21.4.1 Notes
REVERSE.
Trips, bay pilot wire schemes will reclose depending on the masks set for external protection.
Main pilot protection schemes

 Permissive underreach (PUTT)
 Pilot protection signal (ETP) is sent with the activation of zone 1.
 It generates instantaneous pilot protection trip when receiving the teleprotection signal (RTP) along with the
activation of a unit in zone 1, 2 or 3 (depending on the settings of trip mask) whenever memorized zone3 (R)
(Z3(R)MEM) is not activated. The Z3(R)MEM signal can be eliminated from the logic only by disabling the

The logic diagram of this function is:
 Permissive overreach (POTT)

 This scheme uses the teleprotection signal in the overreach zone 2 (or 1 or 3, depending on the mask)
of the line. Instantaneous trip by teleprotection, when the teleprotection signal is received along with
the activation of a unit in zone 2, whereas memorized zone 3 (Z3(R)MEM) is not activated. Z3(R)MEM
signal can be eliminated from the logic disabli
Z3(R)MEM would be always at 0.
 Pilot protection signal sending with the activation of units in zone 2, without backwards fault detection
Z3(R)MEM
The logic diagram of this function is:
 Directional locking
 Pilot protection instantaneous trip with activation of zone2, if RTP signal is not received, once the
locking time is elapsed and no fault is seen in zone 3 Z3(R)MEM.
 ETP locking signal is sent if the fault is seen backwards Z3(R)MEM.
 The channel stop signal (STOP) is activated if a fault is detected forwards (Z1,Z2 or Z3) without seeing
a fault in zone 3 Z3(R)MEM.
 The logic diagram is shown below:

 Directional Unlocking
 Pilot protection instantaneous trip with activation of Z2, if the unlocking signal (RTP) is received or if
only the channel loss signal (RPSG) is received during the guard signal loss time (TPSG). Since the
moment in which the guard channel loss signal is activated a 150ms time span is opened during which
the trip can be given if the RPGS signal is activated during the programmed time (TPSG) without RTP
reception. After these 150ms the guard channel loss signal will have no effect over the pilot protection
trip. Therefore, it is indispensable that the time TPSG is programmed to a value lower than 150ms so
that the loss signal guard activates the trip. Once the guard signal is recovered 200ms will be waited
before starting again the aforementioned logic in case the guard channel is lost again.
 The ETP output is the same as in the POTT scheme. The Z3(R)MEM signal can be eliminated from the
continuously as 0.


Additional pilot protection schemes

 Reverse direction locking
 It is used on double-circuit lines in order to prevent the immediate tripping of a protection that is
seeing a fault backwards (and the carrier signal, which is sent to it by the forward protection) when
the power flow direction changes (due to opening of the parallel line breaker). It delays the pilot
protection tripping for a few cycles in order to give the remote terminal time to remove the
permission (ETP) signal after the change of flow direction due to the breaker opening. The Z3 signal
is used with a storage time (Z3(R)MEM), thereby obtaining the Z3(R)MEM signal to be used in the
rest of the schemes, as shown in the following figure.
Reverse Directional Locking
 The figure shows a flow scheme when the fault occurs and when the breaker is opened. If this
scheme is not used, the effect could be the following:
 When the failure occurs, terminal C sees it in zone 1, D in zone 1 or 2 according to the length, B
backwards and A in zone 2. In this situation, C opens the breaker and sends the ETP signal to D.
A likewise sends ETP to B.
 When the breaker is opened and the flow changes, A would see the fault backwards and B would
see it in zone 2 or 3 (F), whereby it could trip before A removes the RTP signal.
Flow Change due to breaker opening
 ECO
 It is used in the permissive schemes (overreach, underreach and directional unlocking).
 The pilot protection instantaneous trip is the one corresponding to the selected scheme.
 The teleprotection signal is sent with either of the following conditions:
 According to the selected scheme.
 If the RTP is received and the fault is not detected either forward or backward during a minimum
programmable time or the breaker is open. The ECO signal only provides a pulse of 50 ms.

4.22 THERMAL IMAGE

10B

21B
This function calculates a temperature according to the recent and present load conditions of the protected unit. This
temperature is visualized in the display in % with respect to the trip value; when reaching the programmed value an alarm
relay is activated (if there is any programmed) and when reaching the 100% the thermal image trip relay (if the unit is
enabled) and the corresponding signalling are activated. Once the unit has tripped by this unit, the relay does not dropout
while the calculated temperature is above the reposition threshold and the rest of the locking conditions are fulfilled. The
↓ =0? and pushing ↓
during 2 seconds) or through console command.
The time to trip is given by the following curves, which give the time according to the ratio between the current and the
programmed rated current, and the programmed cooling constant. According to the following formula (starting from
temperature 0):
being t : trip time
: cooling constant
I: average current
..I0:programmed rated current
Once it has tripped, there is another programmable time constant for the cooling.
4.22.2 Settings
2B

Enable YES/NO
Heating time constant (min) 3 60 1
Cooling time constant (min) 3 180 1
Threshold alarm (%) 50 99 1
Rated current (A) 0.1 200.0 0.01

4.22.3 Trip times

23B
4.22.4 Heating curves

24B
The heating curve is calculated from the following formula:
Being:
Tf = final temperature
Ti = initial temperature
t = time

= = heating time constant
For Ti = 0 the formula is reduced
As in
The heating curve is
The next figure gives as an example, the heating curves, with 3 minutes time constant, for I/I0 = 1 and for I/I0 = 2

4.22.5 Cooling curves

25B
The cooling curve is calculate from the following
Being:
Tf = final temperature
Ti = initial temperature
t = time
= cooling time constant
Starting from Ti = 1 (100 in %), tripping temperature, in order to arrive to a final temperature of Tf = 0 (that is with
current I = 0), the formulae is reduced to
Example: cooling curve with 3 minutes constant
Combined examples cooling and heating:
starting from there it goes back indefinitely to I/I0 = 1 (both time constants of 3 minutes):

2. Lets suppose that during 200 sec it is heated with I/I0 = 0.5, then with I/I0 = 1.5 until reaching 100%, where it
trips, and starting from there it is cooled with I//I0 = 0 (both time constants of 3 minutes).
4.23 FIELD LOSS PROTECTION

10B

26B
Field loss protection (generator excitation), with the following selectable characteristics (function 40):
2 MHO trip zones with independent settings
1 directional unit common to both zones
1 undervoltage unit common to both zones. The enabling can be carried out independently for each zone.
4.23.2 General setting range

27B

Enable YES/NO
Minimum voltage pick up 10.0 65.0 0.1
Directional unit angle 0 180 1 Clockwise
The directional unit angle allows the locking of the protection in a certain direction.
The impedance value seen by the protection is calculated from the direct sequence current and voltage.

4.23.3 MHO zone setting range

28B

Z1A impedance setting (offset) (Ohm) -20.0 20.0 0.1
Z1B impedance setting (diameter) (Ohm) 0.0 120.0 0.1
Undervoltage surveillance zone 1 YES/NO
Alarm timing zone 1 (s) 0.0 10.0 0.1
Alarm timing zone 1 (s) 0.00 10.00 0.01
Zone MHO 2 disposes of the same setting range as the MHO 1 one.
Settings Z1A and Z1B delimite the tripping zone MHO 1 (as Z2A and Z2B for zone MHO 2). The setting Z1A represents
the offset (in ohms) of the zone higher part. This value can be positive (see Z1A in figure 1) or negative (see Z2A, for zone
MHO 2). Setting Z1B represents the diameter of the zone MHO 1.
The protection will act indistinctively depending if the zone is under undervoltage conditions or not.
The following must occur in order to be under undervoltage conditions:
 The measurement in any of the voltage phase is under the value of the undervoltage pick up or
 Undervoltage surveillance setting of this zone is disabled. In the moment the generator enters one of these MHO
zones, a timer gets active. If the zone is not under undervoltage conditions, the zone alarm time will get active.
However, if the zone is under undervoltage conditions, the activated timer will be the trip one of the given zone.
This last timer will have to be set to a value lower than the other one, because when there are undervoltage
conditions the fault must be cleared quickly, since there are very few possibilities for the generator to get
recovered, and it can cause the electrical system to become instable. Once the timer time is elapsed, the
corresponding outputs will get active.
Signals related to field loss:
 Alarm MHO 1
 Alarm MHO 2
 Trip MHO 1
 Trip MHO 2
 Undervoltage MHO 1
 Undervoltage MHO 2

The measurement transmitted is as follows:
Bytes No. Format Specification Data

2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 20 Impedance Module
It is the voltage (1.2 *Vn) divided by the minimum current. In order to carry out the relative calculations and impedances,
the direct sequence current has to be the same or higher than a minimum value, fixed in 0.05A. That way, the maximum
impedances corresponds to the quotient between the maximum voltage and minimum current.
4.24 POWER PROTECTION

102B
4.24.1 General29B
From the current and voltage measurements, the protection calculates the active and reactive power and the power factor,
and according to those values, it carries out some protection functions indicated below. The trip thresholds are
programmed in percentage relation to the nominal apparent power, S = 3 * V * I, being:
 V: simple nominal voltage (phase-



n
power protections. In case of programming 1 A, although the physical possibility of programming the
minimum ranges as 1% exists, the effective minimum range is 2.5 %, as there is a minimum current
threshold established in 25 mA.
4.24.2 Minimum power protection

230B

It protects against excessive decreases in the generated power and it compares the active power with the minimum
power given by the setting. If the generated power is lower than the set value, the protection will trip the corresponding
relay. Any reverse power will be considered below the minimum power threshold, so it will operate this protection.
4.24.2.2 Setting ranges

Enable YES/NO
Minimum power
1.0 200.0 0.1 Step 1 in versions before Q
protection (%)
The tripping power is set in % of the rated power, which is defined by the set value for the rated voltage and by the
If the additional time is programmed as 0 the trip will happen in 35ms. If an additional time is programmed, this time
is added to the afore mentioned time.

4.24.3 Maximum power protection

231B

It protects against excessive increases in the generated power.
The operation is similar to the previous. The protection will trip the corresponding relay when the generated active
power is greater than the set value. There are two units with different ranges for the additional time, HI-Set and LO-
Set.
4.24.3.2 Setting range

HI-Set enable YES/NO
Maximum power trip HI-Set (%) 1.0 200.0 0.1 Step 1 in versions before Q
Additional time HI-Set (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
LO-Set enable YES/NO
Maximum power trip LO-Set (%) 1.0 200.0 0.1 Step 1 in versions before Q
Additional time LO-Set (s) 0.0 600.0 0.1
4.24.4 Reverse power protection

23B

The protection actuates when the power flow gets reversed and the power exceeds the set value. In this situation the
protection trips the relay or relays programmed for it.
This function has also got two units with different settings for timing ranges.
4.24.4.2 Settings range

4.24.5 Reactive power reverse protection

23B

The protection acts when the reactive power flux is reversed (field loss in generators) and this exceeds the set value. In
this situation, the protection will trip the relay or relays programmed for it.
There is also the possibility of programming two settings with different time ranges.


Enable HI-Set YES/NO
React. Power reverse trip HI-Set (%) 1.0 200.0 0.1 Step 1 in versions before Q
Additional time HI-Set(s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
Enable LO-Set YES/NO
React. Power reverse trip LO-Set (%) 1.0 200.0 0.1 Step 1 in versions before Q
4.24.6 Minimum apparent power protection

234B

It is a protection against excessive decreases in the generated power. From the voltage and current measurements, the
protection calculates the active and reactive power and the power factor and compares the apparent power with the
minimum power given by the setting. If the generated power is lower than the set value, the protection trips the
corresponding relay.
4.24.6.2 Setting range

Enable YES/NO
Minimum power trip (%) 1.0 200.0 0.1 Step 1 in versions before Q
The tripping power is set in % of the rated power, which is defined by the set value for the rated voltage and by the
4.24.7 Maximum apparent power protection

235B

It is a protection against excessive increases in the generated power.
The operation is similar to the previous. The protection will trip the corresponding relay when the generated apparent
power is greater than the set value. There are two units with different ranges for the additional time, HI-Set and LO-
Set.


4.25 BREAKER MONITORING

103B

236B
This function produces an "event" and a control signal, when there is a number of trips higher than programmed during
the programmed time, passing to definitive trip. When manual closing occur, the period of time is reinitialized.
An event is also generated each time when, after a trip, the kI2 counter exceeds the programmed threshold (it is a pole
to pole treatment). While on this situation the corresponding signal is sent to control.
For the pole wear calculation, the wished type of calculation can be programmed, between kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
 If Ki2 is chosen, the kA2 is calculated, being I the current measured after passing the waiting time set
after the trip.
 If kI is chosen, only the sum of currents in kA is calculated being I the current measured after passing the
waiting time set after the trip.
 If Ki2 *t is chosen, the Ki2 /100 value is accumulated every 10ms being I the current measured after
passing the waiting time set after the trip. It finishes accumulating when I<0.05 A.
The trip and close circuit supervision allows the checking of the continuity of circuits with up to 2 trip coils and 2 close
coils, when the breaker is close and also when it is open (see the connection example n the following page).

237B

Excessive no. of trips 1 254 1
Time span for excessive no. of trips (sec.) 300 3,600 1
Trip circuit monitoring enable YES/NO
Close circuit monitoring enable YES/NO
kI2 alarm threshold 0 65,535 1
kI2 initial value 0 65,535 1
Calculation time KI, kI2, kI2t
Waiting time (s) 0 0.1 0.01

4.25.3 Coil supervision example

238B
The connections for the trip coil would be similar.
detected, in case the failure remains after this time.
The coil monitoring function to operate correctly, the breaker status must be cabled.
4.26 OPERATION LOGIC

104B

239B
Trip sealing: if it is set to "YES" when a tripping signal is sent, this signal remains until it sees the circuit breaker opening,
even if the trip cause has disappeared. If it is set to "NO" the tripping signal disappears when the trip cause does
(although it will be guarantied that the relay remains excited for at least the time programmed in the digital output
programming).
The open and close failure timings provide the time margin existing between the corresponding command and the signal
reception of the circuit breaker operation, to considerate that this has operated correctly. If this is not the case an "event"
and a control signal will occur, and a relay will be activated (if there is any programmed with that function) for the open
failure and another for the close failure.

4.26.2 Setting ranges (6 tables)

240B

Trip sealing YES/NO
Opening failure timing (sec) 0.020 100.000 0.005
Closing failure timing (sec) 0.020 100.000 0.005
4.27 BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

105B

241B
Output relays can be programmed as:
 Breaker close failure. It looks after the input "52 status".

 Breaker open failure. It looks after the input "52 status".
 Open failure with overcurrent. It works according to a settings group generically known as "Breaker failure"
:
 Enable
 Phase restore current
 Neutral restore current
 Definite time
If the function is enabled, it works as follows: if the unit gives a tripping signal or an external protection signal is received
through a digital input, a timer will be started; if after the time programmed as "definite time" the current in any phase is
higher than the programmed as "phase restore" or the neutral is higher than the "neutral restore", the relay programmed as
"Open failure with overcurrent" will be activated. The relay will be deactivated only when phase and neutral currents fall
under their restore values.
If a LED has been programmed as "Breaker failure (Open failure with overcurrent)", it will be activated in the same way as
the relay, but it will be deactivated only by acknowledgment through keyboard/display on "Last fault", as the LED which
signalizes trips.
The external protection signal is internally memorized, this means it can be an impulsive type.
On this way of functioning, it will not be looked at the digital input of the circuit breaker status, but at the values of the
currents.
Those units, with single-phase breaker failure, give individual signals for each pole. The reposition settings are the same
as those of the three-phase one. These functions can be activated by digital inputs of external protection of each pole.

24B

Enable YES/NO
Phase restore (A) 0.05 200.0 0.01
Neutral restore (A) 0.05 200.0 0.1
Definite time (sec) 0.00 60.0 0.01

4.28 TAP CHANGER LOCKING (50TCL FUNCTION)

106B
The only purpose of this function is to allow tap changer locking if the set current value is exceeded.
The settings are the following ones:
 Enable: YES/NO
 Locking current threshold: 0.05 A to 200 A
correspondent control signal is sent.
4.29 LOCKING OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

107B
Each protection function can be blocked by a digital input or by a logic function (combination of control inputs and/or
The locking programming is done by keyboard/display as one setting more of the given function.
available in the unit.
4.30 FAULT LOCATOR

108B
4.30.1 Introduction
243B
The fault locator for singles lines implemented with the PL300 protection processes the information collected on each
fault, thereby returning the estimated distance to the fault point as a result of its calculations.
The initial data necessary for reaching the final calculations are the following:
 Sample to sample values of the voltage and current signals collected at the instant that the fault occurs.
 Impedance parameters of the line on which the fault has occurred.
 Length of the line.
 Transformation ratios of the VTs and CTs of the position that captured the fault.
The result obtained is the distance to the fault in kilometres.
4.30.2 Programming settings and collecting results

24B
The necessary parameters for the distance calculation algorithm to work are the following (all the values are referred to the
primary):
Abrev. Description Units

alo Line length Km
Z1 Real part of the Direct Sequence Impedance of the line per length unit /Km
Z2 Imaginary part of idem /Km
Z01 Real part of the Single Pole Impedance of the line per length unit /Km
Z02 Imaginary part of idem /Km
YL2 Imaginary part of the Direct Sequence Impedance of the line per length unit 1/( /Km) ·10-9
YL02 Imaginary part of the Single Pole Admittance of the line per length unit. 1/( /Km) ·10-9
Real part of the Reduced Impedance of the System Direct Sequence in the edge where
ZA1
the relay is
ZA2 Imaginary part of idem

ZA01
located
ZA02 Imaginary part of the idem
Real part of the Reduced Impedance of the System Direct Sequence in the edge where
ZB1
the relay is
ZB2 Imaginary part of idem
ZAB1 Real part of the Direct Sequence Impedance in parallel with the relay line
ZAB2 Imaginary part of idem
Variation minimum threshold in the voltage for Fault detection.
tpV V primary
Variation minimum threshold in the phase current for Fault detection.
tpI A primary
Variation minimum threshold in the GROUND current for Fault detection.
tpI0 A primary
I0min Minimum current of ground after closing (A)
I0max Maximum current of ground after closing (A) A primary
Current detection YES/NO
RTV Transformatio ratio of the voltage measurement transformer
RTI Transformatio ratio of the phase current measurement transformer
RTIN Transformatio ratio of the ground current measurement transformer
TSAL Activation time of the analogue output or the measurement to control 0-3600 sec
If the
and it works with current prefault values equal to zero, in order to avoid the inrush distortion in these measurements.
The "Maximum neutral current (A)" setting is used to filter cross-country faults (simultaneous faults in different lines, e.g.,
AN in protection line and BN in adjacent line).
In situations in which cross-country faults are detected, the protection does not locate the fault, as in such situations the
voltages are distorted by fault in the adjacent line and cause miscalculations of the distance to the fault.
One characteristic of cross-country faults is that the zero sequence current level detected in the system exceeds the
maximum zero sequence current level for single-phase faults. To filter the faults in which this condition is met, the
location of the fault is not permitted in situations in which the "maximum neutral current (A)" is exceeded.
These parameters of the protection are programmed using the communication with the SIPCON protection console. The
screen corresponding to the line parameters is shown in the following figure:

The parameters with the transformation ratios of CTs and VTs are communicated to the relay from the general settings
screen included in the following figure:
General settings screen
The result of the distance calculation is included in the fault report as indicated in the following figure:

Fault report
4.30.3 Local Source Zero Sequence Impedance Setting

245B
The local source zero sequence impedance setting method is shown below.
This setting only applies when the relay is set to receive phase to phase voltages and the fault locator is enabled.
The settings for the following cases are described.
 Grounding via zig-zag coil.

 Rigid or impedance grounding.
4.30.3.1 Grounding via zig-zag coil:
PL300
In those cases in which an artificial grounding neutral by means of a zig-
Real part: 0
Imaginary part: 3 Z0

For example, for a 20 kV network with a grounding system by means of a zig-zag coil that limits the neutral current to
500 A, the adjustment process is as follows:
U 20000
3 3
Z0 23
IN 500
ZA0:
Real part: 0
Imaginary part: 3 * 23
4.30.3.2 Impedance grounding:
PL300
Z0
In those cases in which an impedance grounding is used, the ZA0 setting is configured as follows:
ZA0:
Real part:
3 Re( Z 0)
U2
3 Im(Z 0) Xcc
Imaginary part: S
In which:
U: Network voltage in kV (protection side)
S: Transformer power in MVA.
Xcc: Transformer short-circuit impedance in p.u.
4.30.4 Locator operation

246B
The process that the algorithm follows can be summarised in 5 steps, which are explained below:
 Detection of the fault instant.

 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering.
 Determination of the kind of fault.
 Location algorithm.
 Presentation of the results.

4.30.4.1 Fault detection

Once the protection has started up, the fault detection algorithm begins to process the analogue signals received in
search of the exact instant at which the fault occurred. This search is made by a comparison of the samples between
consecutive cycles.
Once the fault instant has been determined, a total of 20 fault cycles are stored in memory, and it waits for
confirmation of protection tripping in order to process the stored data. In the event that the protection start-up
relapses without tripping, the process of calculating the distance to fault is aborted.
In case the protection trips, the processing of the collected signals continues.
4.30.4.2 Pre-fault and post-fault filtering

The distance calculation algorithm uses the basic components of the voltage and current waves. The filtering extracts
the said components from the signals stored at the start-up moment.
The collected signal is processed using a digital filter that provides the basic voltage and current components. For this
stage, a cosine filter is used.
The filtering is adapted to the fault cycle number it finds, up to a maximum of 5 cycles and a minimum of 1 cycle.
The transition is also detected in evolutive faults, limiting the cycle number to the fist type that appears.
4.30.4.3 Determination of fault type

Before launching the distance calculation algorithm, from the pre-fault and fault measurements calculated in the
preceding step, it is necessary to define the kind of fault that has occurred.
The locator includes an algorithm that determines what phases were affected by the fault. The algorithm used is
based on the known Girgis method for distance relays. This procedure, which analyses the various magnitudes of the
change between the pre-fault situation and the post-fault situation in the basic component of the currents, has
demonstrated an enviable accuracy in its results.
4.30.4.4 Distance calculation

The distance calculation algorithm developed for the single line has been designed for a line topology such as the
following figure:

Vrelay
Irelay
Line topology
When a fault occurs on one of the lines corresponding to our relay, the information collected by the locator, located at
one of the ends of the same, is reduced to the voltage and current values.
The necessary equations for completely determining the system will be obtained from the situation existing at the
instant immediately before the fault and from the fault situation itself. The application of the principle of superposing
the models in the generators and a suitable mathematical development lead to a system of equations.
The use of the expressions obtained allows calculating the distance to the fault. In order to establish the interactive
method that allows calculating the distance, the three different kinds of faults must be considered as mentioned in the
preceding point.
4.30.4.5 Result presentation

The presentation of the results is made in different ways:

 In the fault report that is sent to the PC by communication.
 In a control measurement:
 Range : -20% to 100 %
 It is maintained active the programmed time (0 7199seconds) or till another fault occurs if the
programmed time is the maximum one (7200 s).
 Optionally, if the unit has an extension board with analogue outputs, as a current signal, in mA
depending on the percentage of the total of the line the fault is in.
 In this case, the proportion between the distance and the current is reflected in the following
figure:

Analogue output
(mA)
5 mA
Distance to fault
-20% 0% 100% (% of the total length)
So, the following calculation will be carried out ion order to calculate the distance to the fault starting from the
analogue output current:
Distance (%) = Current(mA)·120/5 20
And the following one to calculate the current corresponding to a certain current:
Current (mA) = [Distance(%)+20]·5/120
The behaviour of the analogue output has some particularities:
 after a fault, it remains active for a programmed time. (from 0 to 3600 seconds).
 if, while the current output is active, another fault occurs two things may happen:
 if the recloser is in on-going cycle, the present current output is not modified and it remains active for
the whole programmed time.
 if the recloser is not in on-going cycle, the output current is removed or 2 minutes and then the new
calculation is presented within the programmed time.
Note.- The localizer operation has a very special characteristics when selecting the
localizer settings. When this setting is at YES, it works as follows:
 If calculating the distance of a fault (activation time of the output without finishing), a new fault is
only calculated if we are not in an on-going cycle or definite trip. The first fault of a reclosure cycle
is only calculated while we are calculating the value of the first line of the reclosure sequence. If
we are not calculating this value, that is, the time to keep the output is zero, we clear all the faults
produced (regardless the reclosure cycle).
If the Inrush setting is at NO, try to calculate all the faults that occur. If we are within the time to keep the distances
and another fault occurs, we will calculate and present it when the previous fault is already calculated (if we are
keeping the distance to a certain fault and some of them occur within that time, we only calculate the last one to
occur).
Regarding the distance shown in the different protocols, in PROCOME it is possible to choose between showings the
maintained fault (with programmable time) and the instantaneous one. In the rest of the protocols (DNP, MODBUS,
101...) the instantaneous fault is shown when selecting the measurement format in counts and the fault with kept
time when choosing the calculated format. The distance measurement is given in counts, where the background scale
is a un 120% (offset or 20 displacement).

4.31 UNDERCURRENT PROTECTION (37)

109B

247B
The relays have two definite time undercurrent levels, based on the minimum current of the three phases. The unit picks
up when one of the three phase currents falls below the setting.
The choice of open- and closed-breaker trips (ED status of 52) is selectable (by setting).
4.31.2 Settings range

248B
table.
Setting Min. Max Step Remarks

Enabled YES always / YES with 52 closed / NO
0.1 0,01
Undercurrent pickup level 1 10 For input with 200A range
0.0 0.00
2 For input with 40A range
2 1
Additional timing level 1 0 600 0,01
0.1 0.01
Undercurrent pickup level 2 10 For input with 200A range
0.0 0.00
2 For input with 40A range
2 1
Additional timing level 2 0 600 0.01

AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS 
5. AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
5.1 RECLOSER
10B

249B
The unit enables up to 4 reclosers.
Different close times for phase to phase and phase to earth faults.
In service/Out of service push-button in the keyboard.
Programmable security time after manual closing and after automatic closing.
The 5 closure counters (total, first, second, third and fourth closures) are stored in non volatile memory and can be
displayed on the display. These counters can be set to 0 by keyboard.
Definitions:
 Surveillance or rest status.


start operating.
 Ongoing cycle status.
 This status of the recloser is set throughout the entire process in which it is activated from the first trip up
to the closing of the breaker and the safety period has elapsed (successful reclosing) or until all the
programmed reclosings have been unsuccessfully executed. In the first instance it moves on to
 Definitive trip status.


remains open, given that it is a permanent fault. Exit from this status can only be achieved by closing the
breaker manually.
 Time for first, second, third and fourth closure.

closure phases.
 Reclaim time after manual closing.
 It is the time from the moment of circuit breaker manual closing; during this time it is watched if there is
a protection trip, and if this is the case, it will be continued to definitive trip instead of to surveillance
status.
 Reclaim time after automatic closure.
 It is the time from the moment of circuit breaker automatic closing; during this time it is watched if there
is a protection trip, and if this is the case the cycle will be continued instead of moving on to Surveillance.
 Close conditions time (optional use).
 It is the time margin, after a protection trip, during which the close conditions (Reference voltage
presence) must be fulfilled to be able to continue the cycle. It is not used if there is no input programmed

5.1.2 Operation
250B
The figures below represent the sequence of events for a recloser which has been programmed for three reclosing
attempts, with TR1, TR2 and TR3 as the corresponding reclosing times, with a reclaim Tsec, for different situations:
a.- First successful reclosing
Once the Surveillance status has been reached, a new trip causes the beginning of a new cycle, restarting the reclosing 1,
as it is shown next:
WARNING! It may happen that a low current permanent fault causes tripping after expiring the reclaim time. In order to
avoid that, in such situation, all the reclosings become first reclosings and a definitive trip is never reached, the reclaim
time is automatically extended if there is a starting until it drops-off or trips.
b.- Second successful reclosing.

c.- Third successful reclosing.
d.- Moves onto a definitive trip after exhausting the programmed number of reclosings.
e.- Moves onto definitive trip due to a trip during the reclaim time after a manual closing.


251B

Recloser in service YES/NO
Number of closures 0 4 1
Waiting time for the first closure, phase to phase faults (s) 0.05 600.0 0.01
Waiting time for the second closure, phase to phase faults (s) 1 600 1
Waiting time for the third closure, phases to phase faults (s) 1 600 1
Waiting time for the fourth closure, phase to phase faults (s) 1 600 1
Waiting time for the first closure, phase to earth faults (s) 0.05 600 0.01
Waiting time for the second closure, phase to earth faults (s) 1 600 1
Waiting time for the third closure, phase to earth faults (s) 1 600 1
Waiting time for the fourth closure phase to earth faults (s) 1 600 1
Reclaim time after automatic closing, phase to phase faults (s) 1 600 1
Reclaim time after automatic closing phase to earth faults (s) 1 600 1
Reclaim time after manual closing (s) 1 600 1
Reference voltage waiting time (s) 1 600 1
5.1.4 Trips enabling (6 tables)

25B
Through "YES" or "NO" it is programmed for each of the possible tripping conditions
 Phase timed overcurrent

 Neutral timed overcurrent
 Phase instantaneous overcurrent
 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent
 Broken conductor and current unbalance
if it is enabled or not in each of the following circumstances
 After manual closing

 After the first reclosing
 After the second reclosing
 After the third reclosing
 After the fourth reclosing
The trip disabling by this procedure is effective during the corresponding reclaim time and with the condition that the
recloser is engaged.
If the enabling of "trip by external protection operation" is programmed "NO", the recloser will not consider that input
during the reclaim time, and if a circuit breaker opening occurs for this reason, and without a trip order by their own
protection, it will be considered as a manual opening and therefore it will not proceed to reclose.
5.1.5 Enable of reclosings (6 tables)

253B
By using "YES" or "NO" it will be programmed for each of the possible reclosings whether it is allowed or not after each of
the 7 possible causes of own trips seen in the previous section, and the trip by external protection operation.
It may be the case that a trip command is given by several units and the corresponding reclosing enabling criteria are not
coincident. In such situation the reclosing decision will be taken internally, depending on the specifications for the first
trip (by order, not by time) analysed according to the following order:

 Neutral timed overcurrent
 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent

 Broken conductor or unbalance

 External protection actuation
If it is decided that that reclosing is not enabled, it will be moved on to the next reclosing analysis, until an enabled one is
found or until definitive trip is reached.
To prevent the reclosing by a determined protection unit, the reclosing blocking settings R1 to R4 must be programmed to
"NO" from the last wished reclosing. For example if a reclosing is not wished after phase time delayed trip, and the
maximum number of programmed reclosings is 1, all reclosings (R1 to R4) after that type of trip must be programmed to
"NO".
5.1.6 Other operation characteristics

254B
 Recloser Out of service

 This state is reached by pressing the push-button R on the keyboard, or control order. All relays related to
the recloser are de-excited.
 Definitive trip
 Apart from the already mentioned causes, this status is reached by trip being the recloser locked.
 Recloser locked
 This state is reached by activation of input or logic programmed as recloser locking. The cycle is not
started in it and it comes out, if it was already started, moving on to Definitive trip if the circuit breaker
opens by a protection trip.
 Bus bar voltage monitoring

is applied, a function which prevents the breaker automatic closing will be executed if the bus bar is de-
energized. The use of this input is optional. If no input is programmed as Vref, the recloser automation
does not count on the bus bar voltage condition to perform a closing operation.
 Manual operation during the cycle.
 If during the operating cycle a manual order (or by command) is given to the circuit breaker, the recloser
aborts the cycle and moves onto idle status.
 Digital outputs related to recloser (and which can be programmed as output relays):
 Recloser in ongoing cycle. Active from the moment when the circuit breaker opens by trip until the
Monitoring or definitive trip status is reached.
 Recloser locked. Active if the recloser is disengaged or if the external recloser locking input is
activated.
 Closing (breaker closing order)
 Definitive trip. Active while on that state.
 Cancellation of instantaneous. Active during the reclaim time after an automatic closing. It can be used
to block other protections (externals).
 Logic inputs related to the recloser, which can be assigned to physical inputs:
 Breaker status. This input is necessary for the recloser operation.
 Reference voltage. It is not necessary. If it is programmed, the recloser function demands to see closed
that input to carry out the reclosing; not, if it is not programmed.
 Recloser locking. As its name indicates, it inhibits this automation. It is not necessary if it is not
wished to use the locking.
 External protection. It can cause the beginning of a reclosing cycle if the reclosing enabling are set to
"YES" due to the "external protection" cause. It is not necessary.

5.2 SEQUENCE COORDINATION

1B
This function aims that the recloser moves along the reclosing sequence when he sees a fault being interrupted by other
recloser situated downstream, despite he does not come himself to produce trips of its breaker.
If the coordination function is enable, the recloser will move into running cycle when detecting a protection start-up after a
drop-out of the protection (instead of a trip as usual) and from that moment it will count (cyclewise) the current interruptions
as own trips and the current reestablishment as own reclosings.
So, in the case of two units in series, being the downstream one programmed with tripping times shorter than the upper one,
in front of a permanent fault even lower situated, the unit downstream is the one carrying out effectively the tripping and
reclosing operations, but the upper one is following him in his same cycle status.
If, for example 3 high speed shots and 1 low speed shot have been programmed for each one, the only one which will be
active, with the 4 shots, is the downstream one. If there is no coordination, the downstream one would trip 3 times, other 3
times the upper one and 1 more (and definitive) the downstream one, so that the line section between both units has been
opened 3 times without reason.
The only set By
5.3 RECLOSING AFTER TRIPPING BY MINIMUM FREQUENCY

12B

25B
After a trip by minimum frequency, if this function is enabled and not locked, the unit tries only one reclosing.
When the unit trips, the breaker closing 79f-

is at "NO" or if the frequency is higher than the mínimum programmed,
or if the voltage is higher than the minimum programmed. If th

fulfilled, it moves to definitive trip.
The breaker closing 79f-locking signal will be active until the recloser or definite trip conditions are given.
p,
ser conditions indefinitely.
definitive trip.
Setting the recloser out of service by command or by locking by digital input affects both this operating mode and the trip by
current operating mode.
5.3.2 Settings
256B

Enable YES/NO
Min. freq. condition to reclose YES/NO
Min. frequency to reclose 40 70 0.01
Reclosing time (s) 1 1,000 1
Reclaim time (s) 1 300 1
Waiting enable definite trip YES/NO
Waiting enable definite trip 0 86400 1
Recloser condition minimum frequency YES/NO
Recloser value minimum voltage 0 200 0.1

Note: this operation mode isused from version AD of the CPU Firmware
5.4 SPECIAL RECLOSER TO OPERATE WITH PROTECTIONS WITH SINGLE-POLE

13B
TRIP
The recloser can be in one of the following 3 statuses:
Out of service.
This status is reached by Control command or by command of the protection console. It does not reclose.
In service, three-pole mode.

This status is reached by Control command or by command of the protection console or by activation of digital input (if there
is any programmed for that function, which is optional). Its operation is the same to the standard in the PL300 protections
except for the next aspects:
 The ongoing cycle will start by actuation of the PL300 itself or by activation of the - The
-
 The close command is conditioned
be wired up to the output of a PL50 unit that will execute the Synchrocheck function.
 -pole
In service, single-pole mode.

This status is reached by Control command or by digital input activation (if there is any programmed for that function, which
is optional). Its operation is the following one:
 -
-
 -pole mod
closure conditional on the closure permission).
 If the first trip is single-pole, the closure time and the reclaim time can be different of those for the three-pole
trip (other settings) and the close command (which is three-pole) is given without taking into account the
Synchrocheck function.
 -
-
 It is considered that in a cycle of closures there can only be one single-pole and if there is, it must be the first
one. The second and subsequent are always three-pole. So unlike the closure and reclaim times for three-pole
trips, that are 4, there is one only closure time and one reclaim time for the single-pole trip.
5.5 SYNCHROCHECK
14B

257B
the compliance of the conditions established by setting. Two digital o

a
signal for a closure automation function, if there is any.
This function can be disabled (by setting or by digital input), in which case there will always be closure permission.
The function compares the voltage signals of the same phase at both sides of the breaker (that we will call A and , being A
the bar side and B the line side). The unit compares directly the voltages received by its analogue inputs, that is, the

values of the secondary of the voltage measurement transformers. It is supposed that the transformation ratio of these is
the same in the busbar and in the line. There is no correction factor for the case in which they are different.
The conditions to be closure permission are of two types:
 Undervoltage permission. It is given permission if there is no voltage in one or both sides of the breaker,
according to the following settings:
 Permission if there is no voltage in A nor in B (YES or NO)
 Permission if there is no voltage in A but there is in B (YES or NO)
 Permission if there is no voltage in B but there is in A (YES or NO)
It is considered that there is no voltage in one side of the breaker when the voltage measured is lower than the value
The analysis of the undervoltage conditions is only carried out if the Synchrocheck function is enabled, that is, it is not an
undervoltage protection (type 27) but an auxiliary element to allow the closure in certain conditions, in which the
comparison between the busbar and the line voltages would not give permission. As said before, if the Synchrocheck
function is disabled, the closure permission is given.

the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
 Difference between VA and VB lower that the programmed value
 Difference in phase angles lower than the programmed value
 Difference in frequencies lower than the programmed value
Each one of these three conditions can be enabled or not. If it is not, it gives permission.
programmed for the activation of the closure permission signal.
The syncrocheck failure signal is activated immediately in the event of a non-compliance with the conditions and is
independent of the timer.
way any closure can be locked if that relay is used as locking of the manual command.
We stress that this permission is referred only to the Synchrocheck function; so she is only the one that controls the
s a relay controlled by closure commands
(digital input or command).
The function does not take into account the breaker status, that is, it can give closure.
As control signals we can find the following ones: voltage difference, frequency and angle and Synchrocheck locked (by
input, setting).
5.5.2 Settings
258B

Enable YES/NO
Close operation time (s) 0 100 1 Conditions fulfilling
Minimum voltage in side A (V) 10 200 1
Minimum voltage in side B (V) 10 200 1
Undervolt. YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
Voltage difference condit. enable YES/NO

Voltage difference (V) 2 90 1

Frequency difference condit. Enable YES/NO
Frequency difference (Hz) 0.05 2 0.01
Angle difference condit. Enable YES/NO
Angle difference (º) 5 50 1
Apart from the previous ones, from FW BM version onwards, there is another setting to program in which phase of side A
the module and the angle are taken for this Synchronization function.
options are A, B, C).
synchronism).
The frequency measurement is always taken from phase B, regardless the one programmed in the previous setting.
5.6 CLOSE LOCKING WITH PRESENCE OR ABSENCE OF VOLTAGE

15B
Inhibition by voltage presence on the line side. It tries to lock the closing if there is voltage on the line side. So that, the FW
version presents the following changes:
 It adds a condition to the synchronism, so that, if the units that look at the parameter differences (module, angle
and frequency) are disabled the undervoltage unit criterion is taken as a decision to allow or not the closing.
 - -No Side
sabling the permissions by difference of module, angle and frequency. In that situation the undervoltage
criterion prevails over the differences of shape, which does not allow the closing, if there is voltage on side B.
 It adds new signals of presence and absence of voltage on side A and on side B and these signals can be taken to
the Recloser locking signal through a logic. The added signals are the following:
 Voltage presence on side A
 Voltage presence on side B
 Voltage absence on side A
 Voltage absence on side B
Example: If side A voltage is lower than the absence (used in the synchronism) side A voltage absence signal will be
activated; if the presence setting is exceeded, the absence one will be deactivated and the presence one will be activated.
5.7 AUTOMATION FUNCTION FOR DISTRIBUTION CENTRES

16B
5.7.1 Slack springs automation functions

259B
 It is composed of:
 "unstretched springs" digital input
 "open spring motor" digital output
 "spring slack time" setting (0.1 to 100 seconds)
 Operation: When "unstretched spr
this time the input is deactivated, the lock is deactivated. If the time is exceed with no opening, "open
kept. The alarm and locking do not disappear till the input is deactivated.

5.7.2 Voltage presence

260B
It is not an automati
absence), the higher phase-to-phase voltage must be within some o preset values, as:

 Phase to phase rated primary voltage (kV)
 Voltage absence threshold (% of the nominal)
 Voltage presence threshold (%n of the nominal)
 Operation: When the highest of the phase to phase voltages exceeds the presence threshold, control word
bit is set to 1, when it falls below the absence threshold it is set to 0.
5.7.3 Locking
261B
Opening locking. The open order will be not given by command, input or pushbutton, if the breaker is seen as open (but it
can be given by protection trip, regardless how it is seen).
Closing opening. The open order will be not given by command, input, pushbutton or recloser, if the breaker is seen as
there is that locking, there is a Definite Trip.

OTHER SETTINGS 
6. OTHER SETTINGS
6.1 PROGRAMMING OF LOGIC OUTPUTS

17B
The user can configure up to 15 logic outputs, called "logic 1" to "logic 15", which can be assigned to relays, as well as to
LEDs, locking inputs, signals to be registered on the disturbance recorder, etc. It is also possible to configure generate
The programming of the logic outputs can be only done through the Protections console, not by keyboard / display, from the
basic available signals, consigned in the Appendix "Available signals" (as many of them correspond to optional functions, not
every model will contain all of them). The programming procedure is described in other document: the Protections console
manual.
The logic signals can be generated according to the following scheme:
As it can be observed in the definition of a logic output intervene the following elements:
 up to 16 signals among the available ones (or their negated ones), forming an OR function
 up to 16 signals among the available ones (or their negated ones), forming an AND function
 an OR or AND function (programmable) of two previous functions´ results
 a programmable time delay ("delay") to activate the output
 a programmable time for the duration of the output activation
The delay time is the time length since there is a logic 1 at the exit of the logic ports until the corresponding logic output is
activated. If during this time the "1"dissapeared, the output could not be activated. It can be programmed between 0 and
599.9 s, with steps of 0.1 s.
The pulse time (duration) is the time during which the logic signal remains active. Its programming allows two options:
 "By logic": after the delay, the output is active as long as there is a 1 at the programmed logic output
 By time": the time during which the output is active is programmed, so that once expired the output is
deactivated, independently from the state of the programmed logic output. Only a new step from 0 to 1 will
activate the output again, after the delay.
 The time range goes from 0.1 s to 599.9 s, with steps of 0.1 s.
A logic output "i" can be used as available signal for programming input of other logic signal "j" or of itself.

OTHER SETTINGS 
A very simple application sample: it is wished that the digital output DO7 follows to the digital input DI6, with a delay of 1 s.
Input
DI6
Logic
Input
output 1
DI6
Dela Duratio
y n Logic Logic
/i output 1
Application 1. Timed
 T delay = 1s. output
 Duration = "by logic"
 Programming of output DO7: Logic 1
Another example of logical applications (fuse blow up function): There are in a table (table 1) a curve that trips in quick time,
and another one (table 2) that trips in a longer time. Logic 7 will be programmed: 79I-T. 2nd recloser security. , T delay =
nitial
situation (table 1) logic 8 will be programmed: (79I- Recl. On standby) OR (79I- Intens. Definitive trip ) OR (79I-. Curr.
6.2 LOGIC SELECTIVITY FUNCTIONS

18B
Sele
up of the units 50/50N/50NS/67NA and/or the following digital signal:
 FF=Forward Fault: It picks up the 50 or 50N or 50NS or 67NA and the corresponding directional sees the fault
forwards. The unit 50 does not have to be directional.
 FR= Reverse fault: It picks up the 50 or 50N or 50NS or 67NA and the corresponding directional sees the fault
backwards. The unit 50 does not have to be directional.
 Directional Retrolocking: FF AND not (FR) AND not (Breaker failure).
 Non-directional Retrolocking: (pick up of 50, 50N, 50NS) AND not (Breaker failure).
 Prelocking: FR AND not (FF) AND not (Breaker failure).
 Pretrip: (FF AND (Trip by 50/50N67NA) AND not(DI locking)) OR (FF AND (Trip by 51/51N))
 Retrotrip(FR AND (Trip by 50/50N67NA) AND not(DI locking)) OR (FR AND (Trip by 51/51N))
6.3 MEASUREMENTS CHRONOLOGICAL RECORD

19B
The settings corresponding to measurement chronological record are detailed

DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS 
7. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTIONS
7.1 EVENTS REPORTS

120B
The list of events which can be generated by the protection (if it has the corresponding functions, which are optional in many
cases) is indicated as follows. Each event comes along with his date and time and his phase and neutral currents. The
protection saves in non volatile memory a queue of 400 events, retrievable from the PC.
Non maskable events

 Activation table 1
 Change settings table 0
 Recloser out of service
 Recloser in service
 Relay out of service
 Relay in service
 Relay off
 Relay on
 Digital input IN-xx (1 to 35) disabled by intermittence
Maskable events
 Communications
 Local mode (acts from keyboard/display)
 Local mode (acts through front port)
 Remote mode (acts through rear port)
 Current protection
 Timed unit pickup phase A
 Timed unit pickup phase B
 Timed unit pickup phase C
 Instantaneous unit pickup phase A
 Instantaneous unit pickup phase B
 Instantaneous unit pickup phase C

 Activation of output of timed unit phase B

 Activation of output of timed unit phase C
 Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase A
 Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase B
 Activation of output of instantaneous unit phase C
 Timed unit pickup neutral
 Instantaneous unit pickup neutral
 Activation of output of timed unit neutral
 Activation of output of instantaneous unit neutral
 Phase unbalance timed unit pickup
 Phase unbalance instantaneous pickup
 Activation of output of phase unbalance timed unit
 Activation of output of phase unbalance instantaneous unit
 Broken conductor unit pickup
 Activation of output of broken conductor
 Breaker failure
 Trip circuit failure
 Close circuit failure
 Exceeded the maximum (set limit) of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator
 Overflow (numeric limit) of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator
 Undercurrent Protection
 Undercurrent Pickup Level 1
 Undercurrent Trip Level 1
 Undercurrent Pickup Level 2
 Undercurrent Trip Level 2
 Overvoltage protection:
 Activation of output of timed unit phase A (trip)
 Undervoltage protection:


 Activation of output of timed unit phase A (trip)
 Inputs
 Activation of digital input xx ( 1 to 17)
 Deactivation of digital input xx (1 to 17)
 Recloser
 External locking of the recloser
 External unlocking of the recloser
 No reference voltage
 Reclosing order
 Definitive trip
 Recloser in idle
 Recloser in ongoing cycle
 Command
 Excessive number of trips
 Breaker closing
 Breaker opening
 Breaker close command (control message or input)
 Breaker open command ( control message or input )
 Close command failure
 Open command failure
 Self-checking
 Critical Hardware Error
 Converter reference voltage error
 Converter error
 FLASH memory recording error
 Relays activation error
 SPI communication error (between micro and DSP)
 Non critical Hardware error
 clock synchronization error
 HW error corrected
7.2 FAULT RECORDS

12B
The protection stores in non volatile memory a queue of the 20 last faults retrievable from the PC with the following
information
 Available units

 Units tripped during fault

 Units picked up during fault
 Fault starting date and time (first picked up unit)
 Tripping date and time (first picked up unit)
 Fault ending date and time (when the trip signal disappears)
 Current cleared by circuit breaker (maximum of phase currents detected between the moment of the tripping
order and the breaker opening)
 Settings group active during the fault
 Frequency
 Distance to fault
 Prefault active and reactive powers
 Fault active and reactive powers
 Number or reclosing in which the fault has occurred.
 Type of fault and type of trip: 3 letters code made by the characters combinations A, B, C, N, D,... depending on
tripping by phase, neutral or unbalance-broken conductor and type of function. Example: ACN is a two phase to
earth fault between phases A and C and earth. Are listed below fault codes:
 Phases Overcurrent: (Depending on the phase affected) ABC
 Neutral Overcurrent: N
 Current unbalance: DQ
 Broken conductor: FA
 Undercurrent: i
 Overvoltage: (Depending on the phase affected) abc
 Undervoltage: (Depending on the phase affected) abc
 Voltage unbalance: dq
 Overvoltage 3xV0: n
 Frecuency minimum/maximum: f / F
 Frecuency derivative: df
 Thermal Image: IT
 Minimum active power: p
 Maximum active power: P
 Reverse active power: iP
 Reverse reactive power: iQ
 Minimum apparent power: s
 Maximum apparent power: S
 Loss of field: MHO
 Protective schemes: RTP
 Pre-fault Phase A current (module and angle).
 Pre-fault Phase B current
 Pre-fault Phase C current
 Pre-fault Neutral current
 The pre-fault currents and voltages are simultaneous, and they are those existing 2 cycles prior to the pick-up.
 Phase A fault current (module and angle)

 Phase B fault current

 Phase C fault current
 Neutral fault current
The 4 fault currents are simultaneous, and they are the ones existing at the moment of the trip order.
 Phases (A, B and C) pre-fault voltages (module and angle).

 Phases (A, B and C) pre-fault voltages (module and angle).
The 4 fault voltages are simultaneous to the fault currents.
 KI/KI2/KI2T (depending on the setting) per phase

Besides they are kept in non volatile memory, and they are retrievable through keyboard /display, the following data
corresponding to the last 10 faults:
 Tripped phases
 Maximum phase and neutral currents during fault
 Date and starting and ending time of the fault
7.3 MEASUREMENTS
12B
7.3.1 Measurements at the secondary

26B
They are measurements referred to the fundamental component, which are the ones used by the protection functions:
7.3.1.1 By keyboard/display
 Phase A current (module in Amperes and angle in degrees)
 Phase B current " "
 Phase C current " "
 Neutral current " "
 Sensitive neutral current
 Phase A simple phase voltage (module in Volts and angle in degrees)
 Phase B simple phase voltage ( " " )
 Phase C simple phase voltage ( " " )
 Average simple phase voltage ( " " )
 Neutral voltage
 Frequency (in Hz)
 Current maximeter (in Amperes)
 I2/I1 negative sequence component in %
Note. - The phase current values in display are given in absolute value, that is, without sign.
Note about the maximeter. - The maximeter shows the maximum value of the average value during a specific time interval, of the three phase
average current. The time interval is that programmed as time window for in the Measurement setting. The detailed
operation is the following one: every second the three phase average current is calculated and it is accumulating; when an interval is over, the
accumulated value is divided by its number of seconds; thus the average value of this interval is obtained. If this value is higher than the one in
the maximeter, it is actualize with the new value, taking note of the date and time when it has been obtained.
7.3.1.2 Through PC(Protections console)

They are on the first of the "STATUS" screens


 Phase B current
 Phase C current
 Neutral current
 Phase A to earth voltage (module in Volts and angle in degrees)
 Phase B to earth voltage
 Phase C to earth voltage
 Voltage and current direct, inverse and zero sequences
All the angles are referred to the simple phase voltage of Phase A.
7.3.2 Measurements at the primary

263B
7.3.2.1 By keyboard/display
 Phase A current (in Amperes)



 Phase A simple voltage (in kV)



 Compound voltage VAB (in kV)



 Neutral voltage
 Active total power (MW)
 Reactive total power (MVAR)
 Apparent total power (MVA)
 Active power by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)
 Reactive power by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)
 Power factor
 Active energy counter (positive)
 Active energy counter (negative)
 Reactive energy counter (positive)
 Reactive energy counter (negative)
 Date and time of the counter setting to 0
 Frequency (in Hz)
 Total Power maximeter
 Power by phase maximeter (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)

 Harmonics distortion factor in IA, IB and IC (in %)

 Harmonics distortion factor in VA, VB and VC (in %)
The harmonic distortion factors are given as the ratio between the fundamental and the result of considering the
harmonics 1 to 15.
7.3.2.2 Through PC (Protections console)

They are on the first of the "MEASUREMENTS" screens

 Phase B current
 Phase C current
 Neutral current
 Neutral sensitive current
 Date and time corresponding to the maximeter
 Phase A simple voltage (module in kV and angle in degrees)
 Phase B simple voltage
 Phase C simple voltage
 Compound voltage VAB (in kV)



 Frequency
 Active total power (MW)
 Reactive total power (MVAR)
 Apparent total power (MVA)
 Active power by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)
 Reactive power by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)
 Average power factor
 Power factor by phase (only valid if the simple voltages are connected)
 Active energy counter (positive)
 Active energy counter (negative)
 Reactive energy counter (positive)
 Reactive energy counter (negative)
 Date and time of the counter setting to 0
 Harmonics distortion factor in IA, IB and IC (in %)
 Harmonics distortion factor in VA, VB and VC (in %)
The harmonic distortion factors are given as the ratio between the fundamental and the result of considering the
harmonics 1 to 15.
Note.- The phase current values in this screen are given with sign, which is the same one to that of the active power corresponding to that phase.

7.3.3 Vn-Vsinc measurement

264B
Allows the Vsinc transformer to be employed as a neutral voltage measurement when the syncrocheck is not being
employed. Thus, flexibility is afforded to those models which did not previously allow a Vn measurement when the
syncrocheck function was not in use.
In order to employ the Vsinc transformer as a Vn measurement, the following conditions must be met:
 The unit must be equipped with another Vn transformer.

 The model must contemplate the Vn surge function.
 The syncrocheck function must be disabled.
 The Vn measurement must be programmed as originating from the transformer.
In the absence of the above conditions, the Vsinc transformer is employed for syncrocheck.
When the above conditions are produced, the unit will function in the following manner:
 The transformer which is usually Vsinc will appear as Vneutro in the status screen.
 The Vn (59N) surge functions will function in accordance with this
 The Vsinc measurement will be displayed as 0V.
7.4 MEASUREMENTS HISTORICAL REPORT

123B

265B
The protection keeps in non volatile memory a queue of 400 historical measurement records, retrievable from a PC
(Protections console).
Each record includes the maximum and minimum average currents, the maximum and minimum average single voltages
and the maximum and minimum active, reactive and apparent power (computed within a programmable time window)
detected during an also programmable register period. The currents are secondary Amperes, and the voltages are
secondary Volts.
The operation detail is the following: every second, the current (three phase average) values, the voltage (three phase
average) values, and the power values are added to their respective accumulators; when the time screen is over the
accumulated value is divided into the window number of seconds, in order to obtain he average value. When the
programmed register interval is over, the maximum and minimum values of the measurements obtained in this interval are
registered.
The register interval is automatically synchronised with he clock, so if 15 minutes are programmed, 4 registers will be
done every tour, that is at 0, 15, 30 and 45 minutes.
Calendar mask operation:
for each day has to be taken into account. If one day it is at YES it is registered, if it is t NO it is not registered.

26B

Time window for average(min.) 1 15 1
Historical register interval (min.) 1 1,440 1
Calendar mask Monday to Sunday YES/NO
Mask disables YES/NO
Register start time 0 24 1

Register end time 0 24 1
7.5 STATISTICAL DATA

124B
The same information can be obtained by keyboard / display or through PC (screen "STATISTICAL DATA"):
 Automatic reclosing counters

 First reclosing
 Second "
 Third "
 Fourth "
 Total
 Breaker openings counter (by tripping or by manual opening).
 kI2 sum (square kA interrupted by each breaker pole, squared)
 Counter of the unit picks up (only in display).
All these counters can be set to 0, and the kI2 sum set to the initial value programmed as setting. (the counter of the picks
up is set at 0 with the recloser one.).
Besides, through PC we can see counter breaker openings by trip or manual.
7.6 PROTECTION STATUS

125B
7.6.1 By keyboard / display

267B
It can be seen:
 Date and time of the relay.

 Status of each of the digital inputs: open (A) or closed (C).
7.6.2 Through PC (Protections Console)

268B
On the "STATUS" screens, apart from the measurements already mentioned, it is possible to see:
 on the screen 1
 Date and time of the relay
 Active table
 on the screen 2
 Protection units picked up at the present moment
 Protection units tripped at the present moment
 on the screen 3
 Units tripped on the last trip
 Command orders
 Circuit breaker supervision status
 Closing and trip circuit supervision status
 On screen 4

 Digital input, digital output and LED status.

 In screen 5
 Status of the active (by PLD) and disabled protection functions
7.7 OSCILLOGRAPH DATA RECORDER

126B
It has a capacity of 1,200 cycles, being programmable the number of cycles per perturbation, so, if, for example, 40
cycles/register are registered, there will be space for 30 registers. If 120 cycles/register is registered there will be space for
10 etc. the number of cycles previous to the pick up is also programmable between 1 and 100. On each record there are up
to 9 analogical channels registered, 1 analogue frequency channel and up to 32 digital channels and up to 32 digital
channels which can be chosen from a list selected from the available signals.
Each record can be started by a rising slope of each of the digital signals considered by the protection model.
The analogical channels are sent to the console multiplied by the transformation ratio so that they appear on primary values.
The number of samples per analogical channel cycle is 32.
By means of the analogue frequency channel, the corresponding frequency value is stored for each sample collected in the
disturbance recorder, accurate to 2 decimal points.

OTHER FUNCTIONS 
8. OTHER FUNCTIONS
Time setting and synchronization
8.1 TIME SETTING

127B
It can be done from the keyboard/display (within "Change settings") or from the Protection Console (Screen 1 "STATUS").
8.1.1 Synchronization
269B
There is an input for synchronization demodulated by IRIG- -

he time assignation to events between connected devices to be synchronized with a
1 ms margin.
The IRIG-B time code is a mesh generated once a second. The code used is B 003, in which the mesh is constituted by a
pulse train with TTL levels of variable widths. The time it shows corresponds to PPS (Pulse per second) coinciding with
the Mesh Reference Mark of the mesh.
On integrated control systems (SIPC) the unit is synchronized periodically (every minute) by the UCS.
In this case there will be no use in making a time change by keyboard or Protection console, as this will be soon
eliminated by the UCS.
8.2 CONTROL MESSAGES

128B
The protection responds to the following control messages
 Measurements, changes and counters request

 Digital status request
 Clock synchronization
 Counter freezing
 Statistical data initialization commands
 Commands for relays and specified digital signals
 Statistical data request
The measures transmitted are the ones programmed among the following. The order in which they are sent is also
programmable. The programming is done through the Protection console SIPCON/P.
Note.- the phase current values with sign, which is the same one to that of the active power corresponding to that phase.
No.Bytes Format Specification Data

2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 VA module
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 VB module
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 VC module
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 VAVERAGE module
2 Word Procome 3 *Vn * 1,2 VAB module (Compound voltage)
2 Word Procome 3 *Vn * 1,2 VBC module (Compound voltage)
2 Word Procome 3 *Vn * 1,2 VCA module (Compound voltage)
2 Word Procome 3 *Vn * 1,2 VCAVERAGE module (Compound voltage)
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 VN module (neutral)

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 V module Synchrocheck
2 Word Procome 6 (A) IA module
2 Word Procome 6 IB module
2 Word Procome 6 IC module
2 Word Procome 6 IAVERAGE module
2 Word Procome 6 IN module
2 Word Procome 6 ISN module (sensitive)
2 Word Procome 6 INA module (isolated)
2 Word Procome 6 Current maximeter
2 Word Procome 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Active power)
2 Word Procome 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Reactive power)
2 Word Procome 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 S (Apparent power)
2 Word Procome 70 Frequency
2 Word Procome 70 Frequency Synchrocheck
2 Word Procome 1 Phase A power factor
2 Word Procome 1 Phase B power factor
2 Word Procome 1 Phase C power factor
2 Word Procome 1 Average power factor
2 Word Procome 100 Distortion in IA
2 Word Procome 100 Distortion in IB
2 Word Procome 100 Distortion in IC
2 Word Procome 100 Distortion in VA
2 Word Procome 100 Distortion in VB
2 Word Procome 100 Distortion in VC
2 Word Procome 100 Average distortion in current
2 Word Procome 100 Average distortion in voltage
2 Word Procome 6 Zero sequence current
2 Word Procome 6 Positive sequence current
2 Word Procome 6 Negative sequence current
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 Zero sequence voltage
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 Positive sequence voltage
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 Negative sequence voltage
2 Word Procome 100 (%) Distance to fault
2 Word Procome 100 (º) Unit temperature
286 (source 125/220 Vdc)
2 Word Procome Vdc measurement
62,4 (source 24/48 Vdc)
2 Word Procome 4095 Total number of openings 52
2 Word Procome 4095 Recloser total counter
2 Word Procome 4095 Counter 1st recloser
2 Word Procome 4095 Counter 2nd recloser
2 Word Procome 4095 Counter 3rd recloser
2 Word Procome 4095 Counter 4th recloser
2 Word Procome 4095 Number of openings 52 per trip
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Active Power) phase A
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Active Power) phase B
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Active Power) phase C
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Reactive Power) phase A
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Reactive Power) phase B
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Reactive Power) phase C
2 Word Procome 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Maximum Active Power)
2 Word Procome 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Maximum Reactive Power)
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 P Maximum phase A
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 P Maximum phase B

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 P Maximum phase C
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q Maximum phase A
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q Maximum phase B
2 Word Procome Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q Maximum phase C
2 Word Procome 200 I last fault phase A
2 Word Procome 200 I last fault phase B
2 Word Procome 200 I last fault phase C
2 Word Procome 200 I last fault phase neutral
2 Word Procome 10 I last fault sensitive neutral
2 Word Procome 4095 kI2 sum pole A
2 Word Procome 4095 kI2 sum pole B
2 Word Procome 4095 kI2 sum pole C
The background scale indicated corresponds to a count number of 4095.
any Protocol, it can be programmed which signals are going to be sent and with which number.
There is a 400-register change queue available. From all these registers, the signal changes to be sent through Procome
protocol will be taken out.
Each register contains the digital signals that have changed in the same millisecond.
That is, if 10 digital signals change their state in the same millisecond, this change would only occupy one register in the
queue, while when they are sent through communications, they would turn into 10 independent changes.
So, if each register has only changed one signal, the queue would have the last 400 digital changes produced in the unit, but
this number is considerably incremented if the change of more than one signal occurs in the same milliseconds, which is very
usual.
The statistical data initialisation commands make possible setting 0 the reclosing counters, the energy counters, the
maximeter and setting the initial value programmed as sum kI2.
The command orders in any Protocol can be programmed among the following ones:
Action ISC Default (in Procome)

Open breaker programable 22
Close breaker programable 24
Activate any relay from 1 to 14(pulse) programmable 1 to 14
Set recloser out of programmable 28
Set recloser in service programable 26
Table 1 activation programable 60
Table 2 activation programmable 61
Set in LOCAL programmable not programmed
Set in TELECOMMAND programable not programmed
Phase instantaneous locking programmable not programmed
Phase instantaneous unlocking programmable not programmed
Neutral instantaneous locking programmable not programmed
Neutral instantaneous unlocking programmable not programmed
Phase time locking programmable not programmed
Phase time unlocking programmable not programmed
Neutral time locking programmable not programmed
Neutral time unlocking programmable not programmed
Sens. Neutral inst locking programmable not programmed

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

Sens. Neutral inst unlocking programmable not programmed
Sens. Neutral time locking programmable not programmed
Sens. Neutral time unlocking programmable not programmed
Phase inst. locking H1 (high level) programmable not programmed
Phase inst. unlocking H1 (high level) programmable not programmed
Neutral inst. locking H1 (high level) programmable not programmed
Neutral instant. unlocking H1 (high level) programmable not programmed
Phase instant. locking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Phase instant. unlocking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Neutral instant. locking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Neutral instant. unlocking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Phase time locking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Phase time unlocking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Neutral time locking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Neutral time unlocking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Sens. Neutral instant. locking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Sens. Neutral instant. unlocking H2 (2nd group) programmable not programmed
Isolate neutral locking. programmable not programmed
Isolate neutral unlocking programmable not programmed
Directionality locking programmable not programmed
Directionality unlocking. programmable not programmed
Time unbalance locking programmable not programmed
Time unbalance unlocking programmable not programmed
Instantaneous unbalance locking programmable not programmed
Instantaneous unbalance unlocking programmable not programmed
Open Broken locking programmable not programmed
Open Broken unlocking programmable not programmed
Breaker failure locking programmable not programmed
Breaker failure unlocking programmable not programmed
Phase locking zone 2 programmable not programmed
Phase unlocking zone 2 programmable not programmed
Phase locking zone 3 programmable not programmed
Phase unlocking zone 3 programmable not programmed
Neutral locking zone 2 programmable not programmed
Neutral unlocking zone 2 programmable not programmed
Neutral locking zone 3 programmable not programmed
Neutral unlocking zone 3 programmable not programmed
Neutral locking programmable not programmed
Neutral unlocking programmable not programmed
Sen. Neutral locking programmable not programmed
Sen. Neutral unlocking programmable not programmed
Phase locking programmable not programmed
Phase unlocking programmable not programmed
Open counter initialize programmable not programmed
Recloser initialize programmable not programmed
Trip counter open init programmable not programmed
Power max. init programmable not programmed
Recloser locking. programmable not programmed
Recloser unlocking. programmable not programmed
Voltage locking programmable not programmed
Voltage unlocking programmable not programmed
Freq. recloser locking programmable not programmed
Freq. recloser unlocking programmable not programmed
Min. freq locking programmable not programmed
Min. freq unlocking programmable not programmed
Max. freq locking programmable not programmed
Max. freq unlocking programmable not programmed
Df/dt locking programmable not programmed
Df/dt unlocking programmable not programmed
Pole A KI2 sum init. programmable not programmed
Pole B KI2 sum init. programmable not programmed

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

Pole C KI2 sum init. Programmable not programmed
Output 1 permanent act programmable not programmed
Deactivate output 1 programmable not programmed
Act. output 1 Local Console programmable not programmed
Act. Output 3 Local Console programmable not programmed
52 breaker open Console Local programmable not programmed
52 breaker close Console Local programmable not programmed
Recloser on duty Console Local programmable not programmed
Recloser FS Console Local programmable not programmed
Set TELEMANDO Console Local programmable not programmed
Cold load locking programmable not programmed
Cold load unlocking programmable not programmed
Sequence coord. locking programmable not programmed
Sequence coord. Unlocking programmable not programmed
Instantaneous locking programmable not programmed
Instantaneous unlocking programmable not programmed
Instant. Gr. and Sens. Grn. Locking programmable not programmed
Instant. Gr. and Sens. Grn. unlocking programmable not programmed
Protection function locking
Protection function unlocking
Command order 1
Command order 2
Command order 3

OTHER FUNCTIONS 

Command order 4
Command order 5
Command order 6
Command order 7
Enabling of digital inputs disabled by intermittence programmable non-programmable
Counters zero reset programmable non-programmable
Positive ActiveEnergy Counter zero reset programmable non-programmable
Negative ActiveEnergy Counter zero reset programmable non-programmable
Positive ReactiveEnergy Counter zero reset programmable non-programmable
Negative ReactiveEnergy Counter zero reset programmable non-programmable
Note.- So that the locking/unlocking commands to be effective, they must be enabled by setting (see Unit Configuration Enabling Pushbuttons
and Locking by commands).
By counters request it will be respond with the following information:
Nº Bytes Format Specification Data

4 Long Absolute value Positive active energy counter (W+)
4 Long Absolute value Negative active energy counter (W-)
4 Long Absolute value Positive reactive energy counter (VAR+)
4 Long Absolute value Negative reactive energy counter (VAR-)
The absolute value sent are "impulses", whose correspondence with kWh and kVARh is established in the settings "Measuring
factors", in the PC on the same screen of General settings, and by keyboard/display in "Program table 0" - "Correction factor".
8.3 LOCAL/REMOTE COMMAND

129B
The unit can be in local or remote (Tele-control) mode.
The transition from the one to the other can be made through the push-button L/R on the front panel (pressed at the same
l input, if there is one programmed for that purpose. The operation is alternative,
this means that each time the input is pressed or activated (rising slope) the status is changed.
e only operative on the Local mode. They have to be
The control commands described in the previous section are only operative on the Remote mode, except the last ones, which
The opening and closing commands by digital input (if they are programmed) are as much operative on the Local mode as on
the Remote (to make possible the operation from contacts activated by a remote station).
In short:
Unit in LOCAL status:

 It admits commands by Digital Input.
 It admits commands from front plate pushbuttons (if enabled by settings)
 It admits output activation commands, breaker activation, ES/FS recloser,
local Console
 It does not admit the remaining commands
 It admits the CHANGE command to REMOTE
Unit in REMOTE status:
 It admits commands by Digital Input.

OTHER FUNCTIONS 
 It does not admit commands from front plate pushbuttons

 It
 It admits the remaining commands
 It admits the CHANGE command to LOCAL
Command pushbuttons located in the front of relay
8.4 COMMANDS BY KEYBOARD AND FRONT PUSHBUTTONS

130B
-
executed from the keyboards and from the pushbuttons of the unit front part.
Programming which command is executed with each key/pushbutton is carried out through the Console, in the screen
In the first row, there appear all the keys that can be used; with ON and OFF indications, as they work as a two-state, and
when changing the state, the programmed command is executed.
The pushbuttons execute the programmedcommand when pushing them for more than 2 seconds(the difference with the
command
Several commands can be programmed for a single key, and they are sequentially executed (up downwards).
(Command Configuration screen), the unit is set in Local, and the rest of the functional pushbuttons can be executed.
8.5 POWER SUPPLY SUPERVISION

13B
It is only available in those models with this option. This function detects the voltage drop of the power supply under the level
that guarantees the correct displaying of the digital input states. This function is enabled by setting (configuration settings),
but the limits for the detection are fixed according to the selection of the power supply (see model coding):
Power supply Detection level

125/220 Vdc 87 V
24/48 Vdc 17 V
The agony signal is activated when the power supply is below the detection level corresponding to the supply type. In such a
situation the protection:
 is set out of service (so it does no execute the protection functions or the logicals. It does neither execute the
commands that cause the relay activation)
 generates hardware error and low supply signals
 marks as invalid the logic signals and digital inputs.
 it does execute the commands such as function locking/unlocking, table changing etc.

OTHER FUNCTIONS 
8.6 EXTERNAL SUPPLY SUPERVISION

132B
This function checks that the external power supply voltage is within the set margin. It generates two signals:
 Power supply higher than the maximum threshold. If the supply voltage exceeds the set maximum threshold.
 Power supply lower than the minimum threshold. If the supply voltage is lower than the set maximum threshold.
The settings for this function are the following ones:
Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks

Enable YES/NO
Minimum threshold (V) 20 220 1
Maximum threshold (V) 24 280 1
8.7 TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION

13B
This function checks that the unit temperature d is within the set margin. It generates two signals:
 Temperature higher than the maximum threshold. If the temperature exceeds the set maximum threshold.
 Temperature lower than the minimum threshold. If the temperature is lower than the set maximum threshold.
The settings for this function the following ones:
Setting Minimum Maximum Step Remarks

Enable YES/NO
Minimum threshold (º) -40 0 1
Maximum threshold (º) 50 100 1
8.8 TEST MODE

134B
In order to carry out this test, the Procome signal and order simulator program will have to be executed and when executing it,
and Procome counters can be simulated.
Digital signals: when the test mode starts, the signals sent to telecommand and to the simulator are real. Through this
program the digital signal values can be changed, while being in Test Mode only these factitious changes will be sent to
Telecommand, and not the real changes in these signals. When leaving the test mode, the unit sends all the changes between
the last state of the factitious digital signals and real signals of the unit to the Telecommand.
Orders: Being the unit in Test Mode, when it receives orders from the Telecommand, it does not execute them, but it sends
them to the simulator program, which has to recognise them.
Measurements and counters: when entering in Test Mode, the measurements and counters sent to telecommand and to the
simulator are the last real ones. This value is frozen and it can be only changed through the simulator program. When leaving
the test mode, the unit sends all the real measurements and counters to the Telecommand.
When leaving the simulator program, the unit leaves the Test Mode and the unit descriptive text can be seen in the display.

OPERATION MODE 
9. OPERATION MODE
9.1 THROUGH KEYBOARD/DISPLAY

135B
9.1.1 Introduction
270B
The purpose of the keyboard/display is the local introduction to the unit of settings and commands, through push-buttons,
and the view of settings, measures and faults through display.
9.1.2 Elements of the keyboard /display unit

271B
9.1.2.1 Normal push-buttons
They are 15, signalized as , INTRO, ESC. (dot) and the numbers from 0 to 9.
9.1.2.2 Push- "

It is the only push-button accessible with the protection cover on.
By successive pushing the following information starts to appear
 Digital inputs status

 Phase A current (primary A)
 Phase B current
 Phase C current
 VAB voltage (primary kV)
 VBC voltage
 VCA voltage
 Active power (MW)
 Reactive power (MVAR)
 Power factor
 Information on the last fault
 Phases involved
 Fault current in phase A
 Fault current in phase B
 Fault current in phase C
 Fault current in neutral
 Fault start date and time
 Fault end date and time
 Fault acknowledgement (press 2 sec. and release). Turn the tripping LEDs off.

OPERATION MODE 
9.1.2.3 Push-button R
was pressed (given that the setting "Recloser enable" corresponding to the active chart is set to "YES"). If the recloser
was out of service the R key pressing followed by Intro enables it and disables it if it was already enabled.
 Display
 It is alphanumerical, liquid crystal type and has 2 rows of 16 columns each.
 LEDs
 They are 8, which can be programmed to show some of the statuses indicated in the section
"Programming of LEDs".
9.1.2.4 Display
It is alphanumerical, liquid crystal type and has 2 rows of 16 columns each.
9.1.2.5 LEDs
They are 8, which can be programmed to show some of the statuses indicated in the section "Programming of LEDs.
9.1.3 Operating mode

27B

-
element of the immediately precedent level.
the last position, the first will return again.
Generally, when a menu is run, the first line of the display shows the active function, which can be entered by
pressing INTRO, and in this way we can reach the next menu level (if there is any), specific for that function.
The menu tree to visualize or change settings within each group is hierarchical. If at resting status (title) we press
INTRO, we will reach the first element of the following menu:
SEE TIME
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
INPUTS
MEASUREMENTS
STATISTICAL DATA
LAST FAULTS
SEE SETTINGS
CHANGE SETTINGS
The complete hierarchy of menus and submenus is pictured in the Appendix I.

OPERATION MODE 
9.1.3.2 Using the keyboard/display

9.1.3.2.1 See settings and magnitudes
menus are circular.
state does not change.
reached the actual status.
In the final menus, which are the ones with no submenus (settings), the group setting name, selected by
keyboard, appears on the first line and on the second line its current value.
9.1.3.2.2 Change settings

Up to the last level of the menus everything works in the same way as by See settings and magnitudes (same
functions for same keys).
To access to this function it is necessary to press the key " ". Through this all settings and initializations
are made accessible, except the ones contained in the section "Protection definition". The key " " is
necessary to get access to these.
In the last level of the menus, where the name of the settings we want to change appear, the keyboard
operation is different from the one we have explained until now.
When entering into each group to change the settings which are included (final menu), the keyboard operation
will be as it follows:
1) Numerical settings. The first line of the display shows the name of the selected setting followed by its
current value. The line 2 shows the text NEW followed by the current setting range, which can be changed by
using the numerical keyboard.
To change the setting range we use the numerical keyboard, along with the DOT. The new range has to be
literally entered, this means that if we wish to enter the new value of 3.2, the key 3 will have to be pressed,
setting, a warning message will be shown on the line 2 indicating INVALID VALUE. A valid value will have to be
entered to be able t
within the final menu takes us to the menu element which we came from, without making effective the changes
we have made until the moment of pressing.
The changes are m
e menu above (see menus chart). By pressing
2) Non numerical settings. There are settings such as the enabling settings,where it must be chosen between
YES or NO, ON and OFF. There are also calendar masks which can be enabled every other day, there are time
delayed curves with a certain name, inputs and outputs configurations etc. where is more clear to select them
by their name rather than by introducing their numerical value.
Whenever possible and clear, on the line 1 the name of the setting will appear along with a text indicating the
actual value. On the second line it will gradually appear the possible values to choose for this setting, if we use
the keyboard properly. We use
of each of them; we do it this way because there are many configurations to choose from and this makes it
quicker.
validate the value chosen on the line 2. This means, in groups with an only element, the validate option,
present in the different groups with more than one element, will not appear. In these cases, there is no need to

OPERATION MODE 
change.
In the case of
input/output/led i to configuring input/outputs/led i+1. The same occurs with the inputs mask and the calendar
mask which runs trough the days of the week by each pr
actual status.
Initializations and special settings.
Within the first submenu of "Change settings" we find the option: "INITIALIZE COUNT, MAXIM, kI2" which
requires a particular explanation.
By pressing "INTRO" in "INITIALIZE" we come to:
g counters and the trip counters are

set to 0, and it goes on to the next question; if we do not want to set them to 0 we press " " or "ESC".
"MAXIMETER=0?" if pressing INTRO the maximeter is set to 0.
"SUM KI2=INIT?" if pressing INTRO the accumulator takes the setting value corresponding to the table
indicated by the active table.
"RESET QUEUES?"; if pressing "INTRO" all queues of events, faults, historic and oscillograph data records.
Change of active table.

In the first level of "CHANGE SETTINGS", pressing "INTRO" when by "ACTIVATE TABLE" appears "TABLE 1";
with the arrows and and "TABLE 4". When the aimed one is
reached, press "INTRO" to activate it.
Display view of the last 10 faults

When entering the LAST FAULTS menu there are 10 submenus with the following text:
FAULT No N
DATA TIME
Fault 1 is the newest and 10 the oldest.
Entering any of them by pushing INTRO the corresponding fault data can be seen.
When entering fault 1 the fault can be recognized (switch off leds, etc). But not in the rest of the faults.
When pushing ESC you can go back to the previous level.
Display view of the last fault

When a trip occurs, the fault report start appears on the display. So if pushing INTRO you can dispose all the
data.
If the fault is recognized or ESC is pushed you go to the first screen with the relay description.

OPERATION MODE 
9.2 THROUGH THE PC

136B
The protection relays PL300 can be monitored by PC. In this way, it is possible to have access to a view of the system
measures and settings and their programming.
The PC program, Protection console developed by Ingeteam Power Technology SA is named SIPCON/P.

RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS 
10. RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS
10.1 RECEPTION AND STORAGE

137B
The protections are supplied in special packing material for transport.
Upon reception, they should be checked for any signs of external damage caused during transport; if so the transport firm and
manufacturer should be contacted.
The material received should also be checked to see if it coincides with the order number.
If the protection is not going to be used immediately, it should be stored in its original packaging and in a dry and dirt free
place.
The units transport must be made in its original packaging.
10.2 CONNECTING PROCEDURE

138B
The protection connecting procedure should be carried out in accordance with the enclosed external connection diagram. It is
a general diagram; the programming of inputs and outputs should be taken into consideration in each specific case.
Power supply
The polarity is indifferent.
Earth connection
It is important for the earth connection to be correctly connected, in order for the protection disturbance rejection devices it
incorporates to operate properly. The connection should be as short as possible (less than 25 cm.) using multiwired cable
with a 4 mm2 cross-section.
RS232 cable connections to be used between the PC and the PL300 unit
 Case 1: a 25 pin PC output connector
PL300 side PC side
male 9 pin socket female 25 pin socket
RxD 2 2 TxD
TxD 3 3 RxD
GND 5 7 GND
DSR 6 20 DTR
RTS 7 8 CD
CTS 8 5 CTS
CD 1 4 RTS
DTR 4 6 DSR

RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS 
 Case 2: a 9 pin PC output connector
PL300 side PC side
male 9 pin socket female 9 pin socket
RxD 2 3 TxD
TxD 3 2 RxD
GND 5 5 GND
DSR 6 4 DTR
RTS 7 1 CD
CTS 8 8 CTS
CD 1 7 RTS
DTR 4 6 DSR
10.3 UNIT ADDRESSING

139B
10.4 COMMISSIONING
140B
The PL300 protections are received with the default settings stipulated in the factory.
Before commissioning they must be set, by means of the keyboard/display and/or PC, with the correct values for the
application, following the setting procedures.
The protection has been checked at the factory in order to guarantee its accuracy in all of the setting points of the different
parameters. However, it is convenient to test some points during reception and commissioning, in order to ensure it is totally
in proper operating condition.
Once the line is connected the real measurements the relay is carrying out can be displayed, thus enabling you to check for
proper connection and operation.

KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPENDIX I. KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY

In the following pages we enclose a table which graphically illustrates and shows the easy handling of the different menus and
settings which can be changed with the keyboard/display. We recommend this appendix be at hand when you start to use the
keyboard, in order to easily find the settings to be changed.
The structure is generic for the whole family of PL300, it means, it does not correspond to a certain model. In each model the
settings and measurements corresponding to its available functions will only appear.
DATE/TIME (see) Units date and time are displayed.
SEE ACTIVE TABLE Present active table
INPUTS INPUTS STATUS Status of inputs 1 to 3
(4 to 9) Status of inputs 4 to 9
(10 to 15) Status of inputs 10 to 15
(16, 17) Status of inputs 16 and 17
MEASUREMENTS See page 4
STATISTICAL DATA See page 5
LAST FAULT See page 5
SETPOINTS (see) See page 7
SETPOINTS (change) See page 27
MEASUREMENTS SECONDARY MEAS. CURRENTS PHASE A CUR. (A) Phase A current.
PHASE B CUR.(A) Phase B current
PHASE C CUR.(A) Phase C current
GND CUR. (A) Ground current
SENS. NEU. CUR.(A) Sensitive ground current
ISOL. GND CUR.(A) Ground isolated current
SHIFT VOLT-CURR Shift between V0 and I0 in the isolated ground
REVERSE COMP. (A) Ground polarization current
VOLTAGES VA VOLTAGE (V) Phase A voltage
VB VOLTAGE (V) Phase B voltage
VC VOLTAGE (V) Phase C voltage
VN VOLTAGE (V) Ground voltage

SYNCHRO. V B Phase voltage for syncrocheck (Transf.T9)
REVERSE COMP (%) % of the reverse component (I2/I1)
FREQUENCY FREQ. (HZ) Frequency measurement.
SYNCHRO.FRQ.(HZ) B Phase frequency for syncrocheck (Transf.T9)
SYNCROCHECK V1 (V) --- V2(V) Voltages in both sides of the breaker
F1 (HZ) --- F2 (HZ) Frequencies in both sides of the breaker

ANGLE DIFFERENCE Angle difference in both sides of the breaker
MAXIMETER CURRENT (A) Maximum average current in an interval t
PRIMARY MEAS. CURRENTS PHASE A CUR.(A) Phase A current.
PHASE B CUR.(A) Phase B current.
PHASE C CUR.(A) Phase C current.
GND CUR.(A) Ground current.
SENS. NEU CUR.(A) Sensitive ground current
ISOL.GND CUR(A) Isolated ground current
VOLTAGES VA VOLTAGE (KV) Phase A voltage
VB VOLTAGE(KV) Phase B voltage
VC VOLTAGE (KV) Phase C voltage
AVERAGE VOLTAGE (KV) Average voltage of three phases
V.COMP. VAB (KV) Compound voltage between phases A and B

Compound
V.COMP. VBC (KV) Compound voltage between phases _B and C
V.COMP. VCA (KV) Compound voltage between phases _C and A
V.COMP AVERAGE (KV) Average compound voltage of three phases
GRND VOLT. (KV) Ground voltage
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY (HZ)

MEASUREMENTS PRIMARY MEAS. POWER ACTIVE PWER (MW) Active power
REACTIV P.(MVAR) Reactive power
APPARENT POW. (MVA) Apparent power
POWER FACTOR Power factor (Average Cosine)
ACT POWER A (MW) Phase A active power
ACT POWER B (MW) Phase B active power
ACT POWER C (MW) Phase C active power
REACT P A (MVAR) Phase A reactive power
REACT P B (MVAR) Phase B reactive power
REACT P C.(MVAR) Phase C reactive power
ENERGY ACT ENER+ (Imp) Positive active energy
ACT ENER-(Imp) Negative active energy
REACT ENER + (Imp) Positive reactive energy
REACT ENER-(Imp) Negative reactive energy
DISTORTION CURR DISTORT. DISTORTION IA (%) IA current distortion
DISTORTION IB (%) IB current distortion
DISTORTION IC (%) IC current distortion
VOLTAGE DISTORT. DISTORTION VA (%) VA voltage distortion
DISTORTION VB (%) VB voltage distortion
DISTORTION VC (%) VC voltage distortion
MAXIMETERS CURRENT (A) Maximum of the interval average current
ACTI POWER (MW) Maximum of the three-phase active power
REACT POW(MVAR) Maximum of the three-phase active power
ACT POW A (MW) Maximum of phase A active power
ACT POW B (MW) Maximum of phase B active power
ACT POW C (MW) Maximum of phase C active power
REACT POW A (MVAR) Maximum of phase A reactive power
REACT POW B.(MVAR) Maximum of phase B reactive power
REACT POW C.(MVAR) Maximum of phase C reactive power
TEMPERATURE (ºC) TEMP. (ºC) Unit temperature
STATISTICAL DATA TOTAL RECLOSURES Total number of reclosures.
FIRST RECLOSURES Number of first reclosures.
SECOND RECLOS. Number of second reclosures.
THIRD RECLOS. Number of third reclosures.
FOURTH RECLOS. Number of fourth reclosures.
TOTAL OPENINGS Total number of trips given by the protection.
SIGMA K12 PHASE A KI2 sum for maintenance, phase A
SIGMA K12 PHASE B KI2 sum for maintenance, phase B
SIGMA K12 PHASE C KI2 sum for maintenance, phase C
START COUNTER Counter of the unit picks up
TEMPERATU Acknow Set the thermal image at 0
LAST FAULTS FAULT N. LAST FAU.PH. Phase/s involved in the last fault.
FAULT CUR. PH. A Phase A current when the fault occurred (S).
FAULT CUR. PH. B Phase B current when the fault occurred (S).
FAULT CUR. PH. C. Phase C current when the fault occurred (S).).
FAULT CURR.GND. Ground current when the fault occurred (S).
FAU. CURR. SENS. N. Sensitive ground current when the fault occurred (S).
FAU. CURR. ISO.N Isolated ground current when the fault occurred (S).
FAULT V/I SHIFT Shift between V0 and I0 in the isolated ground, in the fault
FAULT VOLT. PH. A Phase A voltage when the fault occurred (S).
FAULT VOLT. PH. B Phase B voltage when the fault occurred (S).
FAULT VOLT PH. C Phase C voltage when the fault occurred (S).
FAULT VOLT. GND. Ground voltage when the fault occurred (S).
FAULT DISTANCE (When there is fault locator)
START DATE/TIME. Fault start date and time.
END DATE/TIME Fault end date and time.

LED Reset Fault acknowledgement to switch off the Led.
SETPOINTS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION CURRENT PROT. PHASE TOC ENABLE Phase timing
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
ACCELERATION ENABLE
BLOCKING CONDIT.
GND TOC ENABLE Ground timing
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING. COND
SENSITIVE GND. TOC ENABLE Sensitive ground timing
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING. COND
PHASE IOC ENABLE Phases instantaneous (low level)
PICK UP
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
ENABLE SPECIAL FUNCTION
SPECIAL FIXED TIME
SPECIAL FUNC. TIME
LOCKING. COND
GND IOC ENABLE Ground instantaneous (low level)
PICKUP
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
SPECIAL FIXED TIME
SPECIAL FUNC. TIME
LOCKING. COND
SENSITIVE GND. IOC ENABLE Sensitive ground instantaneous
PICKUP
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
SPECIAL FIXED TIME
SPECIAL FUNC. TIME
LOCKING. COND
IOC HIGH 1 PHASE IOC HIGH 1 ENABLE
PICKUP
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.
GND IOC HIGH 1 ENABLE
PICKUP
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.
PHASES TOC,HIGH2 ENABLE TOC 2nd group of settings/timed phases
PICK UP

CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
SETPOINTS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION CURRENT PROT. UNDERC. 2 LEVELS ENABLE
PICK UP LEVEL 1
FIXED T. LEVEL 1
PICK UP LEVEL 2
FIXED T. LEVEL 2
BLOCKING CONDIT.
PHASES TOC,HIGH2 TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING. COND
GROUND TOC, HIGH2 ENABLE TOC 2nd group of settings/timed ground
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING. COND
GROUND TYPE Trafo/Calculated
SENS NEU DIR./N SENSITIVE GND SENS. N. DIR.TYPE

P.MINIMUM
ANGLE
I.MINIMUM
GROUND GND. DIR.TYPE
P.MINIMUM
GND. ANG.
I.MINIMUM
ANGLE GND DIREC. CRIT.
NEU. AMPLIT.
VN MINIMUM THESHOLD VN THRESHOLD
SENS N.DIR PROT. SENS. N. DIR TYPE See sen. n. directional type.
MINIMUM POWER See sens n direct. min power.(wat)
CHARACT. ANGLE See sens n direct charact. angle
MINIMUM CURRENT See sens n direct. min cur(cos/sen)
CURR. UNBAL. TOC ENABLE Current unbalance instantaneous
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING COND.
CURR. UNBAL. IOC ENABLE Current unbalance instantaneous
PICKUP
TIME INDEX
LOCKING CONDIT
BROKEN CONDUCTOR ENABLE Broken conductor
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING COND.
ISOLATED GROUND ENABLE ISOL GRND Isolated ground
TORQUE CONTROL
LOW CURRENT
HIGH CURRENT
LOW VOLTAGE
HIGH VOLTAGE
TIME 1st TRIP
SWITCH TO INST.
LOCKING COND.
PHASES IOC,ZONE2 ENABLE INSTANTAN Teleprotection. Zone 2. Phases
PICK UP INST.
FIXED TIME
PHASES IOC,ZONE3 ENABLE INSTANTAN Teleprotection. Zone 3. Phases

PICK UP INST.
FIXED TIME
GROUND IOC,ZONE2 ENABLE INSTANTAN Teleprotection. Zone 2. Ground
PICK UP INST.
FIXED TIME
GROUND IOC,ZONE3 ENABLE INSTANTAN Teleprotection. Zone 3. Ground
PICK UP INST.
FIXED TIME
CANCEL. TOC CANCEL PHASE TIMING Cancel timing
CANCEL GND TIMING
CANCEL UNBALANCE TIMING
GND.TOC.LIMITAT. LIMIT CURRENT See ground limit current
TOC BLOCK.
PHS.TOC.LIMITAT. TOC BLOCK.

2ND 2ND HARMON..PH.
HARMON.RESTRAINT
2ND HARMON.GND
THRESHOLD I2f / If (%)

PHASE MIN. CUR.
GND. MIN. CUR.
ISOLATED GROUND ENABLE ISOL GRND Isolated ground
PROTE.FNC.BLQ.MC MODULE ENABLE Manual closing prot. funct locking
MODULE CONST (it can be only used in EH3211)
ANGLE ENABLE
ANGLE (DGR)
FIELD LOSS FIELD GENERALS ENABLE
.MIN VOT. PICKUP
DIRECT. ANGLE
LOCKING CONDITION
MHO 1 ZONE OFFSET (OHM)
DIAMETER (OHM)
UNDERVOLT. SURVEIL.
ALARM TIMING
TRIP TIMING
DIAMETER (OHM)
UNDERVOLT. SURVEIL.
ALARM TIMING
TRIP TIMING
VOLTAGE PROT. OVERVOLTAGE TOV ENABLE Time overvoltage
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
LOCKING COND.
OVERVOLTAGE IOV ENABLE INSTANTAN Instantaneous overvoltage
PICK UP INST.
FIXED TIME
LOCKING COND.
UNDERVOLTAGE TUV ENABLE TIME PROT Time undervoltage
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
LOCKING COND.
UNDERVOLTAGE IUV ENABLE Instantaneous undervoltage
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING. COND

GND VOLTAGE ENABLE Ground overvoltage
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP
FIXED TIME
LOCKING COND.
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE ENABLE Voltage unbalance
TIMED PICKUP
TIMED.VOLT.UNBAL.
SETPOINTS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION VOLTAGE PROT. VOLTAGE UNBALANCE LOCKING COND.
PHASE VOLT. REVERS. ENABLE Reverse of phases voltages
TEMP.NEGAT.SEQU.
LOCKING. COND
POWER PROTECTION POWER NOMINAL INST. 5A/1A
MINIMUM. POWER ENABLE Minimum power
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
MAX. POW. HI-SET ENABLE Maximum power, high level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
MAX. POW. LO-SET ENABLE Maximum power, low level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
REV. POW. HI-SET ENABLE Active power reverse high level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
REV. POW. LO-SET ENABLE Active power reverse low level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
REAC.REV.POW.HI ENABLE Reactive power rev. high level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
REAC.REV.POW.LOW ENABLE Reactive power rev. low level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
UNDER APPARENT ENABLE Minimum apparent power
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
OVER APPARENT HI ENABLE Maximum apparent power high level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
OVER APPARENT LO ENABLE Minimum apparent power low level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING. COND
FREQUENCY PROT. HIGH/LOW FREQUEN STEP FREQUENCE 1 ENABLE FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY (Hz)
TRIP TIME

FREQUENCY TYPE
STEP FREQUENCE 2 ENABLE FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY (Hz)
TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY (Hz)
TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY (Hz)
SETPOINTS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION FREQUENCY PROT. HIGH/LOW FREQUEN STEP FREQUENCE 4 TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY (Hz)
STEP FREQUENCE 5 TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
LOCKING COND.
MIN.VOLTAGE SPV. MIN.VOLTAGE SPV. Minimum voltage supervision
PICKUP CYCLES No.
P.CYCL. DF/DT No.
FREQUENCY GRAD. ENABL.GRAD.(d81)
SPV.MIN.CURRENT
SPV.FREQ. STEP 1
FREQ.GRAD.STEP 1
FIXED TIM.STEP 1
TPO. FIJO ESC. 1
SPV.FREQ. STEP 2
FREQ.GRAD.STEP 2
FIXED TIM.STEP 2
SPV.FREQ. STEP 3
FREQ. DIFF STEP 3
FIXED TIM. STEP 3
SPV.FREQ. STEP 4
FREQ. DIFF STEP 4
FIXED TIM. STEP 4
LOCKING CONDITION
SETPOINTS (see) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION SYNCROCHECK ENAB. SYNCROCHECK
UNDERVOLT CONDIT NO A and NO in B Undervoltage conditions
NO A and YES in B
YES A and NO in B
ENAB.VOLTAGE DIF
ENAB.ANGLE DIF
ENAB.FREQUEN DIF
PICKUP VOLT DIF
PICKUP ANGLE DIF
PICKUP FREQU DIF
MINIM. VOLTAGE A
MINIM. VOLTAGE B
CLOSE COND. TIME
LOCKING COND.
THERMAL IMAGE THERM.IMAG.PARAM ENABLE
HEATING CONSTANT
REFRIG. CONSTANT
ALARM THRESHOLD
REPOSITION THRESHOLD
LOCKING COND.
PICKUP CURRENT

SEE SEETINGS SEE TABLE 1 RECLOSER RECLOSER. IS/OOS RECL. IN SERVICE Recloser in service/out of service.
RECLOSER TIME T. RECL. 1,PHASE 1st closure time for phase to phase faults.
T. RECL 1, GROUND 1st closure time for phase to earth faults.
T. RECL 2,PHASE 2nd closure time for phase to phase faults.
T. RECL 2,GROUND 2nd closure time for phase to earth faults.
T. RECL 3,PHASE 3rd closure time for phase to phase faults.
T. RECL 3,GROUND 3rd closure time for phase to earth faults.
T. RECL 4,PHASE 4th closure time for phase to phase faults.
T. RECL 4,GROUND 4th closure time for phase to earth faults.
VARIOUS TIMES Vref WAITING TIME Voltage reference waiting time.
T.SEC. FAULTS Reclaim time for faults.
T.SEC.FAULTS GND Reclaim time for GND.
T.SEC. MAN CLOSING Security time after manual closing.
CYCLE CONTROL N OF CLOSURES No. of closures allowed.
TRIP PERMISSION DURING STANDBY Trips allowed during the standby
AFTER CLOSURE 1 Trips allowed after first reclosure.
AFTER CLOSURE 2 Trips allowed after second reclosure.
AFTER CLOSURE 3 Trips allowed after third reclosure.
AFTER CLOSURE 4 Trips allowed after fourth reclosure.
AFTER MAN. CLOS. Trips allowed after manual closure.
RECLOSING PERMISS. AFTER PHASE TIMED Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase toc.
AFTER NEUTR. TIMED Allowed reclosures after tripping due to ground toc.
AFTER SEN. NEU. TIM Allowed reclosures after tripping due to sensitive neutral toc.
AFTER PHASE INST. Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase ioc
AFTER PHASE INST. Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase ioc
AFTER GND. INST. Allowed reclosures after tripping due to ground ioc.
AFTER ISOL. GND Allowed reclosures after tripping due to isolated ground
AFTER BROKEN COND Allowed reclosures after tripping due to broken conductor
AFTER EXT. ACT. Allowed reclosures after external operation
AFTER PHAS H1 INST Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase high 1 instantaneous
AFTER PHAS H2 INST Allowed reclosures after tripping due to phase high 2 instantaneous
AFTER PHAS H2 TIM Allowed reclosures after tripping. due to phase high 2 timing.
AFTER GND H1 INST Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 1 ground instantaneous.
AFTER GND H2 INST Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 2ground instantaneous.
AFTER GND H2 TIM Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 2ground timing
AFTER SEN GND H2 INST Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 2 sensitive neutral instantaneous.
AFTER SEN GND H2 TIM Allowed reclosures after tripping due to high 2 sensitive neutral timing.
RECLOS.SEQ.COORD.COOR ENABLE Sequence coordination
RECL.BLOCK.COND.
FREQUENCY RECLOS ENABLE RECLOSER Reclose after under frequency pickup
MIN. FREQ. COND.
RECLOSE TIME
SECURITY TIME
LOCKING COND.
BREAKER MONITOR. EXC.NUM. OF TRIPS. Excessive number of trips.
EXC.NUM.TRIPS WIND Time for counting excessive number of trips
KI2 SUM ALARM KI2 sum alarm for maintenance.
KI2 SUM INIT. Initial KI2 sum(settings).
TRIP CIRC. MONIT. EN. Trip circuit monitoring enable.
CLOSE CIRC. MONIT. EN Close circuit monitoring enable.
CALACULATION TYPE See calculation type of ki2 sum
WAITING TIME See waiting time after trip
HISTORICAL AVERAGE WINDOW Time window for sample average calculation
RECORD INTERVAL Historical record interval.
CALENDAR MASK Calendar mask for the days of the week
START TIME Daily record start time.
END TIME Daily record end time.
OPERATION LOGIC TRIP LOCKING Trip locking.
OPEN FAILURE TIMING Open failure timing.

SEE SEETINGS SEE TABLE 1 OPERATION LOGIC CLOSE FAILURE TIMING Close failure timing.
SEE TABLE 2 SAME AS TABLE 1
SETPOINTS (see) SEE TABLE 0 CONFIGURAT I/O. CONFIG. INPUTS INPUTS1-INPUTS17 Configuration of the 17 inputs.
NO/NC SELECTION
INPUTS ACTIV. TIME Filter of inputs
LOGICAL SIGNALS Program logical signals as inputs
LOG. SIGNALS NO/NC
FLICKER SETTING C.ACTIV.FLICKER
C.REMOVE FLICKER
T.CHECK.FLICKER
OUTPUTS OUTPUT 1-OUTPUT 14 Configuration of the 14 outputs. (Function and type of output)
OUTPUT ACTIV. TIME OUTPUTS ACTIV. TIME
LEDs LED 1 to LED 8 Configuration of the 8 programmable leds.(Function and type)
GENERALS RELAY IN SERVICE Relay in service.
BREAKER NUM. Breaker number.
TRANSF. RATIO PHASE TRANSF. RATIO Phase current transformation ratio
GND. TRANSF. RATIO Ground current transformation ratio.
SENS NEU TR. RATIO Sensitive ground transformation ratio
VOLT. TRANSF. RATIO Voltage transf. Ratio
VOLT. DETECTION PRESENCE Rated Ph-Ph V Voltage presence (only CR type)
NO-DET.THRES
DETEC.THRESH
SLACK SPRINGS STRETCH TIME Spring slacks (only CR type )
RATED VOLTAGE Simple rated voltage
VOLTAGE INPUT VOLTAGE TYPE Simple / Compound
VOLT.MEASUR. Phases in which are measured
IRIG-B FORMAT B002 (without year) / B002 IEEE 1344 (with year)
SIDE A VOLT SYNC Side A phase for synchronism
COMMUNIC. CONFIG. COM2 COMMUN. SELECT Procome, DNP, MODBUS,101
PORT COM1 LCU ADDRESS Protections address.
BAUD RATE Baud rate (bauds).
PARITY Parity (even) yes or no.
STOP ITS Number of stop bits.
CONTROL SIGNALS None/RTS
PORT COM2 LCU ADDRESS
(If Procome) BAUD RATE Baud rate (bauds).
STOP BITS Number of stop bits.
CONTROL SIGNALS None / RTS
PORT COM2 LCU ADDRESS LCU address for DNP communications
(If DNP) MASTER ADDRESS Master address for DNP communications
BAUD RATE Baud rate for DNP communications
TYPE OF PARITY Parity for DNP communications
STOP ITS Stop bits for DNP communications
FIXED RTS YES/NO
RTS AND CTS CTRL RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec) CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARR. WAIT. TIM.(csec) CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
STABIL TIME . (csec) Stabilization time for DNP communications
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec) Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
SYNCHRO. TIME. (min) Synchronization time for DNP communications
LINK ACK. Link acknowledge for DNP communications
AP. MESS BYTE N. N. bytes of application messages for DNP
T.CHANGES Changes sending time for DNP communications
T.FROZEN Counter freezing time for DNP

STATUS SEND Status sending for DNP communications
MEAS. BITS NUM. Measurements format for DNP communications
COUNT. BITS NUM. Counter format for DNP communications
NON REQUEST. MESS. Non requested message sending for DNP
PREV.CONFLICT Conflict prev. for DNP communications
SETPOINTS (see) SEE TABLE 0 COMMUNIC. CONFIG. PORT COM2 FIXED COL. TIME (csec) Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
(If DNP) VBLE. COL. TIME (csec) Variable conflict time for DNP
T.RESEND Non requested messages resend time for DNP
N.MAX.NO REQUEST. Max. non requested messages number for DNP
SPECIAL Special for DNP communications
MEASURES FORMAT Counts/value in the secondary/value inI the primary
SETPOINTS (SEE) SEE TABLE 0 COMMUNIC. SETTINGS PORT COM2 LCU ADDRESS LCU address
(If MODBUS) BAUD RATE Baud rate
PARITY YES/NO Parity
RTS ACT. WAIT. TIME Waiting time for RTS activation
CARRIER WAIT. TIME Carrier waiting time
RTS DEACT. WAIT. T. RTS deactivation waiting time
MEASUREM. FORMAT Counts / value in the secondary / value in the primary
PORT COM2 GENERALS LINK ADDRESS
(If 101) APPLIC. ADDRESS
SWING
BAUD RATE
CHANNEL TYPE
RTS AND CTS
PARITY
STOP BITS
CTS ACT. WAIT. TIME
CARRIER WAIT. TIME
RTS ACTIV TIME
RTS DEACTIV TIME
ANSWER WAITING TIME
TME BETWEEN TX
RETRANS. NUMBER
ASDU FIELDS APPLIC. ADDRE. LENGTH
CAA LENGTH
COT LENGTH
IOA LENGTH
FORMATS TIME FORMAT
MEASUREMENT TIMING
COUNTER TIMING
ADDRESSES SP ADDRESS
EV ADDRESS
DP ADDRESS
AVERAGEADDRESS
TAP ADDRESS
CON ADDRESS
BIT ADDRESS
OC ADDRESS
OC0 ADDRESS
OC1 ADDRESS
OC2 ADDRESS
TORQUE ADDRESS
FULL ADDRESS
HALF-FULL ADDRESS
GPS ADDRESS
SYNCHR. ADDRESS
OTHER PARAMETERS % FULL
% EMPTY

WORD EVENTS
COOMAND MODE
COMMAND INFORM.
FREEZE
AVER. TORQUE ADDRESS
META. PROFILE
GPS
SETPOINTS (SEE) SEE TABLE 0 COMMUNIC. SETTINGS PORT COM2 OTHER PARAMETERS TRANSMIS. FACTOR
(If 101) ASDU SIZE
BIT SQ
PORT COM2 LCU ADDRESS LCU address
(If 103) BAUD RATE Baud rate
PARITY Parity
STOP BITS Number of stop bits
(If 103) CARRIER WAIT. TIME Carrier waiting time
SENDING FORMAT Compatible with VDEW/Extended
TCP/IP COM. SELEC NO / PROCOME HORIZONTAL COMMUNIC.
PROTECTIONS VOLTAGE CTRL. (51V) CTRL. PARAM. (51V) ENABLE Control parameters for 51V
VOLTAGE CONTROL
LOCKING CONDITION
PHASE TIMED(51V) PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
VOLTAGE CTRL (50V) CTRL. PARAM. (50V) ENABLE Control parameters for 50V
VOLTAGE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.
PHASE INST. (50V) PICK UP INSTANTAN
INST. TIMING
FUSE FAILURE ENABLE Fuse failure
FUSE F.TRIP.TIME
LOCKING COND.
COLD LOAD PICKUP PHASE TIMED ENABLE Cold Load Pickup
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING CONDITION
GND TIMED ENABLE
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING CONDITION
PHASE INSTANT. ENABLE
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING CONDITION

SETPOINTS (SEE) SEE TABLE 0 PROTECTIONS COLD LOAD PICKUP GND INSTANT. ENABLE Cold Load Pickup
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING CONDITION
SEN. NEUTR. TIME ENABLE
PICK UP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
LOCKING COND.
SEN. GND INST ENABLE
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING COND.
COLD LOAD PICKUP ENABLE
COLD LOAD DET. TIME
COLD LOAD .ACT. TIM.
HIGH CURR. LOCKOUT PHAS. HIGH CURRENT ENABLE High current locking
PICKUP
DEFINITE TIME
TRIP NUMBER
LOCKING COND.
NEU. HIGH CURRENT ENABLE
PICKUP
DEFINITE TIME
TRIP NUMBER
LOCKING COND.
REGULATOR BLOCK. ENAB.REGULA.BLCK Regulator locking
REGULA.THRESHOLD
LOCKING COND.
DEFINE PROTECT LANGUAGE TYPE Spanish / English
FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz
PHASE ORDER A-B-C / C-B-A
GND PARAMETER V0 calculated /V0 by transf. (measur.)
BUTTONS/LEDS ENABLE BUTTONS FUNCT/ COMMAND/ NO Enable command pusbuttons
EN.BLOC.CTRL YES/NO (lock/unlock) Enable locking commands by communicat.
BLOCK R KEY YES/NO (lock/unlock))
BLOCK LEDS YES/NO (lock/unlock)
POW.SUPPLY SUPERVI. YES/NO Agony level
TEMPERAT SUPERV. ENABLE YES/NO
MIN.ALARM. THRESH.
MAX.ALARM. THRESH.
EXTERNAL SUPPLY SUP. ENABLE YES/NO
MIN. ALARM. THRESH.
MAX. ALARM. THRESH.

SETPOINTS (change) CHANGE DATE/TIME
Insert KEY ACTIVATE TABLE ACTIVATE TABLE 1 Make table 1 active.
ACTIVATE TABLE 2 Make table 2 active.
PROG. TABLE 1 PROG. PROTECTION CURRENT PROT. PROG. PHASE TIMED ENABLE
PICKUP.
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
ACCEL. ENABLE
LOCKING COND.
PROG.GND TIM. ENABLE.
PICKUP.
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND
PROG. SENS. NEU. TIM ENABLE.
PICKUP.
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND
PROG. PHASE INST. INST. ENAB.
PICKUP
DEFINITE TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
ENA. SPECIAL FUNCTION
SPECIAL DEFINITE TIME
SPECIAL TIME FUNCTION
LOCKING COND
PROG. GND INST. ENABLE.
INST. PICKUP
DEFINITE TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND
PROG.SENS GND IOC ENABLE.
INST. PICKUP
DEFINITE TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND
HIGH 1 INST. HIGH 1 PHASE INST. ENABLE HIGH 1
PICKUP HIGH 1
FIXED TIME HIGH1
TORQUE CONTROL
HIGH 1 PHASE LOCKING
HIGH 1 GND INST. ENABLE HIGH 1

PICKUP HIGH 1
FIXED TIME HIGH1
SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 1 PROG. PROTECTION CURRENT PROT. UNDERC. 2 LEVELS ENABLE
PICK UP L1
FIXED T. L1
PICK UP L2
FIXED T. L2
BLOCKING CONDIT.
HIGH 1 INST. HIGH 1 GND INST. TORQUE CONTROL
HIGH 1 GND LOCKING

PHASES TOC, HIGH2 ENABLE TIME PROT
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.
GROUND TOC, HIGH2 ENABLE TIME PROT
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.

SENS.G.TOC,HIGH2 ENABLE TIME PROT
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
TEMP.TIEMPO FIJO
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.
INST. PHASES HIGH2 INST. ENAB.
PICKUP
DEFINITE TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.
GROUND IOC,HIGH2 ENABLE INSTANTAN
PICK UP INST.
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.
SENS.G.IOC,HIGH2 ENABLE INSTANTAN

PICK UP INST.
FIXED TIME
TORQUE CONTROL
LOCKING COND.
BREAKER FAILURE ENABLE
ENAB BREAKE.FAIL
GND RESTORE.FAIL
FAILURE TIMING
LOCKING COND

SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 1 PROG. PROTECTION CURRENT PROT. PHASE DIRECTIONAL PHASE DIREC CRIT. QUADRATURE/SECUENCES
PHASE ANGLE
POLARIZ. V
PHASE AMPLIT.
DIRECT. LOCKING
LOCKING COND.
NEU./.SENS. N DIR. SENSITIVE GND SENS. GND DIR TYPE
MINIMA P.
ANG.
MINIMUM I.
GND GND DIR TYPE
MINIMA P.
GND. ANG.
MINIMUM I.
ANGULAR GND DIREC. CRIT.
.NEU. AMPLIT
MINIMUM VN THRESHOLD VN THRESHOLD
C. UNBALANCE TOC ENABLE
PICKUP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING COND.
C. UNBALANCE IOC ENABLE IOC
PICKUP
FIXED TIME
LOCKING COND.
BROKEN CONDUCTOR ENABLE

PICKUP
FIXED TIME
LOCKING COND.
PROG.ISOLAT. GND ENABLE ISOL GRND Isolated ground
TORQUE CONTROL
LOW CURRENT
HIGH CURRENT
LOW VOLTAGE
HIGH VOLTAGE
TIME 1st TRIP
SWITCH TO INST.
LOCKING COND.
PHASES IOC,ZONE2 ENABLE INSTAN Teleprotection. Zone 2. Phases
PICKUP INSTAN
FIXED TIME
PHASES IOC,ZONE3 ENABLE INSTAN Teleprotection. Zone 3. Phases
PICKUP INSTAN
FIXED TIME
GROUND IOC,ZONE2 ENABLE INSTAN Teleprotection. Zone 2. Ground
PICKUP INSTAN
FIXED TIME
GROUND IOC,ZONE3 ENABLE INSTAN Teleprotection. Zone 3. Ground
PICKUP INSTAN
FIXED TIME
CANCEL TIMING CANCEL PHASE TIMING Cancel timing
CANCEL GND TIMING
CANCEL SEN GND TIMING
CANCEL PHASE TIMING H2
CANCEL GND TIMING H2
CANCEL SENS. NEU TIMING H2
CANCEL UNBALA. TIMING
GND.TOC LIMITAT. LIMIT CURR.
TOC BLOCK.

PHS.TOC LIMITAT. TOC BLOCK.
2nd HARMON. RESTR. ENAB 2nd HAR. PHASE
ENAB 2nd HAR. NEUTR.

THRESHOLD I2f / If (%)
SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 1 PROG. PROTECTION 2nd HARMON. RESTR. PHASE MIN. CURRENT
GND MIN. CURRENT
PROTE.FNC.BLQ.MC MODULE ENABLE Manual closing prot. funct locking
MODULE CONST (it can be only used in EH3211)
ANGLE ENABLE
ANGLE (DGR)
FIELD LOSS FIELD GENERALS ENABLE
.MIN VOT. PICKUP
DIRECT. ANGLE
LOCKING CONDITION
DIAMETER (OHM)
UNDERVOLT. SURVEIL.
ALARM TIMING
TRIP TIMING
DIAMETER (OHM)
UNDERVOLT. SURVEIL.
ALARM TIMING
TRIP TIMING
VOLT. PROTECTION TIMED OVERVOLTAGE ENABLE Time overvoltage
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING CONDITION
Instantaneous overvoltage
INST. OVERVOLTAGE ENABLE
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING CONDITION
TIME UNDERVOLTAGE ENABLE Time undervoltage
PICKUP.
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING CONDITION
INST. UNDERVOLTAGE ENABLE Inst. undervoltage
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING COND.
GND VOLTAGE ENABLE Ground overvoltage
TIMED PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX

DEFINITE TIME
INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 1 PROG. PROTECTION VOLT. PROTECTION GND VOLTAGE LOKING COND.
VOLTAGE UNBALANCE ENABLE Voltage unbalance
PICKUP.
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING COND.
VOLT. PH. REVERSAL ENABLE Voltage phase reversal
ADDITIONAL TIME
POWER PROT. POWER NOMINAL INT 5A/1A
MINIMUM. POWER ENABLE Minimum power
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
MAX. POW. HI-SET ENABLE Maximum power, high level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
MAX. POW. LO-SET ENABLE Maximum power, low level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
REV. POW. HI-SET ENABLE Reverse active power, high level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
REV. POW. LO-SET ENABLE Reverse active power, low level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
REAC.REV.POW.HI ENABLE Reverse reactive power, high level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
REAC.REV.POW.LO ENABLE Reverse reactive power, low level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
MIN. APPARENT ENABLE Apparent minimum power
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
MAX. APPARENT HI ENABLE Apparent maximum power, high level
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
MAX. APPARENT LO ENABLE MAX. APPARENT LO
PICKUP
TIME
LOCKING COND.
SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION FREQUENCY PROT. HIGH/LOW FREQUEN STEP FREQUENCE 1 ENABLE FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY (Hz)
TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY (Hz)

TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY (Hz)
SETPOINTS (change) SEE TABLE 1 PROTECTION FREQUENCY PROT. HIGH/LOW FREQUEN STEP FREQUENCE 3 TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY (Hz)
TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY (Hz)
TRIP TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
LOCKING COND.
MIN.VOLTAGE SPV. MIN.VOLTAGE SPV. Minimum voltage supervision
PICKUP CYCLES No
P.CYCL. DF/DT No
FREQUENCY GRAD ENABL.GRAD. Derived from frequency
MIN.CURRENT
F. SPV. 1 (HZ)
STEP 1 (HZ)
FIXED TIME STEP. 1
SPV FREQ. 2 (HZ)
STEP 2 (HZ)
FIXED TIME STEP. 2
SPV FREQ... 3 (HZ)
STEP 3 (HZ)
FIXED TIME STEP. 3
SPV FREQ...4 (HZ)
STEP 4 (HZ)
FIXED TIME STEP. 4
LOCKING COND.
PROG. TABLE 1 PROG. PROTECTION SINCROCHECK SYNCROCHECK Enable syncrocheck
UNDERV.COND. NO A and NO in B
NO A and YES in B
YES A and NO in B
VOLTAGE DIF.
ANGLE DIF.
FREQUEN.DIF
PICK VOLT.DF
PICK ANGL.DF
PICK FREQ.DF
MIN.VOLT. A
MIN.VOLT. B
CLOSE COND.T
LOCKING COND.
THERMAL IMAGE THERM.IMAG.PARAM ENABLE Thermal image
HEAT. CONST.
COOL. CONST
ALARM THRESH
REPOSITION THRESH
LOCKING COND.
PICKUP CURR.

SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 1 PROG.RECLOSER. RECLOSER. IS/OOS RECLOSER. IN SERVIC Recloser in service.
PROG. RECLOS. TIME T.CLOSURE 1,PHASE 1st closure time for phase to phase faults.
T.CLOSURE 1 ,EARTH 1st closure time for phase to earth faults.
T.CLOSURE 2,PHASE 2nd closure time for phase to phase faults.
T.CLOSURE 2,EARTH 2nd closure time for phase to earth faults.
T.CLOSURE 3,PHASE 3rd closure time for phase to phase faults.
T.CLOSURE 3,EARTH 3rd closure time for phase to earth faults.
T.CLOSURE 4,PHASE 4th closure time for phase to phase faults.
T.CLOSURE 4 EARTH 4th closure time for phase to earth fault.
PROG.VARIOUS T. Vref WAITING TIME Reference voltage reclaim time.
PH. FAULT RECL. Reclaim time for phase to phase faults.
EARTH FAULT RECL. Reclaim time for phase to earth faults.
MAN CLOS. RECL. Reclaim time after manual closing.
CYCLE CONTROL CLOSURE NUMBER Number of closures.
PROG.ALLOW. TRIP. AT REST Trips allowed at rest
AFTER CLOSURE 1 Trips allowed after the first closure.
AFTER CLOSURE 2 Trips allowed after the second closure.
AFTER CLOSURE 3 Trips allowed after the third closure.
AFTER CLOSURE 4 Trips allowed after the fourth closure.
MANUAL CLOSURE T. Trips allowed after the manual closure.
PROG.CLOSURE PERM CLOSURE. 1 permission Enables the first reclosure after the trips.
CLOSURE. 2 permission Enables the second reclosure after the trips.
CLOSURE. 3 permission Enables the third reclosure after the trips.
CLOSURE. 4 permission Enables the fourth reclosure after the trips.
SEQUENCE COORD. ENABLE
RECLOSER LOCKING
FREQUENCY RECLOS ENABLE RECLOSER
MIN.F.COND
MIN.FREQ.
RECLOS.TIME
RECLAIM. TIME
LOCKING COND.
BREAKER MONITOR EXC.TRIP NUM Excessive number of trips
V.EXC.TRIP N Time for calculation of excessive number of trips
ALARM KI2 Initial sum KI2 (setting)
INITIAL KI2 Alarm sum KI2 for maintenance
ENAB.TRIP MON Enable monitoring of trip circuit
ENAB.CLOS MON Enable monitoring of close circuit
CALCULATION TYPE See k12 sum calculation time
WAITING TIME See waiting time alter trip
HISTORICAL PROG. V.AVERAGE Window of timings for calculating of aver. samples
I.RECORD Interval of historical records
CALENDAR MASK Calendar mask for days of week
START TIME Start time of diary record
END TIME End time of diary record
OPERAT. LOGIC PROG. TRIP LOCKING. Trip locking
OPEN FAIL. TIME Open fail time
CLOSE FAIL. TIME. Close fail time
P. TABL 2/3/4/5/6 SAME AS TABLE 1

SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 0 PROG. CONFIGUR I/O PROG. INPUTS INPUT1-INPUT17 Configuration of the 17 inputs.
SELECT N0/NC
INPUTS ACTIV. TIME
LOGICAL SIGNALS Logical allocation to inputs
LOGICAL S. NO/NC
FLICKER SETTING C.ACTIV.FLICKER
C.REMOVE FLICKER
T.CHECK.FLIKER
PROG. OUTPUTS OUTPUT1-OUTPUT14 Configuration of the 14 outputs.
ASSIGN SIGNALS
OUTPUT TYPE
OUTPUTS ACTIV. T.
PROG. LEDs LED 1 - LED 8 Configuration of the 8 programmable leds.
ASSIGN SIGNALS
LED TYPE
GENERAL PROG PROG.RELAY IN SERV. Relay in service.
PROG.BREAKER NUM. Breaker number.
PROG.TRANSFORMERS PHASE TRANSF. Phase current transf. ratio.
GND TRANSF. Ground current transf. Ratio
SENS . GND. TRANSF.
VOLTAGE TRANSF. Voltage transformation ratio
VOLT. DETECTION Rated Ph-Ph V Voltage presence (only CR family)
NO-DETEC.THRESH.
DETECT. THRESH.
SLACK SPRINGS STRETCH TIME Springs slacks
NOMINAL VOLTAGE Simple nominal voltage
VOLTAGE INPUT VOLTAGE TYPE Simples/Compounds
VOLT MEASUREMENT Phases in which it is measured
IRIG-B FORMAT B002 (without year) / B002 IEEE 1344 (with year)
PRG SIDE A V SYN Side A phase for synchronism
COMMUNIC. CONFIG SELECT COM2 COMMUN. Procome, DNP, MODBUS, 101
PORT COM1 LCU ADDRESS Unit address.
BAUD RATE Baud rate (bauds).
PORT COM2 LCU ADDRESS Unit address.
(if Procome) BAUD RATE Baud rate (bauds).
PORT COM2 LCU ADDRESS LCU address for DNP communications
(if DNP) MASTER ADDRESS Master address for DNP communications
BAUD RATE Baud rate for DNP communications
PARITY Parity for DNP communications
STOP BITS Stop bits for DNP communications
FIXED RTS YES/NO
RTS AND CTS CONTROL RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS. WAIT. TIME(csec) CTS waiting time for DNP communications
CARR. WAIT. TIM. (csec) CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
STABIL TIME. (csec) Stabilization time for DNP communications
ACK. WAIT. TIME(csec) Link acknowledge waiting time for DNP
SYNCHRON. TIME. (min) Synchronization time for DNP communications
LINK ACK. Link acknowledge for DNP communications
AP MESS BYTE N. N. bytes of application messages for DNP
T.CHANGES Changes sending time for DNP communications
T.FROZEN Counter freezing time for DNP
STATUS SEND Status sending for DNP communications
MEAS. BITS NUM. Measurements format for DNP communications

COUNT. BITS NUM. Counter format for DNP communications
NON REQUESTED MESS. Non requested message sending for DNP
PREV.CONFLICT Conflict prev. for DNP communications
FIXED CON. TIME (csec) Fixed conflict time for DNP communications
VBLE. CON. TIME (csec) Variable conflict time for DNP
T.RESEND Non requested messages resend time for DNP
N.MAX.NO REQUESTED Max. non requested messages number for DNP
SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 0 PROG. CONFIGUR I/O PORT COM2 SPECIAL Special for DNP communications
(if DNP) MEASUREM. FORMAT Counts/ value in the secondary/ value in the primary
SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 0 PROG. CONFIGUR I/O PORT COM2 LCU ADDRESS LCU address
(if. MODBUS) BAUD RATE Baud rate
PARITY YES/NO Parity
RTS DEACT.WAIT. T. RTS deactivation waiting time
MEASUREM. FORMAT Format for MODBUS
PUERTO COM2 GENERALS LINK ADDRESS
(If. 101) APPLIC. ADDRESS
SWING
BAUD RATE
CHANNEL TYPE
RTS AND CTS
PARITY
STOP BITS
CTS ACT. WAIT. TIME
CARRIER WAIT. TIME
RTS ACTIV TIME
RTS DEACTIV TIME
ANSWER WAITING TIME
TME BETWEEN TX
RETRANS. NUMBER
ASDU FIELDS APPLIC. ADD. LENGTH
CAA LENGTH
COT LENGTH
IOA LENGTH
FORMATS TIME FORMAT
MEASUREMENT TIMING
COUNTER TIMING
ADDRESSES SP ADDRESS
EV ADDRESS
DP ADDRESS
AVERAGEADDRESS
TAP ADDRESS
CON ADDRESS
BIT ADDRESS
OC ADDRESS
OC0 ADDRESS
OC1 ADDRESS
OC2 ADDRESS
TORQUE ADDRESS
FULL ADDRESS
HALF-FULL ADDRESS
GPS ADDRESS
SYNCHR. ADDRESS
OTHER PARAMETERS % FULL
% EMPTY

WORD EVENTS
COOMAND MODE
COMMAND INFORM.
FREEZE
AVER. TORQ ADDRESS
META. PROFILE
GPS
TRANSMIS. FACTOR
ASDU SIZE
BIT SQ
PORT COM2(If 103) LCU ADDRESS LCU address
SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 0 PROG. CONFIGUR I/O PORT COM2(If 103) BAUD RATE Baud rate
PARITY Parity
STOP BITS Number of stop bits
SENDING FORMAT Compatible with VDEW/Extended
TCP/IP COM. SELEC NO / PROCOME / HORIZONTAL

COMMUNIC.
PROTECTIONS CTRL. PROG. (51V) CTRL. PARAM (51V) ENABLE Control parameters 51V
CONTROL VOLTAGE
LOCKING COND.
PHASE TIMED(51V) PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
CTRL. PROG. (50V) CTRL. PARAM. (50V) ENABLE Control parameters 50V
CONTROL VOLTAGE
LOCKING COND.
PHASE INST. (50V) PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
FUSE FAILURE ENABLE Fuse failure
TRIP TIME
LOCKING COND.
COLD LOAD PICKUP PHASE TIMED ENABLE Cold Load Pickup
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING COND.
GND TIMED ENABLE
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING COND.
PHASE INST. ENABLE
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
PHASE INST. LOCKING
GND INST. ENABLE
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING COND.
SEN. N. TIMED ENABLE
PICKUP
CURVE TYPE
TIME INDEX
DEFINITE TIME
LOCKING COND.
SEN. N. INSTANT. ENABLE

PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
LOCKING COND.
COLD LOAD PICKUP ENABLE
COLD LOAD DET. TIME
COLD LOAD ACT TIME

HIGH CURR. PH, HIGH CUR. LOCK. ENABLE High current lockout
LOCKOUT
PICKUP
DEFINITE TIME
TRIP NUMBER
LOCKING COND.
NEU.HIGH CUR,. LOCK. ENABLE
SETPOINTS (change) PROG. TABLE 0 PROTECTIONS HIGH CURR. NEU.HIGH CUR,. LOCK. PICKUP
LOCKOUT
DEFINITE TIME
TRIP NUMBER
LOCKING COND.
REGULATOR BLOCK. ENAB.50 CSC Regulator blocking
THRESHOLD 50 CSC
LOCKING COND.
DEFINE PROTECT. LANGUAGE Spanish/English
Insert key FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz
VOLTAGE INPUT VOLTAGE TYPE Simple/Compound
PHASE ORDER A-B-C / C-B-A
GND PARAMETER GND. V TRANSFOR. V0 calculate /V0 per transformer (measurement)
CALIBRATION For exclusive use of INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION SA
BUTTONS/LEDS ENABLE BUTTONS
EN.BLOC.CTRL
BLOCK R KEY
BLOCK LEDS
POW.SUPPLY SUPERVI. YES/NO
TEMPERAT SUPERV. ENABLE YES/NO
MIN.ALARM. THRESH.
MAX.ALARM. THRESH.
EXTERNAL. SUPPLY SUP. ENABLE YES/NO
MIN. ALARM. THRESH.
MAX. ALARM. THRESH.
TEST MODE For exclusive use of INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION SA
INITIALIZE COUNT. CLOSURE = 0 ? Set closure and trip counters to zero.
MAXIMETER = 0 ? Set maximeter to zero.
KI2 SUM= INIT. ? Initialize KI2 sum to its setting value.
ENERGIES=0 ? Set to zero energy counters
RESET QUEUES? Reset queues of events, faults oscillograph...
CORRECT. FACTOR ACT. ENERGY Scale for active energy counter.
REACT. ENERGY Scale for reactive energy counter.
POWER SCALE Scale for power measurement.

CURVES FOR TIME CHARACTERISTICS
APPENDIX II. CURVES FOR TIME CHARACTERISTICS
II.1. CEI 255-4 / BS142 CURVES

21B
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the following types:
 Normal Inverse characteristic

 Very Inverse characteristic.
 Extremely Inverse characteristic.
 User curve.
These curves comply with the general formula
k tr
T M TDROPOUT : M 2
I I
1 1
I0 I0
being:
 T : Trip time (sec)

 TDROPOUT : Drop time (sec)

 I: Measured current
 Io: Pickup current setting
 K, , constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants Inverse normal Short inverse Long inverse Very inverse Extrem. inverse MIE special
K 0.14 0.05 120 13.50 80.00 2.60
0.02 0.04 1 1.00 2.00 1.00
tr 9.7 0.5 120 43.2 58.2 21.2
The following represent the curves which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for
each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except
between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are other 4.

Inverse curve
k tr
T M TDROPOUT : M 2
I I
1 1
I0 I0
K = 0,14, = 0,02 tr = 9.7
Theoretical values given by the formula:
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.485 0.517 0.647 1.109 7.170 3.669 1.916 1.331 0.860 0.501 0.378 0.315 0.214 0.149 0.113 0.091
0.06 0.582 0.621 0.776 1.330 8.604 4.402 2.299 1.597 1.032 0.602 0.454 0.378 0.257 0.178 0.136 0.110
0.07 0.679 0.724 0.905 1.552 10.038 5.136 2.683 1.863 1.204 0.702 0.530 0.441 0.300 0.208 0.159 0.128
0.08 0.776 0.828 1.035 1.774 11.472 5.870 3.066 2.129 1.376 0.802 0.606 0.504 0.342 0.238 0.181 0.146
0.09 0.873 0.931 1.164 1.995 12.906 6.604 3.449 2.395 1.547 0.903 0.681 0.567 0.385 0.267 0.204 0.165
0.10 0.970 1.035 1.293 2.217 14.340 7.337 3.832 2.661 1.719 1.003 0.757 0.630 0.428 0.297 0.227 0.183
0.11 1.067 1.138 1.423 2.439 15.774 8.071 4.216 2.927 1.891 1.103 0.833 0.693 0.471 0.327 0.249 0.201
0.12 1.164 1.242 1.552 2.661 17.208 8.805 4.599 3.193 2.063 1.203 0.908 0.756 0.514 0.356 0.272 0.219
0.13 1.261 1.345 1.681 2.882 18.642 9.539 4.982 3.459 2.235 1.304 0.984 0.819 0.556 0.386 0.295 0.238
0.14 1.358 1.449 1.811 3.104 20.076 10.272 5.365 3.725 2.407 1.404 1.060 0.882 0.599 0.416 0.317 0.256
0.15 1.455 1.552 1.940 3.326 21.510 11.006 5.749 3.992 2.579 1.504 1.135 0.945 0.642 0.446 0.340 0.274
0.16 1.552 1.655 2.069 3.547 22.944 11.740 6.132 4.258 2.751 1.605 1.211 1.008 0.685 0.475 0.363 0.293
0.17 1.649 1.759 2.199 3.769 24.378 12.474 6.515 4.524 2.923 1.705 1.287 1.071 0.728 0.505 0.385 0.311
0.18 1.746 1.862 2.328 3.991 25.812 13.207 6.898 4.790 3.095 1.805 1.363 1.134 0.770 0.535 0.408 0.329
0.19 1.843 1.966 2.457 4.213 27.246 13.941 7.282 5.056 3.267 1.906 1.438 1.197 0.813 0.564 0.431 0.347
0.20 1.940 2.069 2.587 4.434 28.680 14.675 7.665 5.322 3.439 2.006 1.514 1.260 0.856 0.594 0.453 0.366
0.25 2.425 2.587 3.233 5.543 35.850 18.344 9.581 6.653 4.299 2.507 1.892 1.575 1.070 0.743 0.567 0.457
0.30 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 43.021 22.012 11.497 7.983 5.158 3.009 2.271 1.891 1.284 0.891 0.680 0.549
0.35 3.395 3.621 4.527 7.760 50.191 25.681 13.413 9.314 6.018 3.510 2.649 2.206 1.498 1.040 0.794 0.640
0.40 3.880 4.139 5.173 8.869 57.361 29.350 15.329 10.644 6.878 4.012 3.028 2.521 1.712 1.188 0.907 0.731
0.45 4.365 4.656 5.820 9.977 64.531 33.018 17.246 11.975 7.737 4.513 3.406 2.836 1.926 1.337 1.020 0.823
0.50 4.850 5.173 6.467 11.086 71.701 36.687 19.162 13.305 8.597 5.015 3.785 3.151 2.140 1.485 1.134 0.914
0.55 5.335 5.691 7.113 12.194 78.871 40.356 21.078 14.636 9.457 5.516 4.163 3.466 2.354 1.634 1.247 1.006
0.60 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 86.041 44.025 22.994 15.966 10.317 6.017 4.542 3.781 2.568 1.782 1.360 1.097
0.65 6.305 6.725 8.407 14.411 93.211 47.693 24.910 17.297 11.176 6.519 4.920 4.096 2.782 1.931 1.474 1.188
0.70 6.790 7.243 9.053 15.520 100.381 51.362 26.827 18.627 12.036 7.020 5.299 4.411 2.996 2.079 1.587 1.280
0.75 7.275 7.760 9.700 16.629 107.551 55.031 28.743 19.958 12.896 7.522 5.677 4.726 3.210 2.228 1.701 1.371
0.80 7.760 8.277 10.347 17.737 114.721 58.700 30.659 21.288 13.755 8.023 6.056 5.042 3.424 2.376 1.814 1.463
0.85 8.245 8.795 10.993 18.846 121.891 62.368 32.575 22.619 14.615 8.525 6.434 5.357 3.638 2.525 1.927 1.554
0.90 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 129.062 66.037 34.491 23.949 15.475 9.026 6.813 5.672 3.852 2.674 2.041 1.646
0.95 9.215 9.829 12.287 21.063 136.232 69.706 36.408 25.280 16.335 9.528 7.191 5.987 4.066 2.822 2.154 1.737
1.00 9.700 10.347 12.933 22.171 143.402 73.374 38.324 26.611 17.194 10.029 7.570 6.302 4.280 2.971 2.267 1.828
1.05 10.185 10.864 13.580 23.280 150.572 77.043 40.240 27.941 18.054 10.530 7.948 6.617 4.494 3.119 2.381 1.920

Inverse characteristic

Long duration curve (IEC)

k tr
T M TDROPOUT : M 2
I I
1 1
I0 I0
K = 120, =1 tr = 120
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 120.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 1.500 0.667 0.316 0.154
0.06 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 14.400 7.200 4.800 3.600 1.800 0.800 0.379 0.185
0.07 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 168.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 16.800 8.400 5.600 4.200 2.100 0.933 0.442 0.215
0.08 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 19.200 9.600 6.400 4.800 2.400 1.067 0.505 0.246
0.09 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 216.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.10 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 3.000 1.333 0.632 0.308
0.11 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 264.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 26.400 13.200 8.800 6.600 3.300 1.467 0.695 0.338
0.12 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 288.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 28.800 14.400 9.600 7.200 3.600 1.600 0.758 0.369
0.13 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 312.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 31.200 15.600 10.400 7.800 3.900 1.733 0.821 0.400
0.14 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 336.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 33.600 16.800 11.200 8.400 4.200 1.867 0.884 0.431
0.15 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 360.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 36.000 18.000 12.000 9.000 4.500 2.000 0.947 0.462
0.16 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 384.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 38.400 19.200 12.800 9.600 4.800 2.133 1.011 0.492
0.17 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 408.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 40.800 20.400 13.600 10.200 5.100 2.267 1.074 0.523
0.18 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 432.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 43.200 21.600 14.400 10.800 5.400 2.400 1.137 0.554
0.19 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 456.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 45.600 22.800 15.200 11.400 5.700 2.533 1.200 0.585
0.20 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 480.001 240.000 120.000 80.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 6.000 2.667 1.263 0.615
0.25 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 600.001 300.000 150.000 100.000 60.000 30.000 20.000 15.000 7.500 3.333 1.579 0.769
0.30 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 720.001 360.000 180.000 120.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 9.000 4.000 1.895 0.923
0.35 42.000 44.800 56.000 96.000 840.001 420.000 210.000 140.000 84.000 42.000 28.000 21.000 10.500 4.667 2.211 1.077
0.40 48.000 51.200 64.000 109.714 960.001 480.000 240.000 160.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 12.000 5.333 2.526 1.231
0.45 54.000 57.600 72.000 123.429 1080.001 540.000 270.000 180.000 108.000 54.000 36.000 27.000 13.500 6.000 2.842 1.385
0.50 60.000 64.000 80.000 137.143 1200.001 600.000 300.000 200.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 15.000 6.667 3.158 1.538
0.55 66.000 70.400 88.000 150.857 1320.001 660.000 330.000 220.000 132.000 66.000 44.000 33.000 16.500 7.333 3.474 1.692
0.60 72.000 76.800 96.000 164.571 1440.002 720.000 360.000 240.000 144.000 72.000 48.000 36.000 18.000 8.000 3.789 1.846
0.65 78.000 83.200 104.000 178.286 1560.002 780.000 390.000 260.000 156.000 78.000 52.000 39.000 19.500 8.667 4.105 2.000
0.70 84.000 89.600 112.000 192.000 1680.002 840.000 420.000 280.000 168.000 84.000 56.000 42.000 21.000 9.333 4.421 2.154
0.75 90.000 96.000 120.000 205.714 1800.002 900.000 450.000 300.000 180.000 90.000 60.000 45.000 22.500 10.000 4.737 2.308
0.80 96.000 102.400 128.000 219.429 1920.002 960.000 480.000 320.000 192.000 96.000 64.000 48.000 24.000 10.667 5.053 2.462
0.85 102.000 108.800 136.000 233.143 2040.002 1020.000 510.000 340.000 204.000 102.000 68.000 51.000 25.500 11.333 5.368 2.615
0.90 108.000 115.200 144.000 246.857 2160.002 1080.000 540.000 360.000 216.000 108.000 72.000 54.000 27.000 12.000 5.684 2.769
0.95 114.000 121.600 152.000 260.571 2280.003 1140.000 570.000 380.000 228.000 114.000 76.000 57.000 28.500 12.667 6.000 2.923
1.00 120.000 128.000 160.000 274.286 2400.003 1200.000 600.000 400.000 240.000 120.000 80.000 60.000 30.000 13.333 6.316 3.077
1.05 126.000 134.400 168.000 288.000 2520.003 1260.000 630.000 420.000 252.000 126.000 84.000 63.000 31.500 14.000 6.632 3.231

Long duration inverse

Short duration curve IEC
k tr
T M TDROPOUT : M 2
I I
1 1
I0 I0
K = 0.05, = 0.04 tr = 0.5
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 0.025 0.027 0.033 0.057 1.280 0.655 0.342 0.237 0.153 0.089 0.067 0.056 0.038 0.026 0.020 0.016
0.06 0.030 0.032 0.040 0.069 1.536 0.785 0.410 0.284 0.183 0.107 0.080 0.067 0.045 0.031 0.024 0.019
0.07 0.035 0.037 0.047 0.080 1.792 0.916 0.478 0.332 0.214 0.124 0.094 0.078 0.053 0.036 0.027 0.022
0.08 0.040 0.043 0.053 0.091 2.048 1.047 0.546 0.379 0.245 0.142 0.107 0.089 0.060 0.041 0.031 0.025
0.09 0.045 0.048 0.060 0.103 2.304 1.178 0.615 0.427 0.275 0.160 0.121 0.100 0.068 0.047 0.035 0.028
0.10 0.050 0.053 0.067 0.114 2.559 1.309 0.683 0.474 0.306 0.178 0.134 0.111 0.075 0.052 0.039 0.031
0.11 0.055 0.059 0.073 0.126 2.815 1.440 0.751 0.521 0.336 0.196 0.147 0.122 0.083 0.057 0.043 0.035
0.12 0.060 0.064 0.080 0.137 3.071 1.571 0.820 0.569 0.367 0.213 0.161 0.134 0.090 0.062 0.047 0.038
0.13 0.065 0.069 0.087 0.149 3.327 1.702 0.888 0.616 0.398 0.231 0.174 0.145 0.098 0.067 0.051 0.041
0.14 0.070 0.075 0.093 0.160 3.583 1.833 0.956 0.664 0.428 0.249 0.188 0.156 0.105 0.073 0.055 0.044
0.15 0.075 0.080 0.100 0.171 3.839 1.964 1.025 0.711 0.459 0.267 0.201 0.167 0.113 0.078 0.059 0.047
0.16 0.080 0.085 0.107 0.183 4.095 2.094 1.093 0.758 0.489 0.285 0.214 0.178 0.120 0.083 0.063 0.050
0.17 0.085 0.091 0.113 0.194 4.351 2.225 1.161 0.806 0.520 0.302 0.228 0.189 0.128 0.088 0.067 0.053
0.18 0.090 0.096 0.120 0.206 4.607 2.356 1.230 0.853 0.550 0.320 0.241 0.200 0.135 0.093 0.071 0.057
0.19 0.095 0.101 0.127 0.217 4.863 2.487 1.298 0.900 0.581 0.338 0.254 0.211 0.143 0.098 0.075 0.060
0.20 0.100 0.107 0.133 0.229 5.119 2.618 1.366 0.948 0.612 0.356 0.268 0.223 0.150 0.104 0.079 0.063
0.25 0.125 0.133 0.167 0.286 6.399 3.273 1.708 1.185 0.764 0.445 0.335 0.278 0.188 0.130 0.098 0.079
0.30 0.150 0.160 0.200 0.343 7.678 3.927 2.049 1.422 0.917 0.534 0.402 0.334 0.226 0.155 0.118 0.094
0.35 0.175 0.187 0.233 0.400 8.958 4.582 2.391 1.659 1.070 0.622 0.469 0.390 0.263 0.181 0.137 0.110
0.40 0.200 0.213 0.267 0.457 10.238 5.236 2.732 1.896 1.223 0.711 0.536 0.445 0.301 0.207 0.157 0.126
0.45 0.225 0.240 0.300 0.514 11.518 5.891 3.074 2.133 1.376 0.800 0.603 0.501 0.338 0.233 0.177 0.142
0.50 0.250 0.267 0.333 0.571 12.797 6.545 3.416 2.370 1.529 0.889 0.670 0.556 0.376 0.259 0.196 0.157
0.55 0.275 0.293 0.367 0.629 14.077 7.200 3.757 2.607 1.682 0.978 0.737 0.612 0.414 0.285 0.216 0.173
0.60 0.300 0.320 0.400 0.686 15.357 7.854 4.099 2.844 1.835 1.067 0.804 0.668 0.451 0.311 0.236 0.189
0.65 0.325 0.347 0.433 0.743 16.637 8.509 4.440 3.081 1.988 1.156 0.871 0.723 0.489 0.337 0.255 0.204
0.70 0.350 0.373 0.467 0.800 17.916 9.163 4.782 3.318 2.141 1.245 0.938 0.779 0.526 0.363 0.275 0.220
0.75 0.375 0.400 0.500 0.857 19.196 9.818 5.123 3.555 2.293 1.334 1.005 0.835 0.564 0.389 0.295 0.236
0.80 0.400 0.427 0.533 0.914 20.476 10.472 5.465 3.792 2.446 1.423 1.071 0.890 0.602 0.415 0.314 0.252
0.85 0.425 0.453 0.567 0.971 21.756 11.127 5.806 4.029 2.599 1.512 1.138 0.946 0.639 0.441 0.334 0.267
0.90 0.450 0.480 0.600 1.029 23.035 11.781 6.148 4.265 2.752 1.601 1.205 1.002 0.677 0.466 0.353 0.283
0.95 0.475 0.507 0.633 1.086 24.315 12.436 6.489 4.502 2.905 1.690 1.272 1.057 0.714 0.492 0.373 0.299
1.00 0.500 0.533 0.667 1.143 25.595 13.090 6.831 4.739 3.058 1.778 1.339 1.113 0.752 0.518 0.393 0.314
1.05 0.525 0.560 0.700 1.200 26.875 13.745 7.173 4.976 3.211 1.867 1.406 1.169 0.790 0.544 0.412 0.330

Short duration inverse

Very inverse curve

k tr
T M TDROPOUT : M 2
I I
1 1
I0 I0
K = 13,5, =1 tr = 43.2
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.160 2.304 2.880 4.937 13.500 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.169 0.075 0.036 0.017
0.06 2.592 2.765 3.456 5.925 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 1.620 0.810 0.540 0.405 0.203 0.090 0.043 0.021
0.07 3.024 3.226 4.032 6.912 18.900 9.450 4.725 3.150 1.890 0.945 0.630 0.472 0.236 0.105 0.050 0.024
0.08 3.456 3.686 4.608 7.899 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.160 1.080 0.720 0.540 0.270 0.120 0.057 0.028
0.09 3.888 4.147 5.184 8.887 24.300 12.150 6.075 4.050 2.430 1.215 0.810 0.607 0.304 0.135 0.064 0.031
0.10 4.320 4.608 5.760 9.874 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.337 0.150 0.071 0.035
0.11 4.752 5.069 6.336 10.862 29.700 14.850 7.425 4.950 2.970 1.485 0.990 0.742 0.371 0.165 0.078 0.038
0.12 5.184 5.530 6.912 11.849 32.400 16.200 8.100 5.400 3.240 1.620 1.080 0.810 0.405 0.180 0.085 0.042
0.13 5.616 5.990 7.488 12.837 35.100 17.550 8.775 5.850 3.510 1.755 1.170 0.877 0.439 0.195 0.092 0.045
0.14 6.048 6.451 8.064 13.824 37.800 18.900 9.450 6.300 3.780 1.890 1.260 0.945 0.472 0.210 0.099 0.048
0.15 6.480 6.912 8.640 14.811 40.500 20.250 10.125 6.750 4.050 2.025 1.350 1.013 0.506 0.225 0.107 0.052
0.16 6.912 7.373 9.216 15.799 43.200 21.600 10.800 7.200 4.320 2.160 1.440 1.080 0.540 0.240 0.114 0.055
0.17 7.344 7.834 9.792 16.786 45.900 22.950 11.475 7.650 4.590 2.295 1.530 1.148 0.574 0.255 0.121 0.059
0.18 7.776 8.294 10.368 17.774 48.600 24.300 12.150 8.100 4.860 2.430 1.620 1.215 0.608 0.270 0.128 0.062
0.19 8.208 8.755 10.944 18.761 51.300 25.650 12.825 8.550 5.130 2.565 1.710 1.283 0.641 0.285 0.135 0.066
0.20 8.640 9.216 11.520 19.749 54.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 0.675 0.300 0.142 0.069
0.25 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 67.500 33.750 16.875 11.250 6.750 3.375 2.250 1.688 0.844 0.375 0.178 0.087
0.30 12.960 13.824 17.280 29.623 81.000 40.500 20.250 13.500 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.013 0.450 0.213 0.104
0.35 15.120 16.128 20.160 34.560 94.500 47.250 23.625 15.750 9.450 4.725 3.150 2.363 1.181 0.525 0.249 0.121
0.40 17.280 18.432 23.040 39.497 108.000 54.000 27.000 18.000 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 1.350 0.600 0.284 0.138
0.45 19.440 20.736 25.920 44.434 121.500 60.750 30.375 20.250 12.150 6.075 4.050 3.038 1.519 0.675 0.320 0.156
0.50 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 135.000 67.500 33.750 22.500 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 1.688 0.750 0.355 0.173
0.55 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 148.500 74.250 37.125 24.750 14.850 7.425 4.950 3.713 1.856 0.825 0.391 0.190
0.60 25.920 27.648 34.560 59.246 162.000 81.000 40.500 27.000 16.200 8.100 5.400 4.050 2.025 0.900 0.426 0.208
0.65 28.080 29.952 37.440 64.183 175.500 87.750 43.875 29.250 17.550 8.775 5.850 4.388 2.194 0.975 0.462 0.225
0.70 30.240 32.256 40.320 69.120 189.000 94.500 47.250 31.500 18.900 9.450 6.300 4.725 2.363 1.050 0.497 0.242
0.75 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 202.500 101.25 50.625 33.750 20.250 10.125 6.750 5.063 2.531 1.125 0.533 0.260
0.80 34.560 36.864 46.080 78.994 216.000 108.00 54.000 36.000 21.600 10.800 7.200 5.400 2.700 1.200 0.568 0.277
0.85 36.720 39.168 48.960 83.931 229.500 114.75 57.375 38.250 22.950 11.475 7.650 5.738 2.869 1.275 0.604 0.294
0.90 38.880 41.472 51.840 88.869 243.000 121.50 60.750 40.500 24.300 12.150 8.100 6.075 3.038 1.350 0.639 0.312
0.95 41.040 43.776 54.720 93.806 256.500 128.25 64.125 42.750 25.650 12.825 8.550 6.413 3.206 1.425 0.675 0.329
1.00 43.200 46.080 57.600 98.743 270.000 135.00 67.500 45.000 27.000 13.500 9.000 6.750 3.375 1.500 0.711 0.346
1.05 45.360 48.384 60.480 103.68 283.500 141.75 70.875 47.250 28.350 14.175 9.450 7.088 3.544 1.575 0.746 0.363

Very inverse characteristic


k tr
T M TDROPOUT : M 2
I I
1 1
I0 I0
K = 80, =2 tr =58.2
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.05 2.910 3.104 3.880 6.651 39.024 19.048 9.091 5.797 3.200 1.333 0.762 0.500 0.167 0.040 0.010 0.003
0.06 3.492 3.725 4.656 7.982 46.829 22.857 10.909 6.957 3.840 1.600 0.914 0.600 0.200 0.048 0.012 0.003
0.07 4.074 4.346 5.432 9.312 54.634 26.667 12.727 8.116 4.480 1.867 1.067 0.700 0.233 0.057 0.014 0.004
0.08 4.656 4.966 6.208 10.642 62.439 30.476 14.545 9.275 5.120 2.133 1.219 0.800 0.267 0.065 0.016 0.004
0.09 5.238 5.587 6.984 11.973 70.244 34.286 16.364 10.435 5.760 2.400 1.371 0.900 0.300 0.073 0.018 0.005
0.10 5.820 6.208 7.760 13.303 78.049 38.095 18.182 11.594 6.400 2.667 1.524 1.000 0.333 0.081 0.020 0.005
0.11 6.402 6.829 8.536 14.633 85.854 41.905 20.000 12.754 7.040 2.933 1.676 1.100 0.367 0.089 0.022 0.006
0.12 6.984 7.450 9.312 15.963 93.659 45.714 21.818 13.913 7.680 3.200 1.829 1.200 0.400 0.097 0.024 0.006
0.13 7.566 8.070 10.088 17.294 101.464 49.524 23.636 15.072 8.320 3.467 1.981 1.300 0.433 0.105 0.026 0.007
0.14 8.148 8.691 10.864 18.624 109.268 53.333 25.455 16.232 8.960 3.733 2.133 1.400 0.467 0.113 0.028 0.007
0.15 8.730 9.312 11.640 19.954 117.073 57.143 27.273 17.391 9.600 4.000 2.286 1.500 0.500 0.121 0.030 0.008
0.16 9.312 9.933 12.416 21.285 124.878 60.952 29.091 18.551 10.240 4.267 2.438 1.600 0.533 0.129 0.032 0.008
0.17 9.894 10.554 13.192 22.615 132.683 64.762 30.909 19.710 10.880 4.533 2.590 1.700 0.567 0.137 0.034 0.009
0.18 10.476 11.174 13.968 23.945 140.488 68.571 32.727 20.870 11.520 4.800 2.743 1.800 0.600 0.145 0.036 0.009
0.19 11.058 11.795 14.744 25.275 148.293 72.381 34.545 22.029 12.160 5.067 2.895 1.900 0.633 0.154 0.038 0.010
0.20 11.640 12.416 15.520 26.606 156.098 76.190 36.364 23.188 12.800 5.333 3.048 2.000 0.667 0.162 0.040 0.010
0.25 14.550 15.520 19.400 33.257 195.122 95.238 45.455 28.986 16.000 6.667 3.810 2.500 0.833 0.202 0.050 0.013
0.30 17.460 18.624 23.280 39.909 234.147 114.286 54.545 34.783 19.200 8.000 4.571 3.000 1.000 0.242 0.060 0.015
0.35 20.370 21.728 27.160 46.560 273.171 133.333 63.636 40.580 22.400 9.333 5.333 3.500 1.167 0.283 0.070 0.018
0.40 23.280 24.832 31.040 53.211 312.195 152.381 72.727 46.377 25.600 10.667 6.095 4.000 1.333 0.323 0.080 0.020
0.45 26.190 27.936 34.920 59.863 351.220 171.429 81.818 52.174 28.800 12.000 6.857 4.500 1.500 0.364 0.090 0.023
0.50 29.100 31.040 38.800 66.514 390.244 190.476 90.909 57.971 32.000 13.333 7.619 5.000 1.667 0.404 0.100 0.025
0.55 32.010 34.144 42.680 73.166 429.269 209.524 100.000 63.768 35.200 14.667 8.381 5.500 1.833 0.444 0.110 0.028
0.60 34.920 37.248 46.560 79.817 468.293 228.571 109.091 69.565 38.400 16.000 9.143 6.000 2.000 0.485 0.120 0.030
0.65 37.830 40.352 50.440 86.469 507.318 247.619 118.182 75.362 41.600 17.333 9.905 6.500 2.167 0.525 0.130 0.033
0.70 40.740 43.456 54.320 93.120 546.342 266.667 127.273 81.159 44.800 18.667 10.667 7.000 2.333 0.566 0.140 0.035
0.75 43.650 46.560 58.200 99.771 585.367 285.714 136.364 86.957 48.000 20.000 11.429 7.500 2.500 0.606 0.150 0.038
0.80 46.560 49.664 62.080 106.423 624.391 304.762 145.455 92.754 51.200 21.333 12.190 8.000 2.667 0.646 0.160 0.040
0.85 49.470 52.768 65.960 113.074 663.415 323.810 154.545 98.551 54.400 22.667 12.952 8.500 2.833 0.687 0.170 0.043
0.90 52.380 55.872 69.840 119.726 702.440 342.857 163.636 104.348 57.600 24.000 13.714 9.000 3.000 0.727 0.180 0.045
0.95 55.290 58.976 73.720 126.377 741.464 361.905 172.727 110.145 60.800 25.333 14.476 9.500 3.167 0.768 0.190 0.048
1.00 58.200 62.080 77.600 133.029 780.489 380.952 181.818 115.942 64.000 26.667 15.238 10.000 3.333 0.808 0.201 0.050
1.05 61.110 65.184 81.480 139.680 819.513 400.000 190.909 121.739 67.200 28.000 16.000 10.500 3.500 0.848 0.211 0.053

Extremely inverse characteristic

Special very inverse curve

k tr
T M TDROPOUT : M 2
I I
1 1
I0 I0
K = 2,6 =1
M \ I/Io 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 5.00 7.00 10.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 30.00 40.00
0.05 2.600 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.260 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.032 0.022 0.014 0.012 0.009 0.007 0.004 0.003
0.06 3.120 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.312 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.039 0.026 0.017 0.014 0.011 0.008 0.005 0.004
0.07 3.640 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.364 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.045 0.030 0.020 0.017 0.013 0.010 0.006 0.005
0.08 4.160 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.416 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.052 0.035 0.023 0.019 0.015 0.011 0.007 0.005
0.09 4.680 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.468 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.058 0.039 0.026 0.021 0.017 0.012 0.008 0.006
0.10 5.200 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.520 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.065 0.043 0.029 0.024 0.019 0.014 0.009 0.007
0.11 5.720 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.572 0.286 0.191 0.143 0.095 0.071 0.048 0.032 0.026 0.020 0.015 0.010 0.007
0.12 6.240 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.624 0.312 0.208 0.156 0.104 0.078 0.052 0.035 0.028 0.022 0.016 0.011 0.008
0.13 6.760 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.676 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.113 0.084 0.056 0.038 0.031 0.024 0.018 0.012 0.009
0.14 7.280 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.728 0.364 0.243 0.182 0.121 0.091 0.061 0.040 0.033 0.026 0.019 0.013 0.009
0.15 7.800 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.780 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.098 0.065 0.043 0.035 0.028 0.021 0.013 0.010
0.16 8.320 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.832 0.416 0.277 0.208 0.139 0.104 0.069 0.046 0.038 0.030 0.022 0.014 0.011
0.17 8.840 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.884 0.442 0.295 0.221 0.147 0.111 0.074 0.049 0.040 0.032 0.023 0.015 0.011
0.18 9.360 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.936 0.468 0.312 0.234 0.156 0.117 0.078 0.052 0.043 0.033 0.025 0.016 0.012
0.19 9.880 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.988 0.494 0.329 0.247 0.165 0.124 0.082 0.055 0.045 0.035 0.026 0.017 0.013
0.20 10.400 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 1.040 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.130 0.087 0.058 0.047 0.037 0.027 0.018 0.013
0.25 13.000 6.500 3.250 2.167 1.625 1.300 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.163 0.108 0.072 0.059 0.046 0.034 0.022 0.017
0.30 15.600 7.800 3.900 2.600 1.950 1.560 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.195 0.130 0.087 0.071 0.056 0.041 0.027 0.020
0.35 18.200 9.100 4.550 3.033 2.275 1.820 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.228 0.152 0.101 0.083 0.065 0.048 0.031 0.023
0.40 20.800 10.400 5.200 3.467 2.600 2.080 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.260 0.173 0.116 0.095 0.074 0.055 0.036 0.027
0.45 23.400 11.700 5.850 3.900 2.925 2.340 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.293 0.195 0.130 0.106 0.084 0.062 0.040 0.030
0.50 26.000 13.000 6.500 4.333 3.250 2.600 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.325 0.217 0.144 0.118 0.093 0.068 0.045 0.033
0.55 28.600 14.300 7.150 4.767 3.575 2.860 1.430 0.953 0.715 0.477 0.358 0.238 0.159 0.130 0.102 0.075 0.049 0.037
0.60 31.200 15.600 7.800 5.200 3.900 3.120 1.560 1.040 0.780 0.520 0.390 0.260 0.173 0.142 0.111 0.082 0.054 0.040
0.65 33.800 16.900 8.450 5.633 4.225 3.380 1.690 1.127 0.845 0.563 0.423 0.282 0.188 0.154 0.121 0.089 0.058 0.043
0.70 36.400 18.200 9.100 6.067 4.550 3.640 1.820 1.213 0.910 0.607 0.455 0.303 0.202 0.165 0.130 0.096 0.063 0.047
0.75 39.000 19.500 9.750 6.500 4.875 3.900 1.950 1.300 0.975 0.650 0.488 0.325 0.217 0.177 0.139 0.103 0.067 0.050
0.80 41.600 20.800 10.400 6.933 5.200 4.160 2.080 1.387 1.040 0.693 0.520 0.347 0.231 0.189 0.149 0.109 0.072 0.053
0.85 44.200 22.100 11.050 7.367 5.525 4.420 2.210 1.473 1.105 0.737 0.553 0.368 0.246 0.201 0.158 0.116 0.076 0.057
0.90 46.800 23.400 11.700 7.800 5.850 4.680 2.340 1.560 1.170 0.780 0.585 0.390 0.260 0.213 0.167 0.123 0.081 0.060
0.95 49.400 24.700 12.350 8.233 6.175 4.940 2.470 1.647 1.235 0.823 0.618 0.412 0.274 0.225 0.176 0.130 0.085 0.063
1.00 52.000 26.000 13.000 8.667 6.500 5.200 2.600 1.733 1.300 0.867 0.650 0.433 0.289 0.236 0.186 0.137 0.090 0.067
1.05 54.600 27.300 13.650 9.100 6.825 5.460 2.730 1.820 1.365 0.910 0.683 0.455 0.303 0.248 0.195 0.144 0.094 0.070

Special very inverse curve

II.2. ANSI CURVES

2B
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the following types:
 Normal Inverse characteristic

 Very Inverse characteristic
 Extremely Inverse characteristic
 Moderately Inverse characteristic
These curves respond to the general formula:
B D E tr
T M A TDROPOUT : M
I 2 3 2
C I I I
I0 C C 1
I0 I0 I0
being:
 T : Trip time (sec)

 TDROPOUT : drop time (sec)
 M : multiplier ("time index"). Valid range from 0.5 to 30.0 in 0.1 steps
 I: Measured current
 Io: Pickup current setting
 A,B,C,D,E tr, constants that depend upon the type of curve:
Constants Inverse charact. Very inverse Extrem. inverse Moderat. inverse

A 0.0274 0.0615 0.0399 0.1735
B 2.2614 0.7989 0.2294 0.6791
C 0.3000 0.3400 0.5000 0.8000
D -4.1899 -0.2840 3.0094 -0.0800
E 9.1272 4.0505 0.7222 0.1271
tr 0.99 4.678 6.008 1.2
Below, the corresponding curve for the indexes 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0 and 30.0 are represented
for every characteristic type. Take into account that between every two curves differentiated in 1.0 there are other 9 curves.

Inverse normal curve
B D E tr
T M A TDROPOUT : M
I 2 3 2
C I I I
I0 C C 1
I0 I0 I0
A = 0.0274, B = 2.2614, C = 0.3000, D = -4.1899, E = 9.1272 tr = 0.99
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 0.495 0.528 0.660 1.131 8.614 7.067 4.944 3.613 2.142 0.883 0.523 0.377 0.203 0.113 0.066 0.041
1.0 0.990 1.056 1.320 2.263 17.229 14.134 9.888 7.226 4.284 1.766 1.047 0.754 0.407 0.226 0.133 0.082
2.0 1.980 2.112 2.640 4.526 34.457 28.268 19.775 14.452 8.568 3.531 2.094 1.508 0.814 0.452 0.265 0.164
3.0 2.970 3.168 3.960 6.789 51.686 42.402 29.663 21.678 12.853 5.297 3.140 2.262 1.220 0.678 0.398 0.246
4.0 3.960 4.224 5.280 9.051 68.915 56.536 39.550 28.904 17.137 7.062 4.187 3.016 1.627 0.904 0.530 0.327
5.0 4.950 5.280 6.600 11.314 86.144 70.670 49.438 36.131 21.421 8.828 5.234 3.770 2.034 1.130 0.663 0.409
6.0 5.940 6.336 7.920 13.577 103.372 84.804 59.325 43.357 25.705 10.594 6.281 4.524 2.441 1.356 0.796 0.491
7.0 6.930 7.392 9.240 15.840 120.601 98.938 69.213 50.583 29.989 12.359 7.328 5.277 2.848 1.582 0.928 0.573
8.0 7.920 8.448 10.560 18.103 137.830 113.072 79.100 57.809 34.274 14.125 8.374 6.031 3.254 1.808 1.061 0.655
9.0 8.910 9.504 11.880 20.366 155.059 127.206 88.988 65.035 38.558 15.890 9.421 6.785 3.661 2.034 1.193 0.737
10.0 9.900 10.560 13.200 22.629 172.287 141.340 98.875 72.261 42.842 17.656 10.468 7.539 4.068 2.260 1.326 0.818
11.0 10.890 11.616 14.520 24.891 189.516 155.474 108.763 79.487 47.126 19.422 11.515 8.293 4.475 2.486 1.458 0.900
12.0 11.880 12.672 15.840 27.154 206.745 169.608 118.650 86.713 51.410 21.187 12.562 9.047 4.881 2.712 1.591 0.982
13.0 12.870 13.728 17.160 29.417 223.974 183.742 128.538 93.939 55.694 22.953 13.608 9.801 5.288 2.938 1.724 1.064
14.0 13.860 14.784 18.480 31.680 241.202 197.876 138.425 101.165 59.979 24.719 14.655 10.555 5.695 3.164 1.856 1.146
15.0 14.850 15.840 19.800 33.943 258.431 212.010 148.313 108.392 64.263 26.484 15.702 11.309 6.102 3.390 1.989 1.228
16.0 15.840 16.896 21.120 36.206 275.660 226.144 158.200 115.618 68.547 28.250 16.749 12.063 6.509 3.616 2.121 1.310
17.0 16.830 17.952 22.440 38.469 292.889 240.278 168.088 122.844 72.831 30.015 17.796 12.817 6.915 3.842 2.254 1.391
18.0 17.820 19.008 23.760 40.731 310.117 254.412 177.975 130.070 77.115 31.781 18.842 13.571 7.322 4.068 2.387 1.473
19.0 18.810 20.064 25.080 42.994 327.346 268.546 187.863 137.296 81.400 33.547 19.889 14.324 7.729 4.294 2.519 1.555
20.0 19.800 21.120 26.400 45.257 344.575 282.680 197.750 144.522 85.684 35.312 20.936 15.078 8.136 4.520 2.652 1.637
21.0 20.790 22.176 27.720 47.520 361.803 296.814 207.638 151.748 89.968 37.078 21.983 15.832 8.543 4.746 2.784 1.719
22.0 21.780 23.232 29.040 49.783 379.032 310.948 217.525 158.974 94.252 38.843 23.030 16.586 8.949 4.972 2.917 1.801
23.0 22.770 24.288 30.360 52.046 396.261 325.082 227.413 166.200 98.536 40.609 24.076 17.340 9.356 5.198 3.050 1.883
24.0 23.760 25.344 31.680 54.309 413.490 339.216 237.300 173.426 102.821 42.375 25.123 18.094 9.763 5.424 3.182 1.964
25.0 24.750 26.400 33.000 56.571 430.718 353.350 247.188 180.653 107.105 44.140 26.170 18.848 10.170 5.650 3.315 2.046
26.0 25.740 27.456 34.320 58.834 447.947 367.484 257.075 187.879 111.389 45.906 27.217 19.602 10.576 5.876 3.447 2.128
27.0 26.730 28.512 35.640 61.097 465.176 381.618 266.963 195.105 115.673 47.671 28.264 20.356 10.983 6.102 3.580 2.210
28.0 27.720 29.568 36.960 63.360 482.405 395.752 276.850 202.331 119.957 49.437 29.310 21.110 11.390 6.328 3.713 2.292
29.0 28.710 30.624 38.280 65.623 499.633 409.886 286.738 209.557 124.242 51.203 30.357 21.864 11.797 6.554 3.845 2.374
30.0 29.700 31.680 39.600 67.886 516.862 424.020 296.625 216.783 128.526 52.968 31.404 22.618 12.204 6.780 3.978 2.455

Inverse characteristic

Very inverse curve
B D E tr
T M A TDROPOUT : M
I 2 3 2
C I I I
I0 C C 1
I0 I0 I0
A = 0.0615, B = 0.7989, C = 0.3400, D = -0.2840, E = 4.0505 tr = 4.678
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 2.339 2.495 3.119 5.346 5.970 4.924 3.487 2.582 1.567 0.663 0.386 0.268 0.130 0.073 0.051 0.041
1.0 4.678 4.990 6.237 10.693 11.940 9.848 6.975 5.164 3.134 1.325 0.772 0.537 0.260 0.146 0.102 0.082
2.0 9.356 9.980 12.475 21.385 23.881 19.696 13.949 10.327 6.268 2.650 1.545 1.074 0.520 0.291 0.204 0.163
3.0 14.034 14.970 18.712 32.078 35.821 29.544 20.924 15.491 9.402 3.976 2.317 1.611 0.780 0.437 0.306 0.245
4.0 18.712 19.959 24.949 42.770 47.762 39.393 27.898 20.655 12.537 5.301 3.090 2.148 1.040 0.583 0.408 0.326
5.0 23.390 24.949 31.187 53.463 59.702 49.241 34.873 25.819 15.671 6.626 3.862 2.685 1.299 0.728 0.510 0.408
6.0 28.068 29.939 37.424 64.155 71.642 59.089 41.848 30.982 18.805 7.951 4.635 3.221 1.559 0.874 0.612 0.489
7.0 32.746 34.929 43.661 74.848 83.583 68.937 48.822 36.146 21.939 9.276 5.407 3.758 1.819 1.020 0.714 0.571
8.0 37.424 39.919 49.899 85.541 95.523 78.785 55.797 41.310 25.073 10.602 6.179 4.295 2.079 1.165 0.815 0.652
9.0 42.102 44.909 56.136 96.233 107.464 88.633 62.771 46.474 28.207 11.927 6.952 4.832 2.339 1.311 0.917 0.734
10.0 46.780 49.899 62.373 106.926 119.404 98.481 69.746 51.637 31.341 13.252 7.724 5.369 2.599 1.457 1.019 0.815
11.0 51.458 54.889 68.611 117.618 131.344 108.330 76.721 56.801 34.475 14.577 8.497 5.906 2.859 1.602 1.121 0.897
12.0 56.136 59.878 74.848 128.311 143.285 118.178 83.695 61.965 37.610 15.902 9.269 6.443 3.119 1.748 1.223 0.978
13.0 60.814 64.868 81.085 139.003 155.225 128.026 90.670 67.128 40.744 17.228 10.041 6.980 3.379 1.893 1.325 1.060
14.0 65.492 69.858 87.323 149.696 167.165 137.874 97.645 72.292 43.878 18.553 10.814 7.517 3.638 2.039 1.427 1.141
15.0 70.170 74.848 93.560 160.389 179.106 147.722 104.619 77.456 47.012 19.878 11.586 8.054 3.898 2.185 1.529 1.223
16.0 74.848 79.838 99.797 171.081 191.046 157.570 111.594 82.620 50.146 21.203 12.359 8.591 4.158 2.330 1.631 1.304
17.0 79.526 84.828 106.035 181.774 202.987 167.419 118.568 87.783 53.280 22.528 13.131 9.127 4.418 2.476 1.733 1.386
18.0 84.204 89.818 112.272 192.466 214.927 177.267 125.543 92.947 56.414 23.853 13.904 9.664 4.678 2.622 1.835 1.468
19.0 88.882 94.807 118.509 203.159 226.867 187.115 132.518 98.111 59.549 25.179 14.676 10.201 4.938 2.767 1.937 1.549
20.0 93.560 99.797 124.747 213.851 238.808 196.963 139.492 103.275 62.683 26.504 15.448 10.738 5.198 2.913 2.039 1.631
21.0 98.238 104.787 130.984 224.544 250.748 206.811 146.467 108.438 65.817 27.829 16.221 11.275 5.458 3.059 2.141 1.712
22.0 102.916 109.777 137.221 235.237 262.689 216.659 153.441 113.602 68.951 29.154 16.993 11.812 5.718 3.204 2.243 1.794
23.0 107.594 114.767 143.459 245.929 274.629 226.507 160.416 118.766 72.085 30.479 17.766 12.349 5.977 3.350 2.344 1.875
24.0 112.272 119.757 149.696 256.622 286.569 236.356 167.391 123.930 75.219 31.805 18.538 12.886 6.237 3.496 2.446 1.957
25.0 116.950 124.747 155.933 267.314 298.510 246.204 174.365 129.093 78.353 33.130 19.310 13.423 6.497 3.641 2.548 2.038
26.0 121.628 129.737 162.171 278.007 310.450 256.052 181.340 134.257 81.487 34.455 20.083 13.960 6.757 3.787 2.650 2.120
27.0 126.306 134.726 168.408 288.699 322.391 265.900 188.314 139.421 84.622 35.780 20.855 14.497 7.017 3.933 2.752 2.201
28.0 130.984 139.716 174.645 299.392 334.331 275.748 195.289 144.584 87.756 37.105 21.628 15.034 7.277 4.078 2.854 2.283
29.0 135.662 144.706 180.883 310.085 346.271 285.596 202.264 149.748 90.890 38.431 22.400 15.570 7.537 4.224 2.956 2.364
30.0 140.340 149.696 187.120 320.777 358.212 295.444 209.238 154.912 94.024 39.756 23.173 16.107 7.797 4.370 3.058 2.446

Very inverse characteristic

B D E tr
T M A TDROPOUT : M
I I
2
I
3 2
C C C I
I0 I0 I0 1
I0
A = 0.0399, B = 0.2294, C = 0.5000, D = 3.0094, E = 0.7222 tr = 6.008
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 3.004 3.204 4.005 6.866 7.373 6.063 4.307 3.220 2.000 0.872 0.499 0.330 0.124 0.049 0.030 0.024
1.0 6.008 6.409 8.011 13.733 14.746 12.125 8.615 6.439 4.001 1.744 0.997 0.659 0.247 0.098 0.060 0.048
2.0 12.016 12.817 16.021 27.465 29.492 24.250 17.230 12.879 8.002 3.489 1.994 1.319 0.495 0.196 0.119 0.095
3.0 18.024 19.226 24.032 41.198 44.239 36.376 25.844 19.318 12.003 5.233 2.992 1.978 0.742 0.295 0.179 0.143
4.0 24.032 25.634 32.043 54.930 58.985 48.501 34.459 25.758 16.004 6.977 3.989 2.638 0.990 0.393 0.239 0.191
5.0 30.040 32.043 40.053 68.663 73.731 60.626 43.074 32.197 20.004 8.722 4.986 3.297 1.237 0.491 0.298 0.238
6.0 36.048 38.451 48.064 82.395 88.477 72.751 51.689 38.636 24.005 10.466 5.983 3.956 1.484 0.589 0.358 0.286
7.0 42.056 44.860 56.075 96.128 103.224 84.876 60.303 45.076 28.006 12.210 6.981 4.616 1.732 0.688 0.418 0.334
8.0 48.064 51.268 64.085 109.861 117.970 97.002 68.918 51.515 32.007 13.955 7.978 5.275 1.979 0.786 0.477 0.381
9.0 54.072 57.677 72.096 123.593 132.716 109.127 77.533 57.954 36.008 15.699 8.975 5.934 2.227 0.884 0.537 0.429
10.0 60.080 64.085 80.107 137.326 147.462 121.252 86.148 64.394 40.009 17.443 9.972 6.594 2.474 0.982 0.597 0.476
11.0 66.088 70.494 88.117 151.058 162.208 133.377 94.763 70.833 44.010 19.188 10.969 7.253 2.722 1.081 0.656 0.524
12.0 72.096 76.902 96.128 164.791 176.955 145.502 103.377 77.273 48.011 20.932 11.967 7.913 2.969 1.179 0.716 0.572
13.0 78.104 83.311 104.139 178.523 191.701 157.628 111.992 83.712 52.012 22.676 12.964 8.572 3.216 1.277 0.776 0.619
14.0 84.112 89.719 112.149 192.256 206.447 169.753 120.607 90.151 56.013 24.421 13.961 9.231 3.464 1.375 0.835 0.667
15.0 90.120 96.128 120.160 205.989 221.193 181.878 129.222 96.591 60.013 26.165 14.958 9.891 3.711 1.474 0.895 0.715
16.0 96.128 102.537 128.171 219.721 235.940 194.003 137.837 103.030 64.014 27.909 15.956 10.550 3.959 1.572 0.955 0.762
17.0 102.136 108.945 136.181 233.454 250.686 206.128 146.451 109.470 68.015 29.654 16.953 11.210 4.206 1.670 1.014 0.810
18.0 108.144 115.354 144.192 247.186 265.432 218.254 155.066 115.909 72.016 31.398 17.950 11.869 4.453 1.768 1.074 0.858
19.0 114.152 121.762 152.203 260.919 280.178 230.379 163.681 122.348 76.017 33.142 18.947 12.528 4.701 1.866 1.134 0.905
20.0 120.160 128.171 160.213 274.651 294.924 242.504 172.296 128.788 80.018 34.887 19.944 13.188 4.948 1.965 1.194 0.953
21.0 126.168 134.579 168.224 288.384 309.671 254.629 180.910 135.227 84.019 36.631 20.942 13.847 5.196 2.063 1.253 1.001
22.0 132.176 140.988 176.235 302.117 324.417 266.754 189.525 141.666 88.020 38.375 21.939 14.506 5.443 2.161 1.313 1.048
23.0 138.184 147.396 184.245 315.849 339.163 278.879 198.140 148.106 92.021 40.120 22.936 15.166 5.691 2.259 1.373 1.096
24.0 144.192 153.805 192.256 329.582 353.909 291.005 206.755 154.545 96.022 41.864 23.933 15.825 5.938 2.358 1.432 1.144
25.0 150.200 160.213 200.267 343.314 368.655 303.130 215.370 160.985 100.022 43.608 24.931 16.485 6.185 2.456 1.492 1.191
26.0 156.208 166.622 208.277 357.047 383.402 315.255 223.984 167.424 104.023 45.353 25.928 17.144 6.433 2.554 1.552 1.239
27.0 162.216 173.030 216.288 370.779 398.148 327.380 232.599 173.863 108.024 47.097 26.925 17.803 6.680 2.652 1.611 1.286
28.0 168.224 179.439 224.299 384.512 412.894 339.505 241.214 180.303 112.025 48.841 27.922 18.463 6.928 2.751 1.671 1.334
29.0 174.232 185.847 232.309 398.245 427.640 351.631 249.829 186.742 116.026 50.586 28.920 19.122 7.175 2.849 1.731 1.382
30.0 180.240 192.256 240.320 411.977 442.387 363.756 258.444 193.182 120.027 52.330 29.917 19.782 7.422 2.947 1.790 1.429

Extremely inverse characteristic

Moderately inverse curve
B D E tr
T M A TDROPOUT : M
I 2 3 2
C I I I
I0 C C 1
I0 I0
I0
A = 0.1735, B = 0.6791, C = 0.8000, D = -0.0800, E = 0.1271 tr = 1.2
M \ I/Io 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 40.00
0.5 0.600 0.640 0.800 1.371 4.872 3.128 1.679 1.114 0.675 0.379 0.286 0.239 0.166 0.123 0.104 0.095
1.0 1.200 1.280 1.600 2.743 9.744 6.256 3.357 2.229 1.351 0.757 0.571 0.478 0.332 0.247 0.209 0.191
2.0 2.400 2.560 3.200 5.486 19.489 12.511 6.714 4.457 2.702 1.515 1.142 0.955 0.665 0.493 0.417 0.382
3.0 3.600 3.840 4.800 8.229 29.233 18.767 10.072 6.686 4.053 2.272 1.713 1.433 0.997 0.740 0.626 0.572
4.0 4.800 5.120 6.400 10.971 38.977 25.023 13.429 8.914 5.404 3.030 2.285 1.910 1.329 0.986 0.835 0.763
5.0 6.000 6.400 8.000 13.714 48.722 31.278 16.786 11.143 6.755 3.787 2.856 2.388 1.662 1.233 1.043 0.954
6.0 7.200 7.680 9.600 16.457 58.466 37.534 20.143 13.371 8.106 4.544 3.427 2.866 1.994 1.479 1.252 1.145
7.0 8.400 8.960 11.200 19.200 68.210 43.790 23.500 15.600 9.457 5.302 3.998 3.343 2.327 1.726 1.461 1.335
8.0 9.600 10.240 12.800 21.943 77.954 50.045 26.857 17.828 10.807 6.059 4.569 3.821 2.659 1.972 1.669 1.526
9.0 10.800 11.520 14.400 24.686 87.699 56.301 30.215 20.057 12.158 6.817 5.140 4.298 2.991 2.219 1.878 1.717
10.0 12.000 12.800 16.000 27.429 97.443 62.557 33.572 22.285 13.509 7.574 5.712 4.776 3.324 2.465 2.087 1.908
11.0 13.200 14.080 17.600 30.171 107.187 68.813 36.929 24.514 14.860 8.332 6.283 5.253 3.656 2.712 2.295 2.099
12.0 14.400 15.360 19.200 32.914 116.932 75.068 40.286 26.742 16.211 9.089 6.854 5.731 3.988 2.958 2.504 2.289
13.0 15.600 16.640 20.800 35.657 126.676 81.324 43.643 28.971 17.562 9.846 7.425 6.209 4.321 3.205 2.713 2.480
14.0 16.800 17.920 22.400 38.400 136.420 87.580 47.001 31.199 18.913 10.604 7.996 6.686 4.653 3.451 2.921 2.671
15.0 18.000 19.200 24.000 41.143 146.165 93.835 50.358 33.428 20.264 11.361 8.567 7.164 4.986 3.698 3.130 2.862
16.0 19.200 20.480 25.600 43.886 155.909 100.091 53.715 35.656 21.615 12.119 9.139 7.641 5.318 3.945 3.339 3.052
17.0 20.400 21.760 27.200 46.629 165.653 106.347 57.072 37.885 22.966 12.876 9.710 8.119 5.650 4.191 3.547 3.243
18.0 21.600 23.040 28.800 49.371 175.398 112.602 60.429 40.113 24.317 13.633 10.281 8.597 5.983 4.438 3.756 3.434
19.0 22.800 24.320 30.400 52.114 185.142 118.858 63.787 42.342 25.668 14.391 10.852 9.074 6.315 4.684 3.965 3.625
20.0 24.000 25.600 32.000 54.857 194.886 125.114 67.144 44.570 27.019 15.148 11.423 9.552 6.647 4.931 4.173 3.815
21.0 25.200 26.880 33.600 57.600 204.630 131.369 70.501 46.799 28.370 15.906 11.994 10.029 6.980 5.177 4.382 4.006
22.0 26.400 28.160 35.200 60.343 214.375 137.625 73.858 49.027 29.720 16.663 12.565 10.507 7.312 5.424 4.591 4.197
23.0 27.600 29.440 36.800 63.086 224.119 143.881 77.215 51.256 31.071 17.421 13.137 10.985 7.645 5.670 4.799 4.388
24.0 28.800 30.720 38.400 65.829 233.863 150.136 80.572 53.484 32.422 18.178 13.708 11.462 7.977 5.917 5.008 4.579
25.0 30.000 32.000 40.000 68.571 243.608 156.392 83.930 55.713 33.773 18.935 14.279 11.940 8.309 6.163 5.217 4.769
26.0 31.200 33.280 41.600 71.314 253.352 162.648 87.287 57.941 35.124 19.693 14.850 12.417 8.642 6.410 5.425 4.960
27.0 32.400 34.560 43.200 74.057 263.096 168.903 90.644 60.170 36.475 20.450 15.421 12.895 8.974 6.656 5.634 5.151
28.0 33.600 35.840 44.800 76.800 272.841 175.159 94.001 62.398 37.826 21.208 15.992 13.373 9.306 6.903 5.843 5.342
29.0 34.800 37.120 46.400 79.543 282.585 181.415 97.358 64.627 39.177 21.965 16.564 13.850 9.639 7.149 6.051 5.532
30.0 36.000 38.400 48.000 82.286 292.329 187.671 100.716 66.855 40.528 22.722 17.135 14.328 9.971 7.396 6.260 5.723

Moderately inverse characteristic

II.3. USER CURVE

23B
The corresponding time for every I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020 seconds. These times
correspond to index 1 curve, but as in Curves IEC, the user can program a time index between 0.05 and 1.09 in the
Overcurrent protection setting.
It is not necessary to program all the points of thetemplate The console will assign the time of the first programmed point to
all I/Ia that are lower than itself. It will also assign the time of the last point programmed to all the I/Ia higher than itself. That
is, the diagram will start and finish with horizontal straight lines. The halfway points between two programmed points will be
calculated by the Console as a lineal interpolation between them.
Programming is not allowed for a I/Ia value in a time higher to the corresponding one to I/Ia, that is, increasing lines are not
allowed.
Programmingthe template:

An example is shown below :
I/Ia 2 4 8 12 15
T (s) 200 100 70 50 5

LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
APPENDIX III. LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS

The following list includes all the available signals in the complete PL300 family. For each model of the family only
the signals corresponding to its available functions will be applied.
In the case of Procome Protocol it can be programmed which of the signals are sent to control, as well as the
number they are sent with. The number indicated is that the signals had in the versions it was fixed.
Signal Nº Signal
0 Phase instantaneous pickup (50)
1 Ground instantaneous pickup (50N)
2 Sensitive ground instantaneous pickup (50SN)
3 Phase instantaneous pickup High 1 (50H1)
4 Ground instantaneous pickup High 1 (50NH1)
5 Phase instantaneous pickup High 2 (50H2)
6 Ground instantaneous pickup High 2 (50NH2)
7 Sensitive ground instantaneous pickup High 2 (50NSH2)
8 Phase timed pickup (51)
9 Ground timed pickup (51N)
10 Sensitive ground timed pickup (51SN)
11 Phase timed pickup High 2 (51H2)
12 Ground timed pickup High 2 (51NH2)
13 Sensitive ground timed pickup High 2 (51SNH2)
14 Isolated ground pickup (67IN)
15 Thermal image alarm (49)
16 Phase instantaneous trip (50)
17 Ground instantaneous trip (50N)
18 Sensitive ground instantaneous trip (50SN)
19 Phase instantaneous trip High 1 (50H1)
20 Ground instantaneous trip High 1 (50NH1)
21 Phase instantaneous trip High 2 (50H2)
22 Ground instantaneous trip High 2 (50NH2)
23 Sensitive ground instantaneous trip High 2 (50NSH2)
24 Phase timed trip (51)
25 Ground timed trip (51N)
26 Sensitive ground timed trip (51SN)
27 Phase timed trip High 2 (51H2)
28 Ground timed trip High 2 (51NH2)
29 Sensitive ground timed trip High 2 (51SNH2)
30 Isolated ground trip (67IN)
31 Thermal image trip (49)
32 Unbalance timed trip (46T)
33 Unbalance instantaneous trip (46)
34 Broken conductor trip (46BC)
35 Breaker failure trip (50BF)
36 Unbalance timed pickup (46T)
37 Unbalance instantaneous pickup (46)
38 Broken conductor pickup (46BC)
39 Breaker failure pickup (50BF)
40 Activation 50V (50V)
41 Activation 51V (51V)
42 Cold Load Pickup (CLP)
43 Overcurrent pickup (50x/51x/46x)
44 Overcurrent trip (50x/51x/46x)
45 Phase A overcurrent trip (50A/51A)
46 Phase B overcurrent trip (50B/51B)

Signal Nº Signal
47 Phase C overcurrent trip (50C/51C)
48 Phase overvoltage timed trip (59)
49 Phase undervoltage timed trip (27)
50 Phase overvoltage instantaneous trip (59)
51 Phase undervoltage instantaneous trip (27)
52 Ground overvoltage timed trip (64T)
53 Ground overvoltage instantaneous trip (64)
54 Voltage unbalance trip (47T)
55 Phase reversal trip (47)
56 Phase overvoltage timed pickup (59)
57 Phase undervoltage timed pickup (27)
58 Phase overvoltage instantaneous pickup (59)
59 Phase undervoltage instantaneous pickup (27)
60 Ground overvoltage timed pickup (64T)
61 Ground overvoltage instantaneous pickup (64)
62 Voltage unbalance pickup (47T)
63 Phase reversal pickup (47)
64 Relay in service
65 Recloser in service
66 Ongoing cycle
67 Definitive trip
68 Excessive number of trips
69 Recloser locking
70 Retrolocking (50x)
71 kI2 exceeded (average 3 poles)
72 kI2 exceeded pole A
73 kI2 exceeded pole B
74 kI2 exceeded pole C
75 Open springs automatism
76 Closure permission by syncrocheck (25)
77 Instantaneous cancellation output (of the recloser)
78 Voltage pickup (27/59/64/47)
79 Voltage trip (27/59/64/47)
80 Digital input 1
81 Digital input 2
82 Digital input 3
83 Digital input 4
84 Digital input 5
85 Digital input 6
86 Digital input 7
87 Digital input 8
88 Digital output 1
89 Digital output 2
90 Digital output 3
91 Digital output 4
92 Digital output 5
93 Digital output 6
94 Digital output 7
95 Settings modified by 51 V (mode 1)
96 Digital input 9
97 Digital input 10
98 Digital input 11
99 Digital input 12
100 Digital input 13
105 Digital output 8

Signal Nº Signal
112 Logic output 1
113 logic output 2
114 Logic output 3
115 Logic output 4
116 Logic output 5
117 Logic output 6
118 Logic output 7
119 Logic output 8
120 Logic output 9
121 Logic output 10
122 Phase HIGH CURRENT pickup (50HC)
123 Ground HIGH CURRENT pickup (50NHC)
124 Phase HIGH CURRENT trip (50HC)
125 Ground HIGH CURRENT trip (50NHC)
126 Reclosure
127 Automatism: Voltage presence
128 Breaker open failure
129 Breaker close failure
130 Breaker close command
131 Breaker open command
132 General pickup
133 General trip
134 Breaker closed (52status)
135 Oscillograph recorder pickup
136 Fuse failure pickup
137 Fuse failure activation
138 LOCAL status
139 Trip circuit 1 failure
140 Trip circuit 2 failure
141 Close circuit 1 failure
142 Close circuit 2 failure
143 HW status
144 Minimum power trip
145 Maximum power trip High
146 Maximum power trip Low
147 Power reversal trip High
148 Power reversal trip Low
149 Reactive power reversal trip High
150 Reactive power reversal trip Low
151 Power trip
152 Minimum power pickup
153 Maximum power trip pickup High
154 Maximum power trip pickup Low
155 Power reversal pickup High
156 Power reversal pickup Low
157 Reactive power reversal pickup High
158 Reactive power reversal pickup Low
159 Power pickup
160 Frequency trip level 1
165 df/dt trip level 1

Signal Nº Signal
169 Frequency pickup level 1
174 Frequency trip
175 Trip by df/dt
176 Phase instantaneous trip Zone 2 (50Z2)
177 Phase instantaneous trip Zone 3 (50Z3)
178 Ground instantaneous trip Zone 2 (50NZ2)
179 Ground instantaneous trip Zone 3 (50NZ3)
180 Phase instantaneous pickup Zone 2 (50Z2)
181 Phase instantaneous pickup Zone 3 (50Z3)
182 Ground instantaneous pickup Zone 2 (50NZ2)
183 Ground instantaneous pickup Zone 3 (50NZ3)
184 Breaker failure pickup phase A
185 Breaker failure pickup phase B
186 Breaker failure pickup phase C
187 Breaker failure pickup ground
188 Breaker failure trip phase A
189 Breaker failure trip phase B
190 Breaker failure trip phase C
191 Breaker failure trip ground
192 Minimum apparent power pickup
193 Maximum apparent power pickup High
194 Maximum apparent power pickup Low
195 Minimum apparent power trip
196 Maximum apparent power trip High
197 Maximum apparent power trip Low
198 50BF-Retrip. (Breaker failure function)
199 50BF-Retrip phase A
200 50BF-Retrip phase B
201 50BF-Retrip phase C
202 50BF-Dead zone pickup
203 50BF-Dead zone trip
204 50BF-BF in load pickup
205 50BF-BF in load 2 trip
206 50BF-BF in Load 1 trip
207 50BF-Load 1 trip phase A
208 50BF-Load 1 trip phase B
209 50BF-Load 1 trip phase C
210 52-Breaker close failure A
211 52-Breaker close failure B
212 52-Breaker close failure C
213 50BF-Internal arc pickup (I)
214 50BF-Internal arc trip (I)
215 50BF-Arc pickup phase A (I)
216 50BF-Arc pickup phase B (I)
217 50BF-Arc pickup phase C (I)
218 50BF-Arc trip phase A (I)
219 50BF-Arc trip phase B (I)
220 50BF-Arc trip phase C (I)
221 50BF-Flashover pickup Pole A
222 50BF-Flashover pickup Pole B
223 50BF-Flashover pickup Pole C
224 50BF-Flash 1 trip Pole A
225 50BF-Flash 1 trip Pole B
226 50BF-Flash 1 trip Pole C

Signal Nº Signal
227 50BF-Flash 2 trip Pole A
228 50BF-Flash 2 trip Pole B
229 50BF-Flash 2 trip Pole C
230 50BF-Flashover 1 trip 52
231 50BF-Flashover 2 trip 52
232 85 Teleprotection protection
233 85 Unconditional trip
234 85 RTP Reception
235 85 Teleprotection Emission: ETP
236 85 Teleprotection stop
237 Regulator locking
238 85 Guard signal reception: RSG
239 Counter set to 0
240 Forward phase A
241 Reverse phase A
242 Forward phase B
243 Reverse phase B
244 Forward phase C
245 Reverse phase C
246 Forward Ground
247 Reverse Ground
248 Forward Sens. ground
249 Reverse Sens. ground
250 79f-Freq. Recl. locked
251 79f-Freq. Recl. In service
252 79f-Freq. reclosure
253 79f-Freq. Ongoing cycle
254 79f-Freq. Definitive trip
255 79f-Instantaneous cancellation
256 to 285 Free
286 50BF-trip BF low load
287 50BF- retrip BF low load
288 50BF- pick up BF low load
289 Discordance pick up
290 Discordance trip
291 Definite opening
292 Pole A failure
293 Pole B failure
294 Pole C failure
295 Overcurrent pickup without sensitive neutral
296 Overcurrent trip without sensitive neutral
297 General pickup without sensitive neutral
298 General trip without sensitive neutral
299 Table 1 active
300 Table 2 active
301 Table 3 active
302 Table 4 active
303 Recloser status
304 Status of the phase instantaneous function (low level)
305 Status of the phase instantaneous function H1 (high level)
306 Status of the phase instantaneous function H2 (2nd group)
307 Status of the phase time function
308 Status of the phase time function H2 (2nd group)
309 Status of the ground time function (low level)
310 Status of the ground instantaneous function H1 (high level)
311 Status of the ground instantaneous function H2 (2nd group)
312 Status of the ground time function
313 Status of the ground time function H2 (2nd group)
314 Status of the sensitive neutral instantaneous function
315 Status of the sensitive neutral instantaneous function H2 (2nd group)

Signal Nº Signal
316 Status of the sensitive neutral time function
317 Status of the sensitive neutral time function H2 (2nd group)
318 Status of the time unbalance function
319 Status of the instantaneous unbalance function
320 Status of the breaker conductor function
321 Status of the breaker failure function
322 Status of the isolated ground function
323 Status of the cold load function
324 Exceeded 20 I nominal in phase A
325 Presence of voltage side A
326 Presence of voltage side B
327 On-going cycle 1
331 Manual close security
332 T.1st reclosure security T.
333 2nd reclosure security T.
334 3rd reclosure security T.
335 4th reclosure security T.
336 Signal 1 Relay 1 (Horizontal Communic. between relays)
337 Signal 2 Relay 1
344 Communication failure Relay 1
345 Communication failure Relay 2
346 Test mode
347 Manual closing function locking
348 Protection function locking
349 Command order 8
350 to 351 Reserved
352 FF
353 FR
354 Directional retrolocking
355 Non-directional retrolocking
356 Retrolocking
357 Pretrip
358 Retrotrip
359 Logic 11
360 Logic 12
361 Logic 13
362 Logic 14
363 Logic 15
364 RTS Control
365 Table 5 active
366 Table 6 active
367 Low supply
368 to 380 Free
381 Supply higher than the upper threshold
382 Supply lower than the low threshold
383 Temperature higher than the upper threshold
384 Temperature lower than the low threshold
385 2nd harmonic restraint phase A
386 2nd harmonic restraint phase B
387 2nd harmonic restraint phase C
388 2nd harmonic restraint phase ground

Signal Nº Signal
389 MHO 1 trip
390 MHO 2 trip
391 MHO 1 alarm
392 MHO 2 alarm
393 MHO 1 undervoltage
394 MHO 2 undervoltage
395 Free
396 Pending events
397 IRIG-B failure
398 Exceeded 2 I nominal
401 Pushbutton I
402 Pushbutton O
403 Pushbutton L/R
404 Pushbutton
405 Pushbutton 0
406 Pushbutton 1
407 Pushbutton 2
408 Pushbutton 3
409 Pushbutton 4
410 Pushbutton 5
411 Pushbutton 6
412 Pushbutton 7
413 Pushbutton 8
414 Pushbutton 9
415 Close locking through DI
416 to 479 Free
480 25-voltage difference
481 25-current difference
482 25-angle difference
483 25-Syncrocheck locked
484 79I-Recloser in idle
485 to 496 Free
497 Close locking by command or digital input
498 Status-Sequence coordination
499 Ground status
500 Sensitive neutral status
501 Phase instantaneous status
502 Neutral, sensitive neutral status
503 to 511 Free
512 Exceeded 2*In in phase B
516 Exceeded 2*In in phase C
520 Signal 1 Relay 2 (Horizontal Communic. among relays)
528 to 536 Reserved
537 Command order 1
538 Command order 2

Signal Nº Signal
539 Command order 3
540 Command order 4
541 Command order 5
542 Command order 6
543 Command order 7
544 to 573 Free
574 Directional phase Trip
575 Directional neutral Trip
576 Directional Sen.n Trip
577 Directional nais Trip
578 Directional N/NS/Nais Trip
579 Directional Trip
580 Directional Unbalance Trip
581 Status of the Thermal Imagen
582 Status of the Syncrocheck
583 to 591 Free
592 27-UnderV Pick.Phase A
593 27-UnderV Pick.Phase B
594 27-UnderV Pick.Phase C
595 27-UnderV Trip Phase A
596 27-UnderV Trip Phase B
597 27-UnderV Trip Phase C
598 59-OverV Pick.Phase A
599 59-OverV Pick.Phase B
600 59-OverV Pick.Phase C
601 59-OverV Trip Phase A
602 59-OverV Trip Phase B
603 59-OverV Trip Phase C
604 37-Low Current Pickup L1
605 37-Low Current Trip level 1
606 37-Low Current Pickup L2
607 37-Low Current Trip level 2

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL DNP 3.0 RTU
APPENDIX IV. COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL DNP 3.0 RTU

This function allows communicating with a remote control station, using the communication protocol DNP3 at the level of control
messages.
The unit behaves as a remote position RTU.
The format by character is:
 1 start bit.
 8 data bits.
 1 parity bit configurable between none, even and odd parity.
 1 stop bit, configurable between 1 and 2 stop bit.
The baud rate can be selected among 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bauds.
IV.1. SETTINGS
24B
Associated text Meaning

Word type parameter. It allows identifying the number of remote station. Range 0 - 65532.
LCU. ADDRESS
Default value 1.
Word type parameter. It allows identifying the master station address. Range 0 - 65532.
MASTER ADDRESS
Default value 0.
This word type parameter allows to set the baud rate : 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600
BAUD RATE 19200 - 38400) bauds.
Default value 9600
It allows configuring the parity to be used in the transmission. Even, odd or none parity.
PARITY T.
The advised default value is none parity, as indicated in DNP3 protocol.
It allows selecting the number of stop bits. 1 or 2 stop bits
STOP BITS
The advised default value is 1 stop bit, as indicated in DNP3 protocol.
When its value is YES the RTS signal is kept permanently active.
FIXED RTS
Default value NO.
It allows to select if the control if pins RTS and CTS is performed: NO, RTS+CTS, RTS
RTS AND CTS
Default value NO
It indicates the time in milliseconds, which is being waited for the CTS activation, after the RTS
activation.
CTS WAIT T.
Range 0 - 3000.
Default value 200.
It indicates the time, in milliseconds, which is being waited, once activated the CTS, to start the
transmission with the objective to stabilise the carrier.
POR. WAIT T.
Range 0 - 3000.
Default value 40.
Waiting time to transmit after reception, in milliseconds.
STABIL T. Range 0 - 3000.
Default value 40.
Time elapsed from the moment the last character is sent until the RTS is deactivated (in
milliseconds).
POSTRANS T.
Range 0 - 3000.
Default value 40.
Waiting timeout to confirm the csc link.
ACK WAIT T. Range 0 - 1000.
Default value 500.
Required time in minutes to ask the master for synchronization
SYNCHRON. T Range 0 - 10.
Default value 0.
Indicates if confirm is required al link level.
SI = confirm is required.
ACK LINK
NO = confirm. is not required
Default value NO.
Maximum number of bytes in an application segment. Range 1024 - 3072.
APLIC. BYTES No
Default value 1024.


Transfer time of the default changes. It can take the following values:
BOTH = sent with absolute and relative values.
WITHOUT TIME = sent without time.
CHANGES TIME
ABSOLUTE = sent with absolute time.
RELATIVE = sent with relative time.
Default value ABSOLUTE.
It indicates if the counters are frozen with or without time. It performs only in the case that a 0
variation is requested.
FROZEN T. WITH TIME = sent with time.
WITHOUT TIME = sent without time.
Default value WITH TIME.
It indicates if in the answer message to a class 0 data request, the objects of digital signals,
measurements and counters with or without status are sent.
Value 0->it does not send status for any signal.
bit 0-> to one it is sent all with status.
bit 1->it sends digital signals with status.
STATUS SENDING
bit 2->it sends measurements with status.
bit 3->it sends counters with status.
bit 4->it sends frozen counters with status.
There are two ways to send everything with status: to write a 1 or a 14
Default value 0
It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the
request, and as non requested changes.
MEAS. BIT No. 16 BITS = they are sent in 16 bits.
32 BITS = they are sent in 32 bits.
Default value 16 BITS.
It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the
request, and as non requested changes.
COUNTER BIT No. 16 BITS = it is sent in 16 bits.
32 BITS = it is sent in 32 bits.
Default value 32 BITS.
At value YES it allows the transfer of non requested messages with class data 1, 2 or 3.
NOT REQ. MESS.
Default value NO.
At value YES a treatment is performed to prevent collisions. At value NO the DCD is not checked.
PR.COLLISION
Default value NO.
Waiting time set in hundredths of second which the unit waits since it is allowed to transfer through
the DCD. Range 0 - 1000.
COL FIXED T.
Range 0 - 1000.
Default value 10.
Variable waiting time. Depending on the selected value it can be obtained the maximum value which
can be reached by the hundredths of seconds. This value will be a random value between 0 and
such maximum.
COL.VBLE T.
Possible values: 1-3-5-7-15-31-63-127-255
Note: it must be highlighted that the time delay is reset once the DCD is lost.
Default value 7.
It is the time in seconds in which the unit waits to try again the transfer of non requested data, when
it does not receive the link confirmation and the application to an old transfer and its reattempt after
RESENDING T. the answer waiting time.
Range 0 630 seconds
Default value 20.
Maximum number of repetitions of a non requested message. At infinite zero value.
NOT REQ. MAX.
Range 0 - 65535.
NUM.
Default value 0.
It allows activating some particular aspects of the operation.
BIT 0->0x0001 Transfer of actual counters with OBJ=21.
BIT 1->0x0002 Reserve.
BIT 2->0x0004 Transfer of non requested message up to the included IIN every 10 seconds
SPECIAL
BIT 6->0x0040 It does not transfer the restart message when starting.
BIT 7->0x0080 Trip close.
Default value 0.


It indicates the measurements transfer format.
MEASUREMENT COUNTS (4096 is the background scale)
FORMAT SECONDARY (absolute value in the secondary)
PRIMARY(absolute value in the primary)
Indicates whether you want to enable sending DNP report faults.
YES =. Enable sending fault report.
DNP REPORT FAULT
NO = Disable sending fault report.
Default value NO.
IV.2. OPERATION INDICATIONS

25B
IV.2.1 Spontaneous message indicating

273B
At RTU starting, in the case that the transfer of spontaneous non requested messages is enabled, it will be sent a
spontaneous and empty message which activates the bit corresponding to the IIN RESTART requiring application
confirmation.
It will stop transferring when receiving the application confirmation with the correct application sequence number. For the
repetition times associated to this message, they will be applied as for the rest of the spontaneous messages, except in
the number of reattempts before cancelling the message, this means that the setting NOT REQ. MAX is not considered in
this message.
IV.2.2 Synchronization
274B
The bit corresponding to Need Time in the IIN is activated periodically according to the value of the setting SYNCHRON.
T.
IV.2.3 Treatment and detection of digital changes

275B
It is maintained a circular queue of 1024 changes which stores the changes in the signals in order to transfer them to the
control centre. Changes of digital signals by communications can be filtered by configuring 0 class; this can be done for
individual signals or for all.
No changes are detected at the starting of the unit and until it does not start communicating.
The setting ERASE DATA ? does not act over the DNP3 protocol.
IV.2.4 Transfer of spontaneous messages

276B
For the transfer of spontaneous messages, if there are any messages stored in the different classes of changes, the priority
of classes will be followed, this means that the queue class 1 is emptied first, then the class 2 and last the class 3.
If the parameter NOT REQ. MESSAGES at value 1 is not found, no spontaneous message is sent.
A treatment of collisions will be performed depending on the parameter COLLISION PREV. The signal DCD is used along
with the parameters COL. FIXED T and COL.VBLE. T.
In the case that no answer is obtained to the messages of non requested changes, a reattempt will be performed once
expired the time defined by the parameter ACK. WAIT T. Then periodical transfers will be performed according to the
parameter RESEND T. Each time a message is repeated, all the new changes will be included in it, so that the message is
created again at each repetition.
IV.2.5 Particular aspects of the operation

27B
Only one reading or writing order can be selected or executed each time.

The selection of orders and writings will be kept during 15sc.
There is a queue of digital signals changes.
If frozen counters are requested and these have not been frozen previously, they are answered at value 0 and with time set
to 0.
In the event of receiving a request for any system static object and this does not exist, it will be answered up to the IIN
and indicating an unknown object.

IV.3. DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

26B
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Vendor Name: INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION S.A.
Device Name: SIPC
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests Level 3
For Responses Level 3
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is
described in the attached table):
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted 292 Transmitted 1024<>3072( configurable)
Received 292 Received 1024
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
Fixed at 1
Configurable, range __ to __
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable PARAMETER DATA_ACK = 1
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm None Fixed at _________ Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment None Fixed at _________ Variable Configurable
Application Confirm None Fixed at __10 sg____ Variable Configurable
Complete Appl. Response None Fixed at _________ Variable Configurable
Others
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs Never Always Sometimes Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE Never Always Sometimes Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Count > 1 Never Always Sometimes Configurable

Pulse On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Pulse Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch On Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Latch Off Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Clear Queue Never Always Sometimes Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific
requested: variation requested:
Never Never
Only time-tagged Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable to send both, one or the other (attach explanation) explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
Never Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Configurable (attach explanation) Never
Only certain objects When Device Restarts
Sometimes (attach explanation) When Status Flags Change
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Supports Collision Avoidance: Collision Avoidance Detection Method:
Configurable DCD

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Counters Roll Over at:
Default Counter Object/Variation:
No Counters Reported
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
Configurable (attach explanation)
16 Bits
Default Object _________
32 Bits
Default Variation ______
Other Value _____________
Point-by-point list attached
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No
IV.4. IMPLEMENTATION TABLE

27B
REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(slave must parse) (master must parse)
Obj Var Description Func Codes (dec) Qual Codes (hex) Func Codes Qual Codes (hex)
1 0 Binary Input All Variations 1,22 00,01,06, 07,08
1 1 Binary Input 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
1 2 Binary Input with Status 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
1 06,07,08
2 0 Binary Input Change - All Variations
20*,21* 06
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
2 3 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 00,01,06
10 1 Binary Output
10 2 Binary Output Status 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
12 0 Control Block - All Variations
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 3, 4, 5, 6 17, 28 129 Echo of request
12 2 Pattern Control Block
12 3 Pattern Mask
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 1, 7, 8,9, 10,22 00,01,06, 07,08
20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8, 9, 10 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1, 7, 8, 9, 10 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
21 0 Frozen Counters - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06
21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00, 01
21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 1 00,01,06 129 00,01
22 0 Counter Change Event All Variations 1 06,07,08
22 1 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
22 2 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
22 3 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
22 4 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
22 6 16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
22 7 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time
22 8 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time
23 0 Frozen Counter Events All Variations 1 06, 07, 08 129
23 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1 06, 07, 08 129 28
23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
23 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
23 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time
23 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations 1, 22 00,01,06, 07,08
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00,01
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without flag 1 00,01,06, 07,08 129 00, 01
31 0 Frozen Analog Input - All Variations
31 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input
31 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input
31 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze
31 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze
31 5 32-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag
31 6 16-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag
1 06,07,08
32 0 Analog Change Event - All Variations
20*,21* 06
32 1 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
32 2 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 06,07,08 129, 130 28
32 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time ** 129 28
32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
33 0 Frozen Analog Event - All Variations
33 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time
33 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time
33 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time
33 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time
40 0 Analog Output Status - All Variations 1 00, 01, 06
40 1 32-Bit Analog Output Status 1 00, 01, 06 129 00,01
40 2 16-Bit Analog Output Status 1 00, 01, 06 129 00,01
41 1 32-Bit Analog Output Block
41 2 16-Bit Analog Output Block 3, 4, 5, 6 17, 28 129 Echo of request
50 0 Time and Date - All Variations
2 07 quantity = 1
50 1 Time and Date
1 07 quantity = 1 129 07 quantity = 1
50 2 Time and Date with Interval
51 0 Time and Date CTO - All Variations
51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
51 2 Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO 129 07, quantity=1
52 0 Time Delay - All Variations
52 1 Time Delay Coarse
52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 07, quantity=1
60 0 Not Defined
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 06
1 06,07,08
60 2 Class 1 Data
20, 21,22 06
1 06,07,08
60 3 Class 2 Data
20, 21, 22 06
1 06,07,08
60 4 Class 3 Data
20, 21, 22 06

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
70 1 File Identifier
1 00, 01 129 00
80 1 Internal Indications
2 00index=7
81 1
Storage Object
82 1
Device Profile
83 1
Private Registration Object
83 2
Private Registration Object Descriptor
90 1
Application Identifier
100 1
Short Floating Point
100 2
Long Floating Point
100 3
Extended Floating Point
101 1
Small Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
101 2
Medium Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
101 3
Large Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
No Object 13, 14
No Object 23
* IBM compatibility.
** Only used for sending fault report.
IV.5. SIGNAL LIST

28B
IV.5.1 Digital signals

278B
The signals transmitted and the order in which they are transmitted can be programmed among the available ones. The
programming is carried out through the SIPCON/P Protection Console.
In the list below, the digital signals used (changes and states) are shown, indicating the order in which they leave the
factory. Each model will only be applied those corresponding to the functions it has.
ID-DNP Default ID Signal

Programmable 0 Phase instantaneous pick up (50)
Programmable 1 Ground instantaneous pick up (50N)
Programmable 2 Sensitive ground instantaneous pick up (50NS)
Programmable 3 Phase instantaneous pick up High 1 (50H1)
Programmable 4 Ground instantaneous pick up High 1 (50NH1)
Programmable 5 Phase instantaneous pick up High 2 (50H2)
Programmable 6 Ground instantaneous pick up High 2 (50NH2)
Programmable 7 Sensitive ground instantaneous pick up High 2 (50NSH2)
Programmable 8 Phase time pick up (51)
Programmable 9 Ground time pick up (51N)
Programmable 10 Sensitive ground time pick up (51NS)
Programmable 11 Phase time pick up High 2 (51H2)
Programmable 12 Ground time pick up High 2 (51NH2)
Programmable 13 Sensitive ground time pick up High 2 (51NSH2)
Programmable 14 Isolated ground pick up (67NA)
Programmable 15 Thermal image warning(49)
Programmable 16 Phase instantaneous trip (50)
Programmable 17 Ground instantaneous trip (50N)
Programmable 18 Sensitive ground instantaneous trip (50NS)
Programmable 19 Phase instantaneous trip High 1 (50H1)
Programmable 20 Ground instantaneous trip High 1 (50NH1)
Programmable 21 Phase instantaneous trip High 2 (50H2)
Programmable 22 Ground instantaneous trip High 2 (50NH2)
Programmable 23 Sensitive ground instantaneous trip High 2 (50NSH2)


Programmable 24 Phase time trip (50)
Programmable 25 Ground time trip (50N)
Programmable 26 Sensitive ground time trip (50NS)
Programmable 27 Phase time trip High 2 (51H2)
Programmable 28 Ground time trip High 2 (51NH2)
Programmable 29 Sensitive ground time High 2 (51NSH2)
Programmable 30 Isolated ground trip (67NA)
Programmable 31 Thermal image trip (49)
Programmable 32 Unbalance time trip (46T)
Programmable 33 Unbalance instantaneous trip (46I)
Programmable 34 Broken conductor trip (46BC)
Programmable 35 Breaker failure trip (50BF)
Programmable 36 Unbalance time pick up (46T)
Programmable 37 Unbalance instantaneous pick up (46I)
Programmable 38 Broken conductor pickup (46 BC)
Programmable 39 Breaker failure pickup (50BF)
Programmable 40 Activation 50V (50V)
Programmable 41 Activation 51V (51V)
Programmable 42 Cold load pick up (CL)
Programmable 43 Overcurrent pick up (50x/51x/46x)
Programmable 44 Overcurrent trip(50x/51x/46x)
Programmable 45 Overcurrent trip Phase A (50A/51A)
Programmable 46 Overcurrent trip Phase B (50B/51B)
Programmable 47 Overcurrent trip Phase C (50C/51C)
Programmable 48 Phase overvoltage time trip (59)
Programmable 49 Phase undervoltage time trip (59)
Programmable 50 Phase overvoltage instantaneous trip (59)
Programmable 51 Phase undervoltage instantaneous trip (59
Programmable 52 Ground overvoltage time trip (64T)
Programmable 53 Ground overvoltage instantaneous trip (64)
Programmable 54 Voltage unbalance trip (47T)
Programmable 55 Phase reverse trip (47)
Programmable 56 Phase overvoltage time pickup (59)
Programmable 57 Phase undervoltage time pickup (59)
Programmable 58 Phase overvoltage instantaneous pickup (59)
Programmable 59 Phase undervoltage instantaneous pickup (59)
Programmable 60 Ground overvoltage time pickup (64T)
Programmable 61 Ground overvoltage instantaneous pickup (64)
Programmable 62 Voltage unbalance pick up(47T)
Programmable 63 Phase reverse pick up (47)
Programmable 64 Relay in service
Programmable 65 Recloser in service
Programmable 66 On-going cycle
Programmable 67 Definite trip
Programmable 68 Excessive number of trips
Programmable 69 Recloser locking
Programmable 70 Retrolocking (50x)
Programmable 71 Exceeded kI2 (average 3 poles)
Programmable 72 Exceeded kI2 pole A
Programmable 73 Exceeded kI2 pole B
Programmable 74 Exceeded kI2 pole C
Programmable 75 Automation open springs
Programmable 76 Close permission by syncrocheck (25)
Programmable 77 Output by instantaneous cancellation (of the recloser)
Programmable 78 Voltage pick up (27/59/64/47)
Programmable 79 Voltage trip (27/59/64/47)
Programmable 80 Digital input 1


Programmable 88 Digital output 1
Programmable 95 Settings modified by 51 V (mode 1)
Programmable 112 Logic output 1
Programmable 122 High Current phases pick up (50HC)
Programmable 123 High Current Ground pick up (50NHC)
Programmable 124 High Current phases trip (50HC)
Programmable 125 High Current Ground trip (50NHC)
Programmable 126 Recloser
Programmable 127 Automation: Voltage presence
Programmable 128 Breaker open failure
Programmable 129 Breaker close failure
Programmable 130 Breaker close command
Programmable 131 Breaker open command
Programmable 132 General pick up
Programmable 133 General trip
Programmable 134 Close breaker (state 52)
Programmable 135 Oscillograph pickup
Programmable 136 Fuse failure pick up
Programmable 137 Fuse failure activation
Programmable 138 LOCAL state
Programmable 139 Trip circuit 1 failure
Programmable 140 Trip circuit 2 failure
Programmable 141 Close circuit 1 failure
Programmable 142 Close circuit 2 failure
Programmable 143 HW state


Programmable 144 Minimum power trip
Programmable 145 Maximum power trip High
Programmable 146 Maximum power trip Low
Programmable 147 Power reverse trip High
Programmable 148 Power reverse trip Low
Programmable 149 Reactive power reverse trip High
Programmable 150 Reactive power reverse trip Low
Programmable 151 Power trip
Programmable 152 Minimum power pick up
Programmable 153 Maximum power pick up High
Programmable 154 Maximum power pick up Low
Programmable 155 Power reverse pick up High
Programmable 156 Power reverse pick up Low
Programmable 157 Reactive power reverse pick up High
Programmable 158 Reactive power reverse pick up Low
Programmable 159 Power pick up
Programmable 160 Frequency trip level 1
Programmable 165 Trip df/dt level 1
Programmable 169 Frequency pick up level 1
Programmable 174 Frequency trip
Programmable 175 df/dt trip
Programmable 176 Instantaneous trip phases zone 2 (50Z2)
Programmable 177 Instantaneous trip phases zone 3 (50Z3)
Programmable 178 Instantaneous trip ground zone 2 (50NZ2)
Programmable 179 Instantaneous trip ground zone 3 (50NZ3)
Programmable 180 Instantaneous pick up phases zone 2 (50Z2)
Programmable 181 Instantaneous pick up phases zone 3 (50Z3)
Programmable 182 Instantaneous pick up ground zone 2 (50NZ2)
Programmable 183 Instantaneous pick up ground zone 3 (50NZ3)
Programmable 184 Breaker failure pick up BF phase A
Programmable 185 Breaker failure pick up BF phase B
Programmable 186 Breaker failure pick up BF phase C
Programmable 187 Breaker failure pick up BF ground
Programmable 188 Breaker failure trip BF phase A
Programmable 189 Breaker failure trip BF phase B
Programmable 190 Breaker failure trip BF phase C
Programmable 191 Breaker failure trip BF ground
Programmable 192 Apparent minimum power pick up
Programmable 193 Apparent maximum power pick up High
Programmable 194 Apparent maximum power pick up Low
Programmable 195 Apparent minimum power trip
Programmable 196 Apparent maximum power trip High
Programmable 197 Apparent maximum power trip Low
Programmable 198 50BF-Retrip. (Breaker failure function)
Programmable 199 50BF-Retrip Phase A
Programmable 200 50BF- Retrip Phase B
Programmable 201 50BF- Retrip Phase C
Programmable 202 50BF-Dead zone pick up
Programmable 203 50BF-Dead zone trip


Programmable 204 50BF- BF pick up on load
Programmable 205 50BF- BF pick up on load 2
Programmable 206 50BF- BF trip on load 1
Programmable 207 50BF- Trip on load 1 Phase A
Programmable 208 50BF- Trip on load 1 Phase B
Programmable 209 50BF- Trip on load 1 Phase C
Programmable 210 52-Breaker closure failure A
Programmable 211 52- Breaker closure failure B
Programmable 212 52- Breaker closure failure C
Programmable 213 50BF-Flashover pickup (I)
Programmable 214 50BF-Flashover trip (I)
Programmable 215 50BF-Flashover pick up Phase A (I)
Programmable 216 50BF-Flashover pick up Phase B (I)
Programmable 217 50BF-Flashover pick up Phase C (I)
Programmable 218 50BF-Flashover trip Phase A (I)
Programmable 219 50BF- Flashover trip Phase B (I)
Programmable 220 50BF- Flashover trip Phase C (I)
Programmable 221 50BF- Flashover pickup Pole A
Programmable 222 50BF- Flashover pickup Pole B
Programmable 223 50BF- Flashover pickup Pole C
Programmable 224 50BF- Flash trip 1 Pole A
Programmable 225 50BF- Flash trip 1 Pole B
Programmable 226 50BF- Flash trip 1 Pole C
Programmable 227 50BF- Flash trip 2 Pole A
Programmable 228 50BF- Flash trip 2 Pole B
Programmable 229 50BF- Flash trip 2 Pole C
Programmable 230 50BF- Flashover trip 1 52
Programmable 231 50BF- Flashover trip 2 52
Programmable 232 Free
Programmable 240 Forward phase A
Programmable 241 Reverse phase A
Programmable 242 Forward phase B
Programmable 243 Reverse phase B
Programmable 244 Forward phase C
Programmable 245 Reverse phase C
Programmable 246 Forward Ground
Programmable 247 Reverse Ground
Programmable 248 Forward Sens Ground
Programmable 249 Reverse Sens Ground
Programmable 250 79f-Reclos. Freq. Locked
Programmable 251 79f-Reclos.Freq. in service
Programmable 252 79f-Frequency recloser
Programmable 253 79f-Ongoing cycle frequency
Programmable 254 79f-Definitetrip Freq.
Programmable 255 79f-Instantaneous cancellation


Programmable 295 Overcurrent pickup without Sen. ground
Programmable 296 Overcurrent trip without Sen. ground
Programmable 297 General pickup without Sen. ground
Programmable 298 General trip without Sen. ground
Programmable 299 Table 1 active
Programmable 303 Recloser Status
Programmable 304 Phase instantaneous status
Programmable 305 Phase instantaneous status H1
Programmable 306 Phase instantaneous status H2
Programmable 307 Phase time status
Programmable 308 Phase time status H2
Programmable 309 Ground instantaneous status
Programmable 310 Ground instantaneous status H1
Programmable 311 Ground instantaneous status H2
Programmable 312 Ground time status
Programmable 313 Ground time status H2
Programmable 314 Sensitive ground instantaneous status
Programmable 315 Sensitive ground instantaneous H2
Programmable 316 Sensitive ground time status
Programmable 317 Sensitive ground time H2
Programmable 318 Time unbalance status
Programmable 319 Instantaneous unbalance status
Programmable 320 Broken conductor status
Programmable 321 Breaker failure status
Programmable 322 Isolated ground status
Programmable 323 Cold load status


Programmable 324 Over 20*In Phase A
Programmable 325 Presence of voltage on side A
Programmable 326 Presence of voltage on side B
Programmable 327 On-going cycle 1
Programmable 331 Manual close security T.
Programmable 332 1st recloser security T.
Programmable 333 2nd recloser security T.
Programmable 334 3rd recloser security T.
Programmable 335 4th recloser security T.
Programmable 336 Signal 1 Relay 1 (Horizontal Communic. among relays)
Programmable 337 Signal 2 Relay 1
Programmable 344 Communication failure. Relay 1
Programmable 345 Communication failure. Relay 2
Programmable 346 TEST MODE
Programmable 347 Manual closing function locking
Programmable 352 FF
Programmable 353 FR
Programmable 354 Directional retrolocking
Programmable 355 Non-directional retrolocking
Programmable 356 Pre-locking
Programmable 357 Pre-trip
Programmable 358 Retrotrip
Programmable 359 Logic 11
Programmable 364 RTS Control
Programmable 367 Low supply
Programmable 381 Supply higher than the upper threshold


Programmable 382 Supply lower than the low threshold
Programmable 383 Temperature higher than the upper threshold
Programmable 384 Temperature lower than the low threshold
Programmable 385 2nd harmonic restraint phase A
Programmable 386 2nd harmonic restraint phase B
Programmable 387 2nd harmonic restraint phase C
Programmable 388 2nd harmonic restraint ground
Programmable 389 MHO 1 trip
Programmable 390 MHO 2 trip
Programmable 391 MHO 1 alarm
Programmable 392 MHO 2 alarm
Programmable 393 MHO 1 undervoltage
Programmable 394 MHO 2 undervoltage
Programmable 398 Exceeded 2*In in phase A
Programmable 401 Pushbutton I
Programmable 402 Pushbutton O
Programmable 403 Pushbutton L/R
Programmable 404 Pushbutton ·
Programmable 405 Pushbutton 0
Programmable 415 Close locking through DI
Programmable 416 to 479 Free
Programmable 480 25-Voltage difference
Programmable 481 25-Frequency difference
Programmable 482 25-Angle difference
Programmable 483 25-Syncrocheck locked
Programmable 484 79I-Recloser in idle
Programmable 497 Closing locking due to command or digital input
Programmable 498 Status-Sequence coordination
Programmable 499 Status ground
Programmable 500 Status sensitive ground
Programmable 501 Status phase instantaneous
Programmable 502 Status ground instantaneous and sensitive ground


Programmable 512 Exceeded 2*In in phase B
Programmable 516 Exceeded In in phase C
Programmable 517 Exceeded 5*In in phase C
Programmable 520 Signal 1 Relay 2 (Horizontal Communic. among relays)
Programmable 528 Reserved
Programmable 537 Command order 1


Programmable 574 Directional phase Trip
Programmable 575 Directional neutral Trip
Programmable 576 Directional Sen.n Trip
Programmable 577 Directional nais Trip
Programmable 578 Directional N/NS/Nais Trip
Programmable 579 Directional Trip
Programmable 580 Directional Unbalance Trip
Programmable 581 Thermal image status
Programmable 582 Sincrocheck status
Programmable 592 27-UnderV Pick.Phase A
Programmable 593 27-UnderV Pick.Phase B
Programmable 594 27-UnderV Pick.Phase C
Programmable 595 27-UnderV Trip Phase A
Programmable 596 27-UnderV Trip Phase B
Programmable 597 27-UnderV Trip Phase C
Programmable 598 59-OverV Pick.Phase A
Programmable 599 59-OverV Pick.Phase B
Programmable 600 59-OverV Pick.Phase C
Programmable 601 59-OverV Trip Phase A
Programmable 602 59-OverV Trip Phase B
Programmable 603 59-OverV Trip Phase C
Programmable 604 37-Low Current Pickup L1
Programmable 605 37-Low Current Trip level 1
Programmable 606 37-Low Current Pickup L2
Programmable 607 37-Low Current Trip level 2
IV.5.2 Analogue measurements

279B
The signals transmitted and the order in which they are transmitted can be programmed among the available ones. The
programming is carried out through the SIPCON/P Protection Console.
In the list below, the digital signals used (changes and states) are shown, indicating the order in which they leave the
factory. Each model will only be applied those corresponding to the functions it has.
Vn is the programmed nominal current.
DNP ID Default Format Scale range Data

Program. 0 Counts Not allocated
Program. 1 Counts 6 (A) Current maximeter
Program. 2 Counts Vn * 1,2 Syncrocheck module V
Program. 3 Counts Vn * 1,2 Module VA


Program. 4 Counts Vn * 1,2 Module VB
Program. 5 Counts Vn * 1,2 Module VC
Program. 6 Counts Vn * 1,2 Module VAVERAGE
Program. 7 Counts 3 *Vn * 1,2 Module VAB (compound voltage)
Program. 8 Counts 3 *Vn * 1,2 Module VBC (compound voltage)
Program. 9 Counts 3 *Vn * 1,2 Module VCA (compound voltage)
Program. 10 Counts 3 *Vn * 1,2 Module VCAVERAGE (compound voltage)
Program. 11 Counts 6 Module IN
Program. 12 Counts 6 Module IA
Program. 13 Counts 6 Module IB
Program. 14 Counts 6 Module IC
Program. 15 Counts 6 Module IAVERAGE
Program. 16 Counts 3*Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Active power)
Program. 17 Counts 3*Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Reactive power)
Program. 18 Counts 3*Vn * 1,2 * 6 S (apparent power)
Program. 19 Counts 70 Frequency
Program. 20 Counts 70 Syncrocheck Frequency
Program. 21 Counts 1 Power factor phase A
Program. 22 Counts 1 Power factor phase B
Program. 23 Counts 1 Power factor phase C
Program. 24 Counts 1 Average power factor
Program. 25 Counts 100 Distortion in IC
Program. 26 Counts 100 Distortion in IB
Program. 27 Counts 100 Distortion in IA
Program. 28 Counts 100 Distortion in VC
Program. 29 Counts 100 Distortion in VB
Program. 30 Counts 100 Distortion in VA
Program. 31 Counts 100 Average distortion in current
Program. 32 Counts 100 Average distortion in voltage
Program. 33 Counts 6 Sensitive ground current
Program. 34 Counts Vn * 1,2 Ground voltage
Program. 35 Counts 6 Isolated ground current I
Program. 36 Counts 6 Single pole sequence I
Program. 37 Counts 6 Direct sequence I
Program. 38 Counts 6 Reverse sequence I
Program. 39 Counts Vn * 1,2 Single pole sequence V
Program. 40 Counts Vn * 1,2 Direct sequence V
Program. 41 Counts Vn * 1,2 Reverse sequence V
Program. 42 Counts 100 (%) Fault distance
Program. 43 Counts 100 (º) Unit temperature
286 for source of 125/220 Vdc 62.4 for

Program. 44 Counts Vdc measurement
source of 24/48 Vdc
Program. 45 Counts 4095 Total number of opening 52

Program. 46 Counts 4095 Total counter of reclosers
Program. 47 Counts 4095 1st recloser counter
Program. 48 Counts 4095 2nd recloser counter
Program. 49 Counts 4095 3rd recloser counter
Program 50 Counts 4095 4th recloser counter
Program. 51 Counts 4095 Number of opening 52 by trip
Program. 52 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Active Power) phase A
Program. 53 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Active Power) phase B
Program. 54 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Active Power) phase C


Program. 55 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Reactive Power) phase A
Program. 56 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Reactive Power) phase B
Program. 57 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Reactive Power) phase C
Program. 58 Counts 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 P (Maximum active power)
Program. 59 Counts 3 * Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q (Maximum reactive power)
Program. 60 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 P Maximum phase A
Program. 61 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 P Maximum phase B
Program. 62 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 P Maximum phase C
Program. 63 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q Maximum phase A
Program. 64 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q Maximum phase B
Program. 65 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 6 Q Maximum phase C
Program. 66 Counts 200 I last fault phase A
Program. 67 Counts 200 I last fault phase B
Program. 68 Counts 200 I last fault phase C
Program. 69 Counts 200 I last fault ground
Program. 70 Counts 10 I last fault sensitive neutral
Program. 71 Counts 4095 kI2 sum pole A
Program. 72 Counts 4095 kI2 sum pole B
Program. 73 Counts 4095 kI2 sum pole C
Program. 74 Counts Vn * 1,2 * 20 Impedance module
The scale range indicated corresponds to the count number of 4095
IV.5.3 Counters
280B
DNP_ID Format Data

0 Absolute value Positive active energy counter (W+)
1 Absolute value Negative active energy counter (W-)
2 Absolute value Positive reactive energy counter (VAR+)
3 Absolute value Negative reactive energy counter (VAR-)
IV.5.4 Commands
281B
The commands to be sent and their order can be programmed among the following
DNP_ID default Data

Program. 1 Activate relay 1
Program. 22 Open breaker

DNP_ID default Data

Program. 24 Close breaker
Program. 26 Set recloser in service
Program. 28 Set recloser out of service
Program. 30 Set in LOCAL mode
Program. 60 Activate table 1
Program. 87 Switch off LEDs
IV.6. DNP FAULT REPORT

The following table shows the information that is collected for each fault occurred. For each fault are sent all the
measures included in the table. These data are only sent when the setting "DNP Report faults" is set to "YES". All fields of
the table are sent as measures to a Class 2 data read. It responds with the obj 32, var 3. The class of these measures is
not modifiable. Each measure is dated with the date of the fault.
Measurement number Measurement

128 Fault number
129 Fault phase A Current
130 Fault phase B Current
131 Fault phase C Current
132 Fault Neutral Current
133 Fault phase A voltage (Module VA)
134 Fault phase B voltage (Module VB)
135 Fault phase C voltage (Module VC)
136 Fault Neutral voltage (Ground voltage)
137 Relay operating time
138 Breaker operating time
139 Flag of the operated phase
140 Fault Distance
141 Event (trip or start)
142 Operation
IV.6.1 Fault number

Faults are numbered from 0. When the fault queue is reset, the fault number is set to 0.
IV.6.2 Fault current and fault voltage measures

These measures can be transfered in 3 different formats: counts, secondary (calculated) and primary. The format is
selected with the setting "Measurements format" screen "DNP3 general".
IV.5.2Analogue measurements
279B
When secondary format or primary format are choosen, the range and number of decimal places as are fixed with DNP
measurement range is set to 0 the measure will be invalid.

IV.6.3 Relay operating time

This measure gives the time of fault duration in milliseconds. This time covers from start of the fault until it ends.
IV.6.4 Breaker operating time

This measure gives the time it takes to actuate the breaker. It is expressed in milliseconds. This time ranges from the time
the trip is given to the time the relay checks that the breaker has been opened. If at the trip time, the breaker is open, the
time given is 0. If the fault is extinguished and the switch is still closed, the time given is from the trip to the end of the
fault.
IV.6.5 Flag of the operated phase

Displays the phase or phases that have been involved in the relay trip. This is possible when the protection function is
associated with a phase. For example instantaneous and time delay functions.
Protections such as thermal image, frequency and unbalance are not associated with a particular phase. The trip of these
In case that there is no phase associated tripping cause, a zero value is given. A zero value is also indicated as valid.
Phase associated tripping cause Flag

C B A Value Validity
No No No 0 Valid
No No Yes 1 Valid
No Yes No 2 Valid
No Yes Yes 3 Valid
Yes No No 4 Valid
Yes No Yes 5 Valid
Yes Yes No 6 Valid
Yes Yes Yes 7 Valid
IV.6.6 Fault Distance

This measure can be transfered in 3 different formats: counts, secondary (calculated) and primary. The format is selected
with the setting "Measurements format" screen "DNP3 general".
When counts IV.5.2Analogue measurements

279B the background scale value. The
fault distance is given in% of the 120% of the line length.
When secondary format or primary format are choosen, the range and number of decimal places as are fixed with DNP
measurements settings. These settings are on the s
measurement range is set to 0 the measure will be invalid.
The fault locator can work in kilometers or miles. Length units are chosen by the enable setting in the "Fault Locator"
screen. The fault distance is expressed in the units selected for this adjustment.
IV.6.7 Event (trip or start)

Indicates whether the fault has been generated by a pickup of the functions (0) or by a trip (1).
IV.6.8 Operation
Gives the ANSI C.37.2 code of the function triggered. When the fault causes the trip of two or more protection functions,
the table below priority order is followed. The highest priority function is the first listed in the table bellow.

Example: If a "Phase C overcurrent time delay" trip (51) and an "Time delay unit of current negative sequence"
trip (46) occur in the same fault, the value 51 is given. Overcurrent time delay function has higher
priority than the current negative sequence function.
Tripped unit Operation Validity

Phase C overcurrent time delay unit 51 Valid
Phase B overcurrent time delay unit 51 Valid
Phase A overcurrent time delay unit 51 Valid
Phase C overcurrent instantaneous 50 Valid
Phase B overcurrent instantaneous 50 Valid
Phase A overcurrent instantaneous 50 Valid
Neutral time delay unit 51 Valid
Neutral instantaneous 50 Valid
Sensitive neutral time delay unit 51 Valid
Sensitive neutral instantaneous 50 Valid
Isolated neutral 50 Valid
Residual current or neutral unbalance 50 Valid
Phase discontinuity or phases negative sequence 46 Valid
Time delay unit of current negative sequence 46 Valid
Current negative sequence instantaneous 46 Valid
Phase A overvoltage time delay unit 59 Valid
Phase B overvoltage time delay unit 59 Valid
Phase C overvoltage time delay unit 59 Valid
Phase A overvoltage instantaneous 59 Valid
Phase B overvoltage instantaneous 59 Valid
Phase C overvoltage instantaneous 59 Valid
Neutral overvoltage time delay unit 59 Valid
Neutral overvoltage instantaneous 59 Valid
Phase A undervoltage time delay unit 27 Valid
Phase B undervoltage time delay unit 27 Valid
Phase C undervoltage time delay unit 27 Valid
Phase A undervoltage instantaneous 27 Valid
Phase B undervoltage instantaneous 27 Valid
Phase C undervoltage instantaneous 27 Valid
Undervoltage side A and B 27 Valid
Voltage negative sequence 47 Valid
Thermal overload 49 Valid
Frequency level 1 81 Valid
Frequency derivatived level 1 81 Valid
Underpower 37 Valid
High-Set Overpower 32 Valid
Low-Set Overpower 32 Valid
High-Set Reverse Power 32 Valid
Low-Set Reverse Power 32 Valid
High-Set Reverse Reactive Power 32 Valid
Low-Set Reverse Reactive Power 32 Valid
Aparent Underpower 32 Valid
High-Set Aparent Overpower 32 Valid
Low-Set Aparent Overpower 32 Valid
Teleprotection 85 Valid
Undercurrent 37 Valid
Restricted ground 87 Valid
Neutral unbalance 1 50 Valid
Neutral unbalance 2 50 Valid
MHO 1 21 Valid

Tripped unit Operation Validity

MHO 2 21 Valid
Breaker Failure 50 Valid
Dead Zone 50 Valid
Long start 48 Valid
Successive starts 66 Valid
Voltage phases Reversing 0 Invalid
High current lockout 0 Invalid

MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX V. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

The communications module MODBUS RTU implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as slave station with a
master position via the rear communication port (RS232, RS485 or Optical fibre).
V.1. PROTOCOL CHARACTERISTICS

29B
V.1.1 Message format

28B
Master question:
Remote address - 1 byte
Function code - 1 byte
Data - variable number of bytes
CRC - 2 byte
Slave answer:
Remote address - 1 byte
Function code - 1 byte
Data - variable number of bytes
CRC - 2 byte
 Remote address: PL300 address in respect to the Modbus protocol (range 1 to 255). Only broadcast
messages are accepted (address 0) for synchronization with the function 16.
 Function code : If >127 (Byte MSB at 1) means that the remote address has not fulfilled the required
function and it is going to respond with an error code.
 Data : Each data word is sent MSByte first, followed by LSByte.
 CRC : LSByte is sent first, followed by MSByte.
 CRC generator polynomy:
 x16 + x15 + x2 +1
V.1.2 MODBUS functions

283B
The following functions are used within the defined by the MODBUS protocol:
 03 Read Setpoints and Actual Values

 04 Read Setpoints and Actual Values
 (functions 03 and 04 are used without distinction)
 05 Execute Operation
 07 Read Device Status
 08 Loopback Test
 16 Store Multiple Setpoints

V.1.3 Message examples

284B
Function codes 03 and 04 Read Setpoints and Actual Values

Reading of settings, digital status, measurements and counters.
Example :
Remote address : 01
Address : 0400 - Data : 00aa
Address : 0401 - Data : 00ff
Question :
Description Bytes Example (hex)
Remote address 1 byte - 01
Function code 1 byte - 03
Data address - 2 bytes 04 data address
00
Data number - 2 bytes - 00 Data number (words)
02
CRC - 2 bytes - xx
xx
Answer:
Function code - 1 byte - 03
Bytes counter - 1 byte - 04 2 records = 4 bytes
Data1 - 2 bytes - 00 Value in 0400
aa
Data2 - 2 bytes - 00 Value in 0401
ff
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Function 05 code Execute Operation

Execute operation.
Example :
Remote address 01

Code operation : 01 (Command number 1)
Question :
Operation code 2 byte - 00 Command 1
- 00
Operation range 2 byte - ff Execute command
- 00
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Answer :
Operation code - 2 byte - 01 Command 1
- 00
Value 2 byte - ff Execute command
- 00
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Function code 07 Read Device Status

Reading of the protection status.
Question :
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Answer:

Status - 1 byte - 04
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Function 08 code Loopback Test

Link state test (communications).
Question:
Remote address - 1 byte - 01
Function code 1 byte - 08
Code - 2 byte - 00 must be 0
00
Data - 2 byte - 00 must be 0
00
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Answer:
Code - 2 byte - 00 must be 0
00
Data - 2 byte - 00 must be 0
00
CRC - 2 byte - xx
xx
Function 16 code Read Setpoints and Actual Values

Writing of protection values
Example1: Command execution
Remote address: 01
Address : 0080 - Data1: 0001 (Command1)

Question:
Data initial address - 2 bytes - 10 Data address
00
Data number - 2 bytes - 00 Data number (words)
02 (bytes)
Bytes counter - 1 byte - 04 2 registers = 4 bytes
Data1 2 bytes - 02 (bytes)
01 (Command 1)
CRC - 2 bytes - xx
xx
Answer :
Data initial address - 2 bytes - 00
80
Data number - 2 bytes - 00
01 (Words)
CRC - 2 bytes - xx
xx
Example2: Unit date and timesynchronization
Synchronize the date : 16/04/08 and time 15:38:00
Remote address:: 01
Address: 00F0 - Data1: 0000 (millisecondss)
Address: 00F1 - Data 2: 0F26 (hour and minutes)
Address: 00F2 - Data 3: 0410 (month and day)
Address: 00F3 - Data 4: 0008 (- year)
Question:

Data initial address - 2 bytes - 00
F0
04 (Words)
Bytes counter - 1 byte - 08 (bytes)
Data1 - 2 bytes - 00
00
Data 2 - 2 bytes - 0F (hours)
26 (minutes)
Data 3 - 2 bytes - 04 (month)
10 (day)
Data 4 - 2 bytes - 00
08 (year)
CRC - 2 bytes - xx
xx
Answer :
Data initial address 2 bytes - 00
F0
04 (Words)
CRC - 2 bytes - xx
xx
V.1.4 Unit status request

285B
It is made with function: 07 Read Device Status
The unit status byte contains following information:
 Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter

 Bit 1 : Non critical error
 Bit 2 : Critical error
 Bit 3 : Protection in service
The same information can be obtained by reading the address 000Ah.

V.1.5 Change request of digital signals

286B
There is a mechanism which allows to collect information of all digital signals changes along with the time instant when
they occurred.
By reading the address 5000h it can be obtained the number of pending changes in the buffer.
From the address 5002h a buffer is available, where the 25 oldest unit changes can be read. Once received a message of
changes, writing the value 0 in the address 5001h the master position validates the changes sent in the message.
It is always demanded that the request comes with the initial address of the buffer of changes (5002h).
The number of words is required to be multiple of 5 (it must be read blocks of complete changes).
It can not be asked for more data than the buffer size or than the number of changes in queue (it means, if there is only
one pending change, it is not possible to ask for two).
Given that the maximum number of words which can be sent in a message is 127 (limited for the field of number of bytes
in 1 byte), the buffer of changes is sized to contain 25 changes.
25 changes * 5 words / change = 125 words. (250 bytes).
To know how many changes there are in a zone of changes reading it must be done a reading of the number of pending
changes in the buffer through a reading of the address 5000h. In the low byte of the read register we will find the number
of pending changes (which will be a number between 0 and 25) and in the byte 15 of the register it can be read the
overflow indication of the changes in queue (for value 1 an overflow in the changes queue has occurred). Afterwards,
changes can be requested up to the maximum number previously indicated. To validate the changes received we must
write the value 0 in the address 5001h through the function 16. This writing makes possible that the changes in the
remote station are considered as sent; otherwise the remote station would consider them again as pending.
If the remote station had more changes, which would be indicated in the value of the number of pending changes and the
master station could request them by repeating the process.
To collect all the changes of the remote station, the process would have to continue until the reading of the pending
changes indicates value 0.
Structure format of a digital change :
Changes : IDC + Binary time
IDC := CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}
IDENTIF := UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>
CHANGE := BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e}
with Res := BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)
V := BS 1[13] <0..1>
<0> := Valid status
<1> := Not valid status
E := BS 1[14] <0..1>
<0> := Status as "0" after the change
<1> := Status as "1" after the change
v := BS 1[15] <0..1>
<0> := The validation bit V has not changed

<1> := The validation bit V has changed
e := BS 1[16] <0..1>
<0> := The status bit E has not changed
<1> := The status bit E has changed
With these two bytes and by assigning a code for each signal, it is identified each digital signal of control which has
suffered any change and which is transmitted with the control measurements, as well as what has changed in the digital
signal and the status and validation after the change.
CP56Time2a:=CP56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours, Res2, Summer time, Day of the month, Day of the
week, Month, Res3, Year, Res4}
This binary time is defined in the section 6.8 of the document IEC 870-5-4. The day of the week corresponding to value 1
is Sunday.
The complete structure of the change has therefore the following format:
IDENFTIF
TIME CP56Time2a IDC
e v E V Reserve IDENTIF
Milliseconds (LSByte)
Milliseconds (MSByte)
IV RES1 Minutes (6 bits)
SU RES2 HOURS (5 bits)
DAY WEEK (3 bits) DAY OF THE MONTH (5 bits)
RES3 MES (4 bits)
RES4 YEAR (7bits)
V.1.6 Data request by user map

287B
The user map allows the non consecutive registers reading in a single message.
It has an address zone (from the address 0180h, 124 registers) and a values zone in the user map (from the address
0100h , 124 records).
In the address zone it must be written through the function 16 the addresses of those registers we wish to read..
Through the reading of the data zone, the data, whose addresses have been configured, could be read.
It could be read or written from any of the user map addresses, as long as the end of them is not exceeded.
It is demanded that the read addresses of the user map have associated a valid address in its address zone (this type of
request is limited to the data zone: signals, Measurements and counters, addresses starting from 0400, 0440 and 0540
respectively).
V.1.7 Synchronization
28B
From address 00f0h :
Address MSB LSB

00f0h Milliseconds Milliseconds
00f1h Hours Minutes
00f2h Month Day
00f3h - Year

The unit synchronization is made by function16, written on the address indicated and always the 4 words. It does not
allow the partial writing of any data, the writing of the whole structure is always required.
The unit does not correct at all the received value, and that is why the central position will must take into account the
delay communication channel to correct the value of the date and hour sent.
In such address the unit current time can also be read. Any address can be read, as long as the range does not exceed
over the address 00f3h.
V.1.8 Command execution

289B
The command execution can be performed in two ways; with function 05 or with function 16.
command number
To execute a command through function 16, the command code must be written in the command address (0080h). Only
1 register writing is accepted.
V.1.9 Error codes

290B
The unit can send following error codes in answer to a message:
01 - Non implemented function
02 - Illegal address in the data field (reserved address or non valid range for required operation)
03 -> Illegal data value
Causes for error code sending:

 Reading function (03, 04) :
 It can not be read more than 127 registers: 03 -> Illegal data value
 Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field.
 Number of data required exceeds the allowed range according to data type: 03 -> Illegal data value
 Change request where the number of registers is not multiple of 5 or it exceeds the number of change
data: 03 -> Illegal data value
 Data request through user map with a non configured or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data
field
 Writing function (16) :
 -> Illegal data value
 Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
 Configuration of the user map with a reserved or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
V.2. PARAMETERS
30B
The following parameters can be accessible through keyboard/display:
Address of remote station : Address in respect to the protocol MODBUS/RTU.
Value between 1 and 255 (broadcast address 0 non admitted).
Baud rate : Value between 300 and 38400 bauds.

Parity : Even parity or without parity
Waiting time for the RTS activation: Waiting delay after receiving a message and before activating the RTS signal for
transmission. Value between 0 and 1000 msec.
Waiting time for carrier stabilization: Waiting delay once activated the RTS signal before transmitting the first character of the
message. Value between 0 and 1000 msec.
For the case of RS485 this waiting delay is necessary and it must have a minimum value of 4 msec. Value between 0 and
1000 msec.
Waiting time for deactivation of RTS : Waiting delay after the transmission of a message and before deactivating the RTS
signal. Value between 4 and 1000 msec.
Console it is located among the general settings of the DNP.
V.3. UNIT ADDRESSES MAP

31B
Address (hex) Description Range Step Unit Format Default value

Unit identification
0000 - 0007 Internal code
0008 Software version (charac 1) F03
0009 Software version(charac 2) F03
000A Protection status F09
Command address (Write Only)
0080 Command code to execute F10
System date and Hour
00F0 Milliseconds 0-59999 F11
00F1 Hours and Minutes 0-24 / 0-59 F12
00F2 Month and Day 0-12 / 0-31 F13
00F3 Year 0-99 F14
User map
0100 User map values (124 values)
017C User map addresses (124 values)
Reading zone
0400 Digital status 1 F15
0406.. Digital status reserve
0440 Measurement 1 (see "Measurements to control") -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
0441 Measurement 2 -4095 to 4095 1 Internal F21
0048.. Measurements reserve 1 F21
0540 Counter 1 0-4294967295 1 F02
0542 Counter 2 0-4294967295 1 F02
0544 Counter 3 0-4294967295 1 F02
0546 Counter 4 0-4294967295 1 F02
0548... Counter reserve 1 F02
Zone of status changes in digital signals
5000 Number of changes waiting to be sent 0 ..25 F01

Address (hex) Description Range Step Unit Format Default value

5001 Validation of the sent changes (Write Only)) 0 F01
5002 Digital changes reading zone (125 registers) F22
Free memory zone
HF Free --
Measurements starting from the address 0440h will be the ones to be programmed. The order in which they are sent is also
programmable. The programming is carried out through the Protections console SIPCON/P. It is allowed up to a maximum of
64 values
The value of the measurements sent can be found in internal units (value between 4095 and 4095). Each value will have
associated a scale range which could permit obtaining the value in physical units.
In the same way, the digital states and the order in which they are sent can also be programmed, as well as the commands.
For more information about the available magnitudes as well as their scale ranges consult the section: Other Functions ->
Control Messages.
V.4. DATA FORMATS

32B
Name Format Description

F01 16 bits without sign Range: 0... 65535
F02 32 bits without sign Range: 0... 4294967295
F03 16 bits 1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
Compacted bit (Bit to 1 activated indication)
Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter
Bit 1 : Non critical error
F04 16 bits without sign
Bit 2 : Critical error
Bit 3 : Protection in service
Bit 4 to 15 : Not used
Value : Associated command
0 : Command 0
F05 16 bits without sign 1 : Command 1
...
n : Command n
F06 16 bits without sign Range : 0 .. 59999
Bit 0 to 7 : Minutes (Value between 0 and 59)
F07 16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Hours (Value between 0 and 23)
Bit 0 to 7 : Day (Value between 1 and 31)
F08 16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Month (Value between 1 and 12)
Bit 0 to 7 : Year (Value between 0 and 99)
F09 16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Value 0, not used
Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 0
F10 16 bits Bit 7 : Digital signal 7


Compacted bit (Bit for 1activated digital signal)


Analogical value (value in internal units)
MEA:=CP 16{OV, ER, Res, VALUE, S}
with OV:=BS 1[1] not used always <0>)
ER:=BS 1[2] <0..1>
<0>:=VALUE valid
<1>:=VALUE not valid
Res:=BS 1[3] not used (always <0>)
F16 16 bits
VALUE:= F 12[4..15] <0..+1-2-12>
S:=BS 1[16]
<0>:=VALUE positive
<1>:=VALUE negative
The overflow bit (Overflow, OV) is not used and is set to "0". In the event of
VALUE overflow this is set to its maximum positive value, 4095. The maximum
VALUE can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the nominal value.


Digital change structure (5 words)
IDC + Binary time
Byte 0..1: Change identifier
IDC:=CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}
IDENTIF:=UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>
CHANGE:=BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e}
with Res:= BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)
V:= BS 1[13] <0..1>
<0> := Valid state
<1> := Non-valid state
E:= BS 1[14] <0..1>
<0> := State at "0" after the change
F17 80 bits <1> := State at "1" after the change
v:= BS 1[15] <0..1>
<0> := Validation bit V has not changed
<1> := Validation bit V has changed
e:= BS 1[16] <0..1>
<0> := State bit E has not changed
<1> := State bit E has changed
Byte 2..8: Binary time in 7 octets.
CP56Time2a:=CP 56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours,
Res2,Summer schedule, Day of the month, Day of the week, Month, Res3, Year,
Res4}
Byte 9 : Not used
(For more details consult the section about request of digital signal changes)

IEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
APPENDIX VI. IEC 870-5-101 RTU COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

This function allows the communication with a pilot control centre, using the IEC 870-5-101communication protocol at a control
message level. It cannot be used by RS485 port.
The unit behaves as a remote RTU port.
The format by character is the following one:
 1 start bit
 8 information bits
 1 parity bit selectionable between no-parity, even parity or odd parity.
 1 stop bit, selectionable between 1 and 2 stop bit.
The baud rate will be selected among 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bauds.
VI.1. SETTINGS
3B
Console text Display text Meaning

It allows the identification of the remote station number at a link level. Value
Link address LINK. ADD. between 0 and 65534.
Default value 1.
It allows the identification of the remote station number in the messages at an
Application Address APPLIC. ADD. application level. Value between 0 and 65534.
Default value 1.
It indicates if the communication is established in a balanced way (1) or in a
Balanced mode BALANCED non-balanced (0).
Default value 1.
This word-type parameter allows fixing the baud rate.
Possible values: 0-38400, 1-19200, 2-9600, 3-4800, 4-2400, 5-1200, 6-
Baud rate BAUDS
300 bauds.
Default value 2.
This word-type parameter allows the available communication channel type.
Channel Type T.CHANNEL 0-Direct 1-By phone
Default value 0.
It allows the selection of the type of parity that will be used in the
communication.
0 Even parity
Parity PARITY
1 Without parity
2 Odd parity
Default value 0.
It allows selecting the number of stop bits
0 - 1 stop bit
Stop bits STOP BITS
2 - 2 stop bits
Default value 0.
It allows selecting if RTS and CTS pin control is carried out.
RTS/CTS Control RTS_CTS 0 - No. 1 Yes
Default value 0.
It shows the time, in cents of seconds, in which the function waits for the CTS
Activation waiting time
WAIT.CTS activation, after the RTS activation. Value between 0 and 1000.
CTS (csec)
Default value 0.
It shows the time, in cents of seconds, which has to be waited once the CTS is
Carrier waiting time activated, in order to start the transmission, with the aim of stabilizing the
T.WAIT.CARR. T.
(csec) carrier. Value between 0 and 500.
Default value 0.


Waiting time for transmitting after having received in csec. Value between 0 and
500.
Recommended values:
RTS activation time
ACT.RTS T. 600 bauds - 4 csec.
(csec)
1200 bauds - 3 csec.
2400, 4800 y 9600 bauds - 2csec.
Default value 0.
Waiting time for the deactivation of RTS after transmitting (csec). Value
between 0 and 500.
Recommended values:
RTS deactivation time
DEACT.RTS. T. 600 bauds - 4 csec.
(csec)
1200 bauds - 3 csec.
2400, 4800 y 9600 bauds - 2csec.
Default value 0.
Waiting time for the confirmation¡ of received message (Csec). Value between 1
Response waiting time
WAIT. RESP T. and 500..
(csec)
Default value 100.
Minimum time that has to be elapsed (csec) between two consecutive
transmissions. Value between 1 and 100.
Recommended values:
Minimum time
600 y 1200 bauds - 2 csec.
between transmissions T.BETWEEN TRANSM.
2400 bauds 3 csec.
(csec)
4800, 9600 y 19200 bauds - 5csec.
38400 bauds 6 csec.
Default value 6.
It shows the number of times a sent message is transmitted to control centre in
Transmission number TRANSM N. case there is no confirmation. Value between 0 and 5.
Default value 2.
Number of bytes in Address Field of the Link. Value between 1 and 2.
LONG.DIR_A
Default value 2.
Number of bytes in Common addresses Field of Asdu. Value between 1 and 2.
LONG.CAA
Default value 2.
Number of bytes in the Cause of Transmission Field. Value between 1 and 2.
LONG.COT
Default value 1.
Number of bytes in the Information Object Address Field. Value between 1 and
LONG.IOA 3.
Default value 3.
Time format to be used in the chronological changes:
0 without time
1 3 bytes. Format CP24time2a
Time format TIME FORMAT
Default value 1.
It shows if in the change message, the time in which the change has occurred is
Measurements with
MEASUREMENTS T sent (1) or not (0).
time
Default value 0.
It shows in the counter spontaneous frozen message, the time in which the
Counters with time COUNTERS T. freezing has occurred is sent (1) or not (0).
Default value 0.
First SP type information object address or simple signal. It can have value from
Simple signal address SP ADDRESS 0 to 65535.
Default value 0.
First EV type information object address or event. It can have value from 0 to
Event address EV ADDRESS 65535.
Default value 0.
First DP type information object address or double signal. It can have value
Double signal address DP ADDR. from 0 to 65535.
Default value 0.
First MED type information object address or analogue measurement. It can
Measurement address MEAS. ADDR. have value from 0 to 65535.
Default value 0.
First TAP type information object address or transformer intake measurement. It
Transformers tap
TAP ADDR. can have value from 0 to 65535.
address
Default value 0.


First counter type information object address. It can have value from 0 to
Counter address COUNT. ADDR. 65535.
Default value 0.
First bitstring type information object address. It can have value from 0 to
Bitstrings address BIT ADDR. 65535.
Default value 0.
First type C simple order type information object address. It can have value from
Simple command
OC ADDR. 0 to 65535.
address C
Default value 0.
First type C0 simple order type information object address. It can have value
Simple command
OC0 ADDR. from 0 to 65535.
address C0
Default value 0.
Double command
address C1
Default value 0.
Double command
address C2
Default value 0.
Measurement parameter type first information object address. It can have value
Measurement
PAR ADDR. from 0 to 65535.
parameter address
Default value 0.
System information signal address with the change queue full. It can have value
Queue full indication
FULL ADDR. from 0 to 65535.
address
Default value 0.
System information signal address with the indication that the change queue
Queue half- full full at the percentage shown in the setting X_PC_LL. It can have value from 0 to
HALF-FULL ADDR
indication address 65535.
Default value 0.
System information signal address with the indication of GPS installed in the
GPS indication
GPS ADDR. system. It can have value from 0 to 65535.
address
Default value 0.
System information signal address with the indication that the system is
GPS synchronized
SINCR ADDR. synchronised properly by the GPS. It can have value from 0 to 65535.
indication address
Default value 0.
Change queue capacity to give an alarm when it is full, in percentage. It can
Queue full (%) % FULL have value from 0 to100.
Default value 80.
Change queue capacity to the previously mentioned alarm be deactivated, in
Queue empty (%) % EMPTY percentage. It can have value from 0 to100.
Default value 20.
Start word for the event state update in the digital signal state buffer. It can
Event update position WORD EVENTS have value from 0 to 128.
Default value 128 (in case there is no event).
Command or order execution modes.
Mode 1 (0) direct execution
Mode 2 (1) selection previous to the execution
Mode 3 (2) simple orders or writings in direct execution and double
orders and regulation commands with previous selection.
Command execution Mode 4 (3) simple orders or writings with previous selection and
COMMAND MODE
mode double orders and regulation commands in direct execution.
Mode 6 (5) simple orders with previous selection. These simple
commands contemplate the OFF/ON treatment. In this mode, any other type
commands are not allowed.
Default value Mode 6.
It shows if the return information associated to the commands and if the End
Activation message is used for the orders.
Mode 1 (0) nether return information or ACTTERM
Order return Mode 2 (1) return information and ACTTERM are sent
COMMAND INF.
information usage Mode 3 (2) return information is sent for all the orders and ACTTERM
only for analogue writings
Mode 4 (3) ACTTERM message is sent for all the commands


Periodical counter operation mode.
Mode 1 (0) they are automatically frozen with the request
Mode 2 (1) they are not automatically frozen with the request
Counter freezing FREEZE
Mode 3 (2) they are frozen in each spontaneous periodical sending
and in the initialization as invalid.
It shows if the measurement parameters have the same address as their
Measurement measurements (1) or if they have their own address; its start address is given by
MEAS. PAR. ADD.
parameter address the setting D_OD_PAR (0).
Default value 1.
It shows if the 101 profile used is the End Reduced.
End reduced profile END PROFILE
Default value 0.
It shows if the system has GPS installed.
GPS GPS
Default value 0.
Baud time factor, in order to correct the received time in the synchronization
message, due to delays in this message sending, in csecs.
Time correction factor TRANSM. FAC.
Value between 0 and 1000.
Default value 0.
Byte maximum number the asdu can have. Value between 50 and 255.
ASDU maximum size ASDU SIZE
Default value 255.
It shows if the messages have to be sent compacted during the general
SQ bit use SQ BIT USE interrogation process (1) or not (0).
Default value 1.
It indicates if the Confirmation Activation sending message of the
Broadcast synchron. synchronization command has to be inhibited when it is sent with broadcast
SYNCYRO ANSWER
answer direction. At 1, this message is not sent.
Default It value 0.
Period of the cyclical measurement sending in minutes. Value between 0 and
Cyclical measurements
MEASUR. PERIOD 60. With 0, measurements are not sent.
period (min)
Default value 0.
VI.2. TABLES
34B
In the communication console, the screens must be set with the data base to be sent via protocol 101 to the control centre.
These setting screens are the following:
Digital signal configuration 101

In this table, they are included the simple signalling type signal, double signalling and bitstring, in case they exist. The
following fields have to be defined:
 NUMBER101: Signal number that shows in which position the STATE buffer is going to refresh its corresponding
bit. They are numbered starting from 1 up to 2048 possible signals.
 For simple signals, the numbering starts in 1 and the following ones go consecutively; if there were gaps, they
are not introduced.
 For the events, once the word of the event state update start is given in the STATE buffer, the first value of the
NUMBER field must be calculated with this word given by PO_EV.
 First event: PO_EV x 16 + 1
 The following ones go consecutively; if there were gaps, they are not introduced.
 For double signals, the indication of open, close, undetermined and conflicting states, but as there are only
two bits to show the state of a double signal, the undetermined and the conflicting state have the same
numbering as the close state, refreshing the corresponding bits as 00 and 11 respectively.
 This field NUMBER for the double signal is calculated from the variable PO_DP, having into account that the
first double signal will have the value resulting from calculating:
 PO_DP x 16 + 1, for open state
 PO_DP x 16 + 2, for close, undetermined and conflicting state.

 being PO_DP a word number between 0 and 127, which locates the double signals between the events and
the bitstrings and it shows the word of the double signal state update start.
 If in the database there are events, the operation to calculate the word of double signal Start is the following
one:
 PO_DP = PO_EV + (event number - 1) / 16 + 1
 If there are no events, the most common case, this parameter is calculated from simple signals:
 PO_DP = (simple signal number - 1) / 16 + 1
 For the first Bitstring there will be 32 signals (1 for every bitstring bit) and so 32 registers with the NUMBER
field.
 PO_ BITS x 16 +1.............................. PO_BITS x 16 + 32
 being PO_BITS a word number between 0 and 127, which locates the bitstrings as the last element to refresh
in the buffer after the double signals.
 In order to calculate this word, the same used for the double signals is applied. But in order to calculate what
the double signal occupy, take into account that each signal needs 2 bits, so in each word only 8 double
signals are refreshed.
 The operation to calculate the bitstrings start word is the following:
 PO_BITS = PO_DP + (number of double signals - 1) / 8 + 1
 For this calculation take into account the place, in words, the previous signals occupy in the buffer.
 BD SIGNAL: It shows the signal number in the database of the PL300
 NELEM: It shows the element number inside its type
 For simple signals, it coincides with NUMBER field.
 For events, it must go on as if they were simple signals, because internally they are treated in the same way.
If, between the last simple signal and the first event, there is a step in the numbering, it has to be mentioned
in this field.
 For double signals, it must start in 1 again. If, in the case of double signals, some registers have been refilled
with the different status of the signals, open, close undetermined and conflicting, these registers belong to the
same signal, so the NELEM field must be the same for all of them.
 The same happens in the case of the Bitstring, having for them 32 registers of the table with the same
NELEM field.
 REVERSED: It shows if the signal reversed state is waited.
 TYPE: It shows the type of signal 101:
TYPE ELEMENT TYPE
0 Simple Signalling type element
1 Double Signalling type element
2 Bitstring type element
 CIN: it shows the incidence code for double signals.

CIN INCIDENCE INTERNAL CODE
0 Change of the simple signalling value or bitstring
1 Change of signalling value to open.
2 Change of signalling value to close.
3 Change of signalling value to undetermined.
4 Change of signalling value to conflict.
Measurement configuration 101

In this table the normal, step and tap type measurements are introduced. The following fields have to be defined:

 NUMBER 101: measurement number regarding the Protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering in 1 up to 128
possible measurements. In case there are gaps in the database, those registers cannot be introduced in the table.
 MEASUREMENT BD: It indicates the measurement number in the PL300 database.
 DEADBAND: change magnitude in the measurement in order to be sent to the control centre. A value higher than
1% of the background is recommended.
 For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this kind of measurement
will be sent to the control centre.
 PERIOD: Time during which a change must be maintained in a signal to be sent to the control centre. It will be
given in csecs.
 LOW: Low limit under which a measurement will be sent to thecontrol centre as alarm.
 HIGH: High limit over which a measurement will be sent to thecontrol centre as alarm.
 In the limit cases, both low and high, we do not pay attention to change magnitude but to the limits of one zone.
If it exceeds the given zone between the high and low limit, even if it is a very small change, it is sent to the
control centre. In the same way, if it had previously been exceeded, and the measurement value has a value
between the limits again.
 BACKGROUND: Scale background for scaled measurements, engineering real value corresponding to the
maximum value of the measurement (4095 counts).
 If spontaneous changes in measurements are not desired to be sent, the LOWLIM field value are recommended to
be set at their minimum value,-4095, and HIGHLIM and BTRATA at their maximum value, that is, 4095 and
8190 counts, respectively.
 TYPE: Type of 101 measurement:
 0 Unidirectional measurement.- Normalized TYPE F16.
 1 Bidirectional measurement. - Stepped TIYPE I16.
 2 Direct measurement transformer tap, TAP.
 The measurements in that table are set in increasing order, that is, first of al the normalized ones, then the
stepped ones, and finally the taps.
Counter configuration 101

In this table the normal, step and tap type measurements are introduced. The following fields have to be defined:
 NUMBER 101: Measurement number regarding the Protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering in 1 up to 64
possible measurements. In case there are gaps in the database, those registers cannot be introduced in the table.
 COUNTER BD: It indicates the measurement number in the PL300 database.
 PERIOD: Period of spontaneous freezing and sending of periodical counters. The period in minutes for the counter
accumulation has to be divisor of 60 minutes. A 15-minute period is recommended for the counter periods. All
the counters that are desired to be sent to the control centre in a cyclical way must have the same period,
different to zero in the PERIOD field.
 If the counter periodical sending is not desired to be treated the PERIOD field has to be set at zero.
 GROUP: Group the counter belongs to for the counter request by groups.
 If the counters do not have an assigned group, since the control centre does not use the Counter Request by
group, the GROUP field must be zero, so only the counter period would appear.
 More than four different groups are not allowed for the counters in the database.
101 order configuration
The following fields have to be defined for each order:

 NUMBER 101: Information object direction (IOA) of the order in the protocol IEC 870-5-101.
 ORDER BD: Order in the PL300 database
 ON / OFF: ON / OFF state of the order
 TYPE: type of element over which the return information is received.
 0 Simple signal
 1 Double signal
 SIGNAL: Element number inside those of its type for the return information. This information is the same as the
NELEM field of the signal table.
 STATE: This field has a different meaning depending on the order type.
 In the case of order types, it shows the end state of the signal the order is associated to, a simple or a double
signal.
 In the case of double orders, it shows if the state has to come reverse or not..
If the setting Command Execution Mode has Mode 6 value, the simple commands must be entered in the table as double
commands, respecting the address of the information object that corresponds to them as simple commands. That is, they are
entered as simple commands, but taking into account in this STATE field that they are treated as double commands.
 TIMING: It shows the time, in csec, it has to be waited until the return information associated to the order is
received.
Configuration of signal and measurement groups 101

If the interrogation by group wants to be enabled, the following fields have to be defined for each order:
 GROUP: Group number. It can be any number from 1 to 16. They do not need to be consecutive and there can be
gaps.
 IOA START This field has the information object address of the first element of the group. This address has to be
a valid signal or measurement address.
 IOA END: This field has information object address of the last element of the group. This address has to be a valid
signal or measurement address, and it must bet the same address type as the one of the first element.
 In the case of Reduced End profile, the Measurement interrogation is used as group 16, so this group must be
configured in the table.
VI.3. INTEROPERABILITY PROFILE IEC 870

35B 5 101
The protocol IEC 870 5 
parameters from the parameters and alternatives indicated in the standard.
VI.3.1 System or device (system specific parameter)

291B
 System definition
 Control station definition (Master)
 Control station definition (Slave))
VI.3.2 Net configuration (net specific parameter)

29B
 Point-to-point  Multipoint-party line
 Multiple point-to-point  Multipoint-star

VI.3.3 Physical layer (net specific parameter)

293B
Baud rate (control address)
Unbalanced
interchange circuit
V.24/V.28 Unbalanced interchange circuit V.24/V.28
Standard Recommended if > 1200 bit/s Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27
 100 bit/s  2 400 bit/s  2 400 bit/s  56000 bit/s
 200 bit/s  4 800 bit/s  4 800 bit/s  64000 bit/s
 300 bit/s  9 600 bit/s  9 600 bit/s
 600 bit/s  19 200 bit/s
 1 200 bit/s  38 400 bit/s

Baud rate (monitor address)
Unbalanced
Unbalanced Interchange
Interchange Circuit V.24/V.28
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended if
Standard > 1200 bit/s Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27
 100 bit/s  2 400 bit/s  2 400 bit/s  56 000 bit/s
 200 bit/s  4 800 bit/s  4 800 bit/s  64 000 bit/s
 300 bit/s  9 600 bit/s  9 600 bit/s
 600 bit/s  19 200 bit/s
 1 200 bit/s  38 400 bit/s
VI.3.4 Link layer (net specific parameter)

294B
The FT 1.2 mesh format, the simple character and the fixed time out interval are exclusively used in this Standard.
Link Transmission Procedure Address Field of the Link
 Balanced transmission  Not present (balanced transmission only)
 Unbalanced transmission  One octet
 Two octets
Frame Length  Structured
2 Maximum length L (control direction)  Unstructured

5
5
2 Maximum length L (monitor

5 direction)
5
When the unbalanced link layer is used, the following ASDU types are return in class 2 messages (lower priority) with the
transmission causes indicated below:
 ASDUs standard assignation to class 2 messages is used as follows:
Identification type Transmission cause
9, 11, 13, 21 <1>

 ASDUs special assignation to class 2 messages is used as follows:
Identification type Transmission cause
1, 3, 5, 7 <5>, <20 36>
9, 11 <1>, <3>, <5>, <20 36>
15, 16, 37, 132 <37 41>
10, 12, 34, 35, 131 <3>
45, 46, 100, 101 <7>, <10>
102 <5>
47, 48, 49, 104, 105, 110, 111, 113 <7>
VI.3.5 Application layer

295B
Transmission mode for application data

Mode 1 (first of all the least significative bits), as it is defined in the clause 4.10 of the IEC 870-5-4, is exclusively used
in this standard.
ASDU common address (system specific parameter)
 One octet  Two octets
Information object address (system specific parameter)
 One octet  Structured
 Two octets  Unstructured

 Three octets
Transmission cause (system specific parameter)
 One octet  Two octets (with originator address)

ASDUs Standard selection

Process information in the monitor address (station specific parameter)
 : Single-point information M_SP_NA_1

 : Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
 : Double-point information M_DP_NA_1

 : Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
 : Step position information M_ST_NA_1
 : Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
 : Bitstring of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1

 : Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
 : Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
 : Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
 : Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1

 : Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
 : Measured value, short floating-point value M_ME_NC_1
 : Measured value, short floating-point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
 : Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1

 : Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
 : Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
 : Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1
 : Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
 : Packed single-point information with status change detection M_PS_NA_1
 : Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor M_ME_ND_1
<30> : Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_SP_TB_1
<31> : Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a M_DP_TB_1
<32> : Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a M_ST_TB_1
<33> : Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2a M_BO_TB_1
<34> : Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TD_1
<35> : Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TE_1
<36> : Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a M_ME_TF_1
<37> : Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a M_IT_TB_1
<38> : Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TD_1
<39> : Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a M_EP_TE_1
<40> : Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TF_1
CP56Time2a
<128> : Single-point information with time tag CP40Time2a M_SP_TB_1

<129> : Double-point information with time tag CP40Time2a M_DP_TB_1
<130> : Step position information with time tag CP40Time2a M_ST_TB_1
<131> : Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP40Time2a M_ME_TD_1
<132> : Integrated totals with time tag CP40Time2a M_IT_TB_1

System information in the control direction (station specific parameter)
 : Single command C_SC_NA_1

 : Double command C_DC_NA_1
 : Regulating step command C_RC_NA_1

 : Set point command, normalized values C_CE_NA_1
 : Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
 : Set point command, short floating-point value C_SE_NC_1
 : Bitstring of 32 bit C_BO_NA_1
System inSSSystem information in the control direction (station specific parameter)
 : End of initialization M_EI_NA_1
System information in the control direction (station specific parameter)
 : Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1

 : Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
 : Read command C_RD_NA_1
 : Clock synchronization command C_CS_NA_1
 : Test command C_TS_NB_1
 : Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
 : Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
Control address parameters (station specific parameter)
 : Parameter of measured value, normalized value (threshold only) P_ME_NA_1

 : Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
 : Parameter of measured value, short floating-point value P_ME_NC_1
 : Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1
File transfer (station specific parameter)
 : File ready F_FR_NA_1

 : Section ready F_SR_NA_1
 : Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
 : Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
 : Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
 : Segment F_SG_NA_1
 : Directory F_DR_TA_1

Identifying the assigned types and causes of the transmission (station specific parameter)
Type identification Transmission cause
20 37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 a a 44 45 46 47
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1    
<2> M_SP_TA_1  
<3> M_DP_NA_1    
<4> M_DP_TA_1  
<5> M_ST_NA_1   
<6> M_ST_TA_1 
<7> M_BO_NA_1  
<8> M_BO_TA_1 
<9> M_ME_NA_1    
<10> M_ME_TA_1 
<11> M_ME_NB_1    
<12> M_ME_TB_1 
<13> M_ME_NC_1
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1  
<16> M_IT_TA_1  
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1  
<31> M_DP_TB_1  
<32> M_ST_TB_1 
<33> M_BO_TB_1 
<34> M_ME_TD_1 
<35> M_ME_TE_1 
<36> M_ME_TF_1
<37> M_IT_TB_1  
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1   
<46> C_DC_NA_1   
<47> C_RC_NA_1  
<48> C_CE_NA_1  
<49> C_SE_NB_1  
<50> C_SE_NC_1

<51> C_BO_NA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1 
<100> C_IC_NA_1   
<101> C_CI_NA_1   
<102> C_RD_NA_1 
<103> C_CS_NA_1  
<104> C_TS_NB_1  
<105> C_RP_NC_1  
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1  
<111> P_ME_NB_1  
<112> P_ME_NC_1
<113> P_AC_NA_1  
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1
<128> M_SP_TB_1  
<129> M_DP_TB_1  
<130> M_ST_TB_1 
<131> M_ME_TD_1 
<132> M_IT_TB_1  
VI.3.6 Application basic functions

296B
Station initialization (station specific parameter)
 Remote initialization
Data cyclical transmission (station specific parameter)
 Data cyclical transmission
Reading process (station specific parameter)
 Reading process
Spontaneous transmission (station specific parameter)
 Spontaneous transmission

Double transmission of information objects with spontaneous transmission cause (station specific
parameter)
The following element types can be transmitted in a succession caused by a simple state change in an information object.
The particular addresses of the information objects, for which the double transmission is enabled, are defined in ht e
project specific list.
 Single point information M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1 y M_PS_NA_1
 Double point information M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1 y M_DP_TB_1
 Step position information M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1y M_ST_TB_1
 Bitstring of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, M_BO_TB_1
 Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1 y

M_ME_TD_1
 Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1 y M_ME_TE_1
 Measured value, short floating point number M_ME_NC_1 y M_ME_TC_1
General interrogation (station or system specific parameter)
The addresses of the information objects assigned to each group have to be shown in a separate table.
 Global
 Group 1  Group 7  Group 13
 Group 5  Group 11
 Group 6  Group 12
Clock synchronization (station specific parameter)
 Clock synchronization

Command transmission (object specific parameter)
 Direct command transmission  Select and execute command
 Direct set point command  Select and execute set point command
transmission
 C-SE ACTTERM Used
 No additional definition
 Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled

station)
 Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled

station)
 Persistent output
Integrated total transmission (station or object specific parameter)

 Mode A: local freeze with spontaneous transmission
 Mode B: local freeze with counter interrogation
 Mode C: freeze and transmit by counter interrogation commands
 Mode D: freeze by counter interrogation command, frozen values

reported spontaneously
 Counter read  General request counter
 Counter freeze without reset  Request counter group 1
 Counter freeze with reset  Request counter group 2
 Counter reset  Request counter group 3
 Request counter group 4
Addresses per group have to be defined
Parameter load (object specific parameter)

 Threshold value

 Smoothing factor
 Low limit for transmission of measured value
 High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter activation (object specific parameter)

 Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure (station specific parameter)

 test
File transfer (station specific parameter)

File transfer in monitor address
 Transparent file
 Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
 Transmission of sequence of events
 Transmission of sequence of recorded analogue values
File transfer in control address

 Transparent file
Background scan (station specific parameter)

 Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay (station specific parameter)

 Acquisition of transmission delay

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX VII. IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

The IEC870-5-103 communication module implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as a slave station with
the master center through the communication rear port (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre)
VII.1. 870-5-103 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FUNCTION

36B
The module implements the communication protocol, based in the IEC60870-5-103, in the protection, in order to
communicate with a primary centre which has the protocol IEC60870-5-103 implemented. Its objective is collecting oscillo
data, protection signalling and measurements, as well as receiving commands or orders.
The transmission and reception mesh formats are set to the FT1.2 mesh format explained in section 6.2.4.2 of IEC 870-5-1
standard.
The format per character:
 1 start bit.
 8 information bits
 1 parity bit, selectable between without parity or even parity
 1 stop bit, selectable between 1 and 2 stop bits.
 The baud rate will be selected among, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400.
 The communication is carried out through the communication rear connector (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre).
In the same way the following functions are implemented:
 Initialization.
 Clock synchronization.
 General interrogation
 General commands
 Perturbation data transmission.
The implemented functions are described in the standard IEC870-5-103. The application layer is based in the international
standards IEC 870-5-3 (general structure of application data), IEC 870-5-4 (Definition and coding of the application
information elements), IEC 870-5-5 (Application basic functions).
The basic ASDUS implemented are described in the document IEC870-5-103 and they are:
ASDUs Compatible in Secondary to Primary direction.

 <1> Message with time label.
 <2> Message with time label and relative time.
 <5> Identification.
 <6> Clock synchronization.
 <8> General interrogation end.
 <9> Measurements II. With a variable number of measurements.
 <23> Stored perturbation list.
 <28> Ready for the perturbation digital signal transmission.
 <29> Digital signal transmission.

 <30> Perturbation value transmission.

 <31> Transmission end
ASDUs Compatible in Primary to Secondary direction.
 <6> Clock synchronization.
 <7> General interrogation start.
 <20> General commands.
 <24> Perturbation data transmission command.
 <25> Perturbation data transmission acknowledge
VII.2. SETTINGS
37B

It allows the identification of the number of the remote station. Value between 0 and 254.
LCU ADDRESS
Default value 1.
This word-type parameter allows fixing the baud rate: 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200
BAUD RATE - 38400 bauds.
Default value 9600
It allows the selection of the parity type to be used during the transmission. Even, odd or without
PARITY T. parity
The recommended default value is even, according to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
It allows the selection of the stop bit number. 1 or 2 stop bits
STOP BITS
The recommended default value is 1 stop bit according to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
RTS activation waiting time. Waiting time after receiving a message and before activating the RTS
RTS.ACT T
signal for transmission. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
Carrier stabilization waiting time. Waiting time once the RTS signal is activated and before
CARRIER T.
transmitting the first message character. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
RTS deactivation waiting time. Waiting time after the transmission of a message and before
RTS DEAC T.
deactivating the RTS signal. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
Sending format: Compatible or extended. 0->compatible VDEW. 1->Extended private range.
In compatible format :
SENDING FORMAT Control signals configured as compatible are only sent
Only three measurements are sent in the measurement ASDU
Commands configured as compatible are only accepted
For the correct operation of the perturbation data request function, the communication with the Procome console must be
carried out through the
you can choose between:
 -->25.
 -->maximum.
25 must be selected.
VII.3. CONTROL SIGNALS

38B
The control signals can be configured according to the console screen:

 BD SIGNAL: It allows selecting the control signal within those existing in the unit.
 TYP: Function Type.
 INF: Information Number.
 GI: It shows if the signal is included in the response to a general question. If this option is not selected, the
changes generated by the signal are only activation changes.
 REVERSE: It reverses the signal state.
VII.4. CONTROL ANALOGUE MEASUREMENTS

39B
The control analogue measurements can be configured according to the console screen:
 BD MEASUREMENT: It allows selecting a measurement from the data base.

 NUMBER: It shows the position in the measurement ASDU.
 This table is only valid when the SENDING FORMAT setting is in EXTENDED.
VII.5. COMMANDS
40B
The commands can be configured according to the console screen:
 BD ORDER: It allows selecting an order from the BD

 TYP: Function Type.
 INF: Information Number.
 DCO: It allows selecting from On and Off

IEC 61850PROTOCOL
APPENDIX VIII. IEC 61850PROTOCOL
VIII.1. INTRODUCTION
41B
This protocol, implemented in the protection devices, is based on the communication protocol defined in the IEC 61850
standard and described in the following documents:
 IEC61850-1: Introduction and overview

 IEC61850-2: Glossary
 IEC61850-3: General requirements
 IEC61850-4: System and project management
 IEC61850-5: Communication requirements for functions and device models
 IEC61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs
 IEC61850-7: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
 IEC61850-7-1: Principles and models
 IEC61850-7-2: Abstract communication service interface (ACSI)
 IEC61850-7-3: Common Data Classes
 IEC61850-7-4: Compatible logical node classes and data classes
 IEC61850-8: Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)
 IEC61850-8-1: Mappings to MMS (ISO/IEC9506-1 and ISO/IEC 9506-2)
 IEC61850-9: Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)
 IEC61850-9-1: Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
 IEC61850-9-2: Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC61850-10: Conformance testing
The Technical Committee 57 of the IEC (CT57) is in charge of developing and maintaining such standard. There is a
corporation called UCA User Group which works very closely to this Technical Committee and which assist the customers and
manufacturers in the integration of device owning this protocol. Ingeteam Power Technology is a member of this corporation.
The IEC 61850 standard defines some basic aspects: the local area network (LAN ethernet), communication protocols (TCP-
IP, MMS), the modeling of the substation elements and services (using XML language) as well as the engineering tools. The
architecture of an IEC 61850 system changes from master/slave to client/server.
One of the most remarkable aspects of the IEC 61850 standard is the use of horizontal messages between protection devices.
These messages called GOOSE (which are a subgroup of GSE: Generic Substation Event) can substitute physical wirings
between devices.
The use of XML language to describe the different elements and services of the substation is also a remarkable characteristic
of this protocol. The icd/cid files based on the XML are those files that describe the data model and services of a protection
and those that we will refer to all along this appendix.
The particular implementation characteristics of this protocol are described in the PICS, MICS, TICS and PIXIT documents
defined in the standard conformity test part
In conclusion, the protection device behaves as a IEC 61850 data and service server. All the information, together with its
organization is defined in an icd/cid configuration file (based on XML). All those protocol characteristics that can be conferred
to a IEC 61850 server according to this standard, can be applied.

VIII.2. PREVIOUS STEPS TOCONFIGURETHE DEVICETR

42B
Each protection device is defined with a configuration file, with ICD extension (IED Capability description) in which all the
data and services (capabilities) supported in the protection is described. This file is supplied with the device.
This icd file has to be configured to be particularized and to be able to communicate with the IEC 61850 client of each
substation. Apart from introducing the communication part, the private ones (PIXIT), DataSets and Reports to be sent to each
client have also to be configured. Once this particularization has been done, the file changes into a CID file (Configured IED
Description), with which the device is completely configured for its integration in a certain substation.
In order to carry out all these steps and configure an IEC 61850 protection, Ingeteam Power Technology has developeda SW
tool called eFS (Energy Factory Suite). The eFS is a software tool for the IEC 61850 system automation which has multiple
modules that will be used to configure each substation protection devices;
The software module that will be used to configure the device in each substation is the pacFactory. The other modules
include in the eFS are not necessary.
The complete protection icd file particularization, to change it into a configured file (cid) is carried in some steps. These
steps will basically allow us:

To serve data and services (synchronization, orders…) to the different customers of the substation. Peer-to-peer
horizontal communication between protection units (GOOSEs).
 Protection setting.

By using the pacFactory modules, the protection will be easily configured, to be integrated within each IEC 61850
substation.
The steps would be the following:
aproject.

the project. he environment
configuration.
 If this is the first time you access to project (there will be no IED in the list). It will be necessary to import.

VIII.2.1 IED Import to project

297B
 To import an IED to project, you have two options;
 Import the IED from file; for this option is not necessary to communicate with any device.
 Import the IED from device; automatic detection of network devices.
If you select this button you detect all network devices. And the following window appears.
The first thing to consider is to check the device is between subnet ranges to communicate properly.
For this, you need to add the subnet device to PC network card or change the IP address device for belonging to the same
network PC. This last option is probably faster and easier.
mask to configure and send to device. Refresh automatic detection to confirm the change and then you will work properly.
From both options, import from file or from device,you get the dialog window show below.

Fill device family and select/ create
VIII.3. PROTECTION CONFIGURATION

43B
VIII.3.1 IED Properties

298B
If you just import an icd file, probably you need to update the communication data(IP address, mask and OSI parameters).
For this, from main menu, on tools option IED properties, or from toolbar button on icon will appear the following
window with different tabs.
Select AP1 tab and fill the communication parameters necessary for IED configuration.
The IP address and the status communication with device are shownon the application status bar. Ej.;

VIII.3.2 Communications
29B
n the tree view with the model data from

device is shown.
This tree view shows the different logical devices (LDs) and the different logical nodes
(LNs)within each.
IEC 61850 standards, the configuration data sending by device (Reports or Goose
messages) is performed in two steps:
First, you have to define the Dataset which you send in the Report or Goose message.
Second, you have to configure the Report Control Block (R.C.B) or Goose Control Block
(G.C.B.) where all the characteristics of each report or goose message are.
According to IEC 61850 standards, Datasets and Control Block are created on LN level,
so first, select the LN level where you want to create it.
If there is no LN selected, buttons for the Datasets, Report control blocks and
transmission Gooses configuration will be disabled.
Once Datasets, Report Control Blocks or transmission Gooses are configured, will be
shown as branches on the LN.
On the IEC 61850 Server configuration tab you have:
A toolbar with the following options:
Dataset: Open the Dataset configuration dialog box.
R.C.B: Open Report Control Blocksconfiguration dialog box.
GOOSEs: Open the transmission Goose message configuration dialog box.
GoosesRx: Open reception Goose message configuration dialog box.
Collapse/Expand: Collapse or expand the dataset list on tab.
Data grid with dataset:
The data grid shows the information group by Datasets.
In each Dataset row are the Report Control Blockand Gooses associated with that Dataset.

Other access for Dataset configuration;
By right clicking on child nodes in tree view, a contextual menu will appear:
On LN node allows:
Open the Dataset and Goose configuration dialog box.
Create a new Dataset andnew Goose.
On Dataset allows:
Properties: Open configuration dialog box.
Delete: Only enabled if not have any control block associated.
On Report Control Block allows:
Delete.
On Goose Control Block allows:
Delete.
From data grid rows:
On Dataset row allows:
Delete: Only enabled if not have any control block associated.
Create a new Dataset andnew Goose.

On Report Control Block row allows:
Delete.
On Goose Control Block row allows:
Delete.
VIII.3.3 Datasets
30B
By clicking on Dataset (1) button configure the members of Dataset selected or define a new Dataset.
in each Dataset can be selected (both at basic and FCD level,

selecting it in the filter on the tool bar).

Criteria used in the configuration of:
his filter is
included in the DataSet the data reference, which will be an structure including the data status, quality andtimestamp.
the DataSet the data attributes references independently. This is because in Goose messages the data timestamp is not
sent.
The FC (Functional Constrain) used for the Reports and Gooses messages are:
ST: Para configuración de señales
MX: Para configuración de medidas.
VIII.3.4 Report Control Blocks (RCB)

301B
The Report control block associated to a Dataset, will be configured by selecting the LLN0 node of the protection and
clicking on the RCB.
A dialog box to configure is as show below
You define or configure an existing RCB. It is also possible to configure the Dataset which is associated to, and also the
trigger options and optional fields of each RCB, as well as if it is buffered or unbuffered.

VIII.3.5 Goose Control Blocks (GOCB)

302B
The transmission goose control blocks are configured in the same way as the RCBs. By clicking on GOOSEs button a
dialog box appears as show bellow.
In this section you configure the details and the Access Point of the Goose, which contains the MAC-Multicast the gooses
are sent to (as well as the VLAN and AppID parameters).
VIII.3.6 GooseSubscription
30B
In order to configure the receptiongooses, we have to import the IED which will publish the GOOSEs we want to subscribe
to. So, run the iedFactory and import IEDs using the cid configuration files (which must have the transmission GOOSE
Select thesubscriptor IED and open the configuration IEC 61850 Server in pacFactory application.
To
The subscription dialog box appears and you can select the publisher GOOSE control block we want to subscribe to.
Select it and by clicking on left arrow button will appear in the subscriptions list. To finish, accept the subscription with

To check the subscription, navigateto line1 IED, in the LD GOOSERx or in LLN0 node. You have to see a Dataset and a
GOCB that match with the GOCB of the protection (check it with the properties option).
VIII.3.7 Settings
304B
The protection settings can be initialized through substation Factoryapplication.
These initializations are written down in a cid file which will be sent to the protection that will consider them as initial
settings.
Every time a protection setting is changed from any interface (display, console, IEC 61850 customer or any other), the cid
file is updated with the new value. The configuration file (cid) with the last setting values of the protection can always be
retrieved through the FTP or through the IEC 61850 file service.
Must be taken into account when a cid is sent, the protection will update settings with the new coming data in this cid
file.
VIII.3.8 Commands
305B
The commands accepted by the protection are configured and mapped in the device (factory settings). Commands are
VIII.3.9 Private parts

306B
To finish with the IED particularization, the private data,which allow configuring the LOG system, have to be checked, and
offset has to be given to the local time, and enable the storage of the oscillography/faults/settings in a file etc.
Insert private part

These private data leave the factory with default values and, depending on the needs, they are usually modified. The list
of the parameters that can be configured and their meaning are the following:
 Maximum number of connections: it is the maximum number of MMS connections that are allowed
simultaneously. It has a maximum of 6.
 Log file: configuration of the LOG file. Each active bit indicates where the unit debug information is going to be
dumped.
 Local Time: Deviation of the local time regarding the UTC, positive or negative value of such deviation. If at 0, the
local time coincides with the UTC.
 Configurator: IP port for the communication with the configurator. If this field is not filled, it has a default value
(49200).
 Order mode: special mode where the order locking are not checked before executing them. If at 1, the lockings
are not checked.
 Time Out Aplic: Indicates the time, in seconds, that must elapse without receiving any information through port
102 (MMS) before the server closes the connection. This value is used to avoid that connections that have
stopped sending data during an indicated time (when a possible error) are still occupying an open connection of
the server. .
 Telnet: indicates the TCP port through which the de Log information is taken out when this log is active.
 Parsing: how restrictive we want the parsing is. With avalue different to zero. It checks that there is enough space
for the writing of the setting values in the icd. In case there is no enough space, the icd is not validated
 Refresh time: after an order, the opClsOr and opOpnOr signals take some values regarding the state of the order.
With Refreshing time, we indicate the time after which, once the order is received, we set the value of such
signals at zero. The time will be in seconds.
 It can be also chosen if you want to store the oscillos, faults and settings in files, inside the unit file system, by
selecting the ConfDomain tab.
oscillos/faults/setting
s configuration tab
VIII.4. PROTECTION UPDATE

4B
Once all the configuration steps have been carried out in the pacFactory, this configuration has to be uploaded into the IED.
For that, we will use Sending through FTP button.

By clicking on FTP sending button will appear a dialog box where you must fill the user name and the password, then
The unit is reset and starts with the new configuration after some minutes (depending on the data and service model sent).
This time is needed because the device is self-configured from this cid file (no change into proprietary or binary format is
done).

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
APPENDIX IX. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The self-checking constantly performed by the unit, can detect the following situations:
 Critical hardware error

 Error in the converter reference voltage
 Error in the converter
 Error in the FLASH memory recording
 Error in the relays activation
 Error in the SPI communication (between micro and DSP)
 Non critical hardware error
 Clock synchronization error
 HW error corrected
In the event of any failure detection, the alarm will remain until the failure is disappeared. This alarm can be visualised through:
 Status screen
 Control events
 Events
 Digital outputs
 Led
IX.1. FAILURE DETECTION

45B
The failure detection can happen in various ways.
Status screen

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
through four signalisations:
 Protection in service
 Critical error
 Non critical error
 Error in ADC converter
By normal functioning, only the signalisation (in red) for protection in service must be on. Any of the other 3 signalisations
indicate an unusual situation.
Control signals
If the hardware status signal
indicates that some unusual situation has appeared (critical error) in the unit. By 1 indicates Hardware OK.
Digital outputs
A digital output can be programmed w -
activated by critical error. If the opposite logic is desired, this can be done through the programmable logic signals..
Leds
The programmable Leds count with the same options as the digital outputs.
The non programmable bicolour Led (OK/F) indicates:
 Correct functioning if green

 Critical error detection if red
Events
As well as indicating if the error is or not critical, the events also indicate the type of error detected and they are the ones
quoted in the first part of this chapter.
IX.2. ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE

46B
The procedure will depend on the detected error and the unit status.
If the unit is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the unit is well supplied, contact the technical service.
If the unit is on but it shows failure, return to the events screen and check which type of error it is:
 If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error persists after turning the unit off and on,
contact the technical service.
 If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements, and if they are correct, turn off and on
the unit; if the error does not disappear, contact the technical service.
 If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists, contact the technical service.
 If error in the Flash memory recording is shown, send the settings again. If error persists contact the technical
service.

RECEPTION TESTS
APPENDIX X. RECEPTION TESTS
X.1. MATERIAL NEEDED

47B
 Three phase voltage and current generator with variable frequency of class<0.5.
 Chronometer unit with starting by current or voltage injection, with precision <0.001s.
 Wiring.
 Power supply of Vdc +-10% (Vdc depending on model).
X.2. MEASUREMENT TEST

48B
The Measurement range is up to 1,2 times the nominal value (5 A). The error in that range must be less than 0,5% of the
1,.2*nominal value.
The protection range error must be less than 3% of the introduced value.
The points to check are under the criterion of the worker who will make the tests, but the following ones are recommended:
Current (A) Voltage (V)

0.5 20
1 50
5 (nominal) 65 (approx. rated)
10 80
50
X.2.1 Measurements in display

307B
Measurements will be done by injecting voltages and currents in one phase and checking on the display that only this
phase presents a non 0 value and that it is within the defined limits.
Furthermore it must be taken into account that the Measurements must appear in display in primary, as well as secondary
values (multiplied by the Measurement transformers ratio).
X.2.2 Measurements in console

308B
Measurements will be made by injecting voltages and currents in one phase and checking on the display that only this
phase presents a non 0 value and that it is within the defined limits.
Furthermore, it must be taken into account that in the console measurements must appear in both secondary values, in
the state screen, and in primary values, in the measurements and control screen, (multiplying by the measurement
transformers ratio).
If power is measured, it must be taken into account that there is a factor by which the calculated power is divided before
being sent to the console (Measurements and control). Make a test for several values for this (for instances 0.1, 1 and
10).
This test must be carried out for all phases and checking the Measurements in the console.

RECEPTION TESTS
X.3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

49B
The following settings will be introduced in the relay for the reception tests:
Digital Inputs Configuration

DI 1 Breaker status
DI 2 Reference voltage
DI 3 Free
DI 4 Free
DI 5 Free
DI 6 Free
DI 7 SV closing 52 close 1
DI 8 SV closing 52 open 1
DI 9 SV trip 52 close1
DI 10 SV trip 52 open 1
DI 11 External protection
DI 12 Closing order
DI 13 Opening order
DI 14 Free
DI 15 Free
DI 16 Free
DI 17 Free
Digital Outputs Configuration
Output Configured signal Output type

DO 1 General trip Trip
DO 2 Current recloser OR close order Close
DO 3 Current ongoing cycle Nothing
DO 4 Current definite trip Nothing
DO 5 Phase insta. trip OR Phase time trip Nothing
DO 6 Ground insta. trip OR ground time trip Nothing
Phase insta. tripOR ground insta. tripOR OverV inst. trip OR UnderV inst.
DO 7 Nothing
trip OR ground overV inst. trip
DO 8 Phase time trip Nothing
DO 9 Unbalance time trip OR Unbalance inst. trip Nothing
DO 10 Free Nothing
DO 11 Free Nothing
DO 12 Free Nothing
DO 13 Free Nothing
DO 14 HW status Nothing
LEDs configuration
LED CONFIGURED SIGNAL LED TYPE
Phase time pickup OR Ground time pickup OR. OverV time pickup OR
LED 1 Memorized
UnderV time pickup OR Ground overV time pickup
LED 2 Phase inst trip OR Phase time trip Memorized
LED 3 Ground inst trip OR Ground time trip Memorized
Phase inst trip OR Ground inst trip OR. OverV inst trip OR UnderV inst trip
LED 4 Memorized
OR Ground overV inst trip
LED 5 Current ongoing cycle Not memorized
LED 6 Current definite trip Not memorized
LED 7 Current recloser locked Not memorized
LED 8 HW status (green OK) Not memorized

RECEPTION TESTS
Configuration from lockings to functions

r
the recloser.
X.3.1 Hardware status

309B
relay and check that this

contact opens.
X.3.2 Instantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency)

310B
This protocol applies to any instantaneous voltage and current unit the unit has. The most usual are:

 Ground instantaneous overcurrent (and sensitive neutral
 Phase instantaneous overvoltage
 Phase instantaneous undervoltage
 Overfrequency
 Underfrequency
A test unit prepared for measuring the tripping times will be used to carry out all these tests.
Disable the corresponding timed function and all the functions which are not being tested
X.3.2.1. Pickup and dropout in the trip

Set the additional time of instantaneous to 0 seconds.
They will be tested by making rising slopes of I, V or f (depending on the tested unit) from 90% to 110% of the setting
taking note of the value at which the instantaneous is picking up. By reaching the tripping point, it must remain there
for a while checking that there are no drop outs but it remains activated.
Afterwards a descending slope to the drop out point will be made, taking note of this point value. The points to be
checked are up to the operator but it is recommended to test the following settings:
Current (A) Voltage (V)

6 50
10 65
20 80
40
To test the undervoltage situation the slopes will be made the other way round: first the descending for pick up and
after the rising for drop out.
X.3.2.2. Speed of the instantaneous trip

It is about testing the tripping speed of the relay when tripping time is 0. Therefore the additional time of
instantaneous will be set to 0 sec.

RECEPTION TESTS
It will be tested by applying a value higher than the starting value set (2 times for current, 1.2 times for voltage)
noting down the time in which the instantaneous picks up.
To carry out this test a chronometer will be used, which will be started by the signal injection and stopped by the trip
relay operation.
Suggested settings: same as the pick-up and drop-off settings.
The tripping time must be less than 40 ms.
X.3.2.3. Instantaneous trip with additional time

Same as the precedent, for different additional time settings. Note down the time in which the instantaneous trips.
The error must not be higher than 5% of the programmed time or 50 ms (the higher of the two).
X.3.2.4. Function locking test
corresponding function (this is general for any function).
X.3.3 Timed units (current and voltage)

31B
This protocol applies to any timed current and voltage unit.
The most usual are:

 Ground timed overcurrent (and sensitive neutral)
 Phase timed overvoltage
 Phase timed undervoltage
A test set prepared for measuring tripping times will be used to carry out all these tests.
Disable the corresponding instantaneous function and all the functions which are not being tested.
X.3.3.1. Pickup and dropout

The test will be carried out in a similar way to the instantaneous one. The type of trip curve will be set as definite time
with a trip time of 0.
Check that the digital outputs and corresponding LEDs are activated when tripping. After each test make a
X.3.3.2. Definite time

The test will be carried out in similar way to the instantaneous one.
X.3.3.3. Tripping times through curves

The test is carried out in the same way as for the definite time but setting the time delayed unit with all possible types
of curves and different indexes shown on Appendix II, where the theoretical operating times are indicated.
The time measurements will be repeated for different points of the tripping curve and for different settings according
to the operator criteria.
X.3.4 Current unbalance units

312B
These units act when exceeding the I2 threshold (Negative sequence current)

RECEPTION TESTS
The tests will be the same as for the phase instantaneous and timed unit unless current is injected in the three phases
and with certain values.
The phase protection units must be disabled.
X.3.4.1. Pickups
The instantaneous and the timed units are tested in the same way.
The tripping time must be set to a minimum (0.1sec.) and if it is a time delayed unit, the time curve is set to definite
time.
Currents of the same amplitude are injected with 120º of phase difference and values according to following tables.
Then the current in phase A is increased until the protection trips. Every current increase must last at least 0.1
seconds to give enough time for the protection to trip.
IR
120º 120º
120º
IT IS
When it trips, the I2 trip will be calculated to see the error made in the following way:
I2.trip (s)=(|IRtrip|-|Ifixed|)/3
The test must be repeated for different Ifixed and for different settings. The following will be recommended:
I2=I negative seq. set I fixed

1 3
2 5
4 10
X.3.4.2. Trip times

The proceeding is the same for both instantaneous and time delayed of unbalance. For timed unit the inverse time
curves will be checked.
Currents of same amplitude and 120º of phase difference are injected with values as indicated in the following tables,
and then the time to trip the protection is measured.
X.3.5 Broken conductor unit

31B
Before performing this test all the phase units must be disabled.

RECEPTION TESTS
X.3.5.1. Pickups
It is tested in the same way as the unbalance unit. The tripping time must be set to a minimum (0.1sec.).
Currents of the same amplitude are injected with 120º of phase difference and values according to following tables.
Then the current in phase A is increased until the protection trips. Every current increase must last at least 0.1
seconds to give enough time for the protection to trip.
The test is repeated for different Ifixed:
 1A
 2A
 5A
At the end the trip error is calculated
BROKEN CONDUCTOR UNIT
IR
120º 120º
120º
IT IS
SETTING I pickup TRIP VALUE

Phase R Phase S Phase T
I2/I1 IR(A) IS(A) IT(A) I2/I1trip =(|IR|-|Ifixed|)/(|IR|+2·|Ifixed|)
0,15 Ifixed Ifixed
0,2 Ifixed Ifixed
0,3 Ifixed Ifixed
0,4 Ifixed Ifixed
0,5 Ifixed Ifixed
X.3.5.2. Trip times

The proceeding is the same as for the instantaneous of unbalance.
Currents of same amplitude and 120º of phase difference are injected with values as indicated in the following tables,
and then the time to trip the protection is measured.
The test is repeated for different Ifixed and different settings:
X.4. RECLOSER
50B
It is aimed to confirm several aspects:

RECEPTION TESTS
 That for any kind of trip (with all the enablings at YES), the recloser is able to perform a complete reclosing cycle
and that on each cycle state all corresponding signals are activated (outputs and leds).
 That all the phase and earth fault reclosings are correctly discriminated.
 That the delays to be set (dead time, reclaim time and reference voltage time) are exactly respected.
 That the enablings of allowed reclosings and trips operate correctly.
In all the tests the enablings of trip after reclosing and reclosing after trip must be configured to YES.
During the reclosing tests, the time to be measured is the one elapsed between the openings of the circuit breaker until the
circuit breaker closing signal is given.
X.4.1 Initial tests

314B
Wire the breaker trip and closing outputs to a two-state relay which performs the line circuit breaker function. In this way
this input must be 0V when a trip happens.
+125V
Breaker
status
PROTECTION
N
General
trip
Breaker
closure
Figure 1

RECEPTION TESTS
Before the tests:
 Check that the Recloser lockings, the external as well as the one of the panel, are disabled.
 Set all the time delay (reclosing and blocking times) with different values, so that it makes it easier to see
the differences between them.
 The reclosing times will indicate which one of the three reclosings is being performed. To measure them it
will be measured the interval from the breaker opening until the breaker closing order.
Check the following by each test:
 Every time a trip occurs, the ongoing cycle output must be activated and turn on the corresponding led
unless a cycle of three reclosings has been performed, which will lead to Definitive trip.
 When the reclosing occurs, the output cancellation of instantaneous must be activated (if this was
programmed) and also the corresponding led while it is on reclaim time or until another trip occurs within
this reclaim time.
 Another trip occurs within this reclaim time.
X.4.1.1. TRIP (D),RECLOSURE (R),NORMAL (N))

Manual closing
Wait the reclaim time after manual closing
Provoke a trip
Check that the led ongoing cycle turns on
Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the TREEN1 time.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off and that the output ongoing cycle is deactivated and the
instantaneous is cancelled when the reclaim time is expired.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral (if they exist),
unbalance and broken conductor.
In case of trips by ground or sensitive neutral the dead and reclaim times will be the earth-fault ones but for the rest of
trips times must be the phase-fault ones
X.4.1.2. D,R,D,R,N
Manual closing
Provoke a trip
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on
Provoke a trip before the reclaim time is expired after automatic closing
Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the TREEN2 time.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off and the output ongoing cycle is deactivated.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral, unbalance and
broken conductor.

RECEPTION TESTS
X.4.1.3. D,R,D,R,D,R,N
Manual closing
Provoke a trip
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on
Provoke a trip before the locking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Second Reclosing occurs in the time TREEN2...
Check that the Third Reclosing occurs in the TREEN3 time.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral, unbalance and
broken conductor
X.4.1.4. D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R.
Manual closing
Wait the blocking time after manual closing
Provoke a trip.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on.
Check that the First Reclosing occurs in the time TREEN1..
Provoke a trip before the blocking time expires after an automatic closing.
Provoke a trip before the blocking time expires after an automatic closing.
Check that the Fourth Reclosing occurs in the TREEN4 time.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns off.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral , unbalance and
broken conductor.
X.4.1.5. D,R,D,R,D,R,D,R,. DEF. TRIP

Manual closing
Wait locking time after manual closing
Provoke a trip.
Check that the LED of the front panel ongoing cycle turns on.

RECEPTION TESTS
Check that the Fourth Reclosing occurs in the TREEN4 time.
Check that the LED Definitive trip turns on.
Repeat the test with instantaneous trips and time delayed trips of phase, ground, sensitive neutral unbalance, broken
conductor and also by external protection.
X.4.2 Enabling checking test

315B
X.4.2.1. Enabling of allowed trips

It is started from all the allowed trips and one of them is disabled checking that it does not trip during the
corresponding reclaim time.
A locking time of at least 10 seconds must be given which allows confirming that they are operative when the desired
trip is provoked.
A table will be filled in checking that all the possibilities operate.
Trips allowed after Phase GND Instantaneous SENSITIVE GND UNBALANCE Trips allowed
BROKEN COND.
reclosing Instant./Timed /Timed Instant./Timed Instant./Timed after reclosing
YES  YES  YES 
Standby YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO
NO NO NO

After R-1 YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO
NO NO NO

NO NO NO

NO NO NO

NO NO NO
After
MANUAL YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO
NO NO NO
CLOSING

RECEPTION TESTS
X.4.2.2. Recloser enabling

It is started from all the reclosings as allowed and it is continued disabling some of them, checking that they do not
operate after the corresponding trips.
Reclosings Phase GND SENSITIVE GND UNBALANCE BROKEN

EXTERNAL
allowed after Instantaneous Instantaneous Instantaneous Instantaneous/ CONDUC
PROTECTION
trip /Timed /Timed /Timed Timed TOR
R-1 YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO YES  NO
X.4.3 Tests with/without reference voltage

316B
The waiting time of the reference voltage is set to a lower value than the reclosing time.
During a reclosing cycle the Vref. is taken away and it is checked that after the waiting time set the cycle is interrupted
and it moves on to definitive trip (the time to reach Definitive trip since the breaker opens is measured in order to check
the correct operation of the recloser).
X.4.4 Recloser locking test

317B
It is checked that the recloser does not perform the reclosings when:


be seen only in
to the status Definitive trip and activates its corresponding signal.
 It is set out of service through the push-button R.
 It is set out of service through the control command.
 It is set out of service through the protection command.
In the three cases the output “Locked recloser” must be activated.
X.4.5 Time measurements

318B
X.4.5.1. Recloser time

It is measured the time, from the breaker opening until the breaker closing command. It must coincide with the
programmed time. The times to be programmed are up to the operator, but it is recommended to test the minimum
and maximum allowed.
X.4.5.2. Reclaim time

It is measured the time while the output cancellation of instantaneous is activated (if it is programmed) which is
coincident with the reclaim time after a reclosing. The times to be programmed are up to the operator but it is
recommended to test the minimum and maximum allowed.

RECEPTION TESTS
X.5. COIL SUPERVISION

51B
It is an automatism integrated by 4 inputs and 2 outputs.
Inputs Outputs
Trip circuit with breaker open 1 Trip circuit failure 1
Trip circuit with breaker closed 1 Closing circuit failure 1
Closing circuit with breaker open 1
Closing circuit with breaker closed1
it
failure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output
must be deactivated.
lure
must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be
deactivated.
failure must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output
must be deactivated.
must be shown and that output will be activated. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be
deactivated
X.6. CHECKING OF THE DISPLAY AND CLOCK OPERATION

52B
 Connect the relay to the power supply. Check that the two-coloured led Ok/F is shown in green. On the display it
must appear the following text:
Protection PL300
Multifunction Xx
 Xx defines the firmware version. By pressing INTRO it should appear

SEE TIME
 By pressing INTRO again, any unit time will appear. Check that the second digits change.
DATE ##-##-##
TIME ##-##-##
 Turn off the unit and wait 1 min.

it was turn off, which indicates that the battery is working well.
 Press ESC. It should be seen
SEE TIME
 Press ESC. It should be seen again

Protection PL300
Multifunction Xx

RECEPTION TESTS
X.7. TIME SETTING OF THE UNIT

53B
and date will appear.
Press OK and check that the relay receives the date/hour which has been sent

DEFAULT SETTINGS
APPENDIX XI. DEFAULT SETTINGS

The units leave the factory with the following setting programming, unless the user expresses the contrary:
Accessible only through keyboard/display

 Communication configuration:
 Port COM1 (front)
 Address 4
 Baud rate 38400
 Parity even
 Stop Bits 1
 In units without Ethernet output:
 Rear port COM2 configuration PROCOME
 Puerto COM2
 Address 4
 Baud rate 38400
 Parity even
 Stop Bits 1
 Control signals None (units in TCP type IH)
 RTS (in box or TCP type IB)
 In units with Ethernet output:
 Rear port COM2 configuration DNP
 Ethernet port configuration PROCOME
Accessible through Protection console and keyboard/display

 Frequency 50 Hz
 Language Spanish
 Phase sequences A, B, C
 Enable buttons NO
 Enabling push button by command NO
 Locking Key R NO
 Enabling functional key remote NO
 Locking LEDs NO
 Allow lock by protocol NO
 Ground parameters (in units with transformer for VN measurement): calculated voltage
 Power supply (agony) (in units with Vdc measurement): NO
 IRIG-B Format: B002 (without year)
 Overcurrent protection (1)
 Phase TOC
 Enable YES
 Pick up 6.00
 Characteristic curve TF
 Time index 0.05
 Definite time 2.00

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Torque control NO
 Ground TOC
 Enable YES
 Pick up 1.00
 Time index 0.05
 Phase IOC
 Enable YES
 Pick up 10.00
 Timing 0.10
 Ground IOC
 Enable YES
 Pick up 2.00
 Timing 0.50
 Sensitive ground TOC
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.100
 Time index 0.05
 Timing 5.00
 Sensitive ground IOC
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.500
 Timing 2.00
 Current Unbalance time
 Enable NO
 Pick up 1.00
 Time index 0.05
 Timing 2.00
 Torque control of current unbalance time unit NO
 Current Unbalance instantaneous
 Enable NO
 Pick up 2.00
 Timing 0.50
 Torque control of current unbalance instantaneous NO
 Boosting by voltage
 Boosting by voltaje NO
 Regulator locking
 Enable NO

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Locking current 6.00

 Phase instantaneous special operation
 Enable NO
 Special definite time (sec) 1.00
 Special function time (sec) 0.00
 Ground instantaneous special operation
 Enable NO
 Sensitive ground instantaneous special operation
 Enable NO
 Instantaneous overcurrent protection (HIGH 1)
 Phase instantaneous (high)
 Enable YES
 Pick up(A) 15.00
 Definite time (sec) 0.00
 Ground instantaneous (high)
 Enable YES
 Pick up(A) 5.00
 Overcurrent protection (HIGH 2)
 Phase TOC (HIGH)
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Time index 0.05
 Definite time timing 0.00
 Ground TOC (HIGH)
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Time index 0.05
 Ground type Transformer
 Phase IOC (HIGH)
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Instantaneous timing 0.00

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Ground IOC (HIGH)

 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Ground type Transformer
 Sensitive ground TOC (HIGH)
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.005
 Time index 0.05
 Sensitive ground IOC (HIGH)
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.005
 Overcurrent protection, zones 2 and 3
 Settings for phases in zone 2
 Enable NO
 Pick up in zone 2 (A) 0.10
 Additional time for zone 2 (sec) 0.00
 Settings for phases in zone 3
 Enable NO
 Settings for ground in zone 2
 Enable NO
 Settings for ground in zone 3
 Enable NO
 Generals
 Zone 3 address F
 Broken conductor
 Enable (phase unbalance) NO
 Broken phase detection pick up 0.30
 Broken phase detection timing 0.50
 Isolated ground
 Enable NO
 External locking NO

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Low current 0.010

 High current 0.010
 Low voltaje 3.0
 High voltaje 3.0
 First trip timing 1.00
 Time for switch to instantaneous (sec) 10.0

 Directional
 Phase directional angle 45
 Ground directional angle 45
 Directional locking due to lack of polarization NO
 V Polarization
 Polarization V 1.0
 Ground directional criteria S0
 Phase directional criteria Quadrature
 Widths directional trip zone
 Width phase zone (grades) 170
 Width ground zone (grades) 170
 Sensitive ground directional
 Directional type Angular Criteria
 Minimum threshold Vn(V) 1.0
 Minimum power (W) 0.00
 Characteristic angle 0
 Minimum current (A) 0.005
 Watrimetic ground
 Directional type Angular Criteria
 Minimum active power (W) 0
 Minimum current (A) 0.10
 Voltage control of the phase time
 Pick up 0.10
 Time index 0.05
 Voltage control.
 Enable NO
 Torque control 10.0
 Voltage control of the phase instantaneous
 Pick up (A) 0.10
 Voltage control
 Enable NO
 V. control (V) 10.0

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Locking due to high current

 Phases
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Trip number 1
 Ground
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Trip number 1
 Two levels undercurrent
 Enable NO
 Level 1
 Level 1 pickup (A) 0.10
 Level 1 additional timing (sec) 0.00
 Level 2
 Level 2 pickup (A) 0.10
 Level 2 additional timing (sec) 0.00
 Overcurrent protection, Cold load
 Phase TOC
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Time index 0.05
 Ground TOC
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Time index 0.05
 Phase IOC
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Ground IOC
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Sensitive ground TOC
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.005

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Time index 0.05
 Sensitive ground IOC
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.005
 Cold load
 Enable NO
 Cold load time(s) 600
 Actuation time(s) 1.00
 Voltage protection
 Overvoltage time
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Time index 0.05
 Overvoltage instantaneous
 Enable NO
 Pick up 10.0
 Undervoltage time
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Time index 0.05
 Undervoltage instantaneous
 Enable NO
 Pick up 10.0
 Unbalance time
 Enable NO
 Pick up 0.10
 Unbalance instantaneous
 Enable NO
 Voltage generic (Single pole overvoltage)
 Voltage unit type UnderV
 Unit time pick up 2.0
 Unit time characteristic curve TF
 Unit time time index 0.05
 Unit time definite time curve timing 0.00
 Unit instantaneous pick up 2.0

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Unit instantaneous timing 0.00

 Frequency protection
 Supervision minimum voltage
 Supervision minimum voltage (V 40
 Cycle number of frequency pick up 3
 Cycle number of D81 pick up 3
 Recloser settings associated to low frequency protection
 Enable NO
 Minimum frequency conditions to reclose NO
 Minimum frequency to reclose (Hz) 45.00
 Reclosing time (sec) 1
 Reclaim time (sec) 1
 Frequency gradient (1)
 Enable NO
 Supervision minimum current 0.00
 SPV Maximum Freq. step 1 45.00
 Frequency step 1 0.20
 Definite time step 1 (sec.) 0.00
 Frequency function
 Enable step 1 NO
 Frequency step 1 (Hz) 45.00
 Definite time step 1 (sec) 0.00
 Frequency type step 1 Maximum

DEFAULT SETTINGS

 Breaker failure protection (I)
 In trip due to fault
 Operation way Threepole
 Enable Disable
 Trip signal Pulse
 Topology 52 Independent
 Phase restoration (A) 0.10
 Ground restoration (A) 0.10
 Retrip definite time(sec) 0.0000
 Trip definite time (sec) 0.0000
 Opening with load
 Enable NO
 Load threshold (A) 0.1
 Definite time failure in load 1 (sec) 0.0000
 Definite time failure in load 2 (sec) 0.0000
 Breaker failure protection (II)
 Breaker failure with low load or ground
 Enable NO
 Two-phase trip permission NO
 Enable detection per neutral NO
 Ground current threshold (A) 0.10
 Retrip definite time (s) 0.000
 Trip definite time (s) 0.000
 Trip signal Pulse
 Rear arch detection
 Enable NO
 Pick up (A) 0.05
 Rear arch time (sec) 0.01
 Broken conductor criteria threshold (V) 1
 Incr. I threshold of flashover (A) 0.02
 Definite time flash 1 (sec) 0.00
 Definite time flash 2 (sec) 0.00
 Number of locking cycles after closing 1
 Dead zone
 Enable NO
 Dead zone threshold (A) 0.1
 Protection Scheme
 Selecting the protection scheme Permissive overreach
 Drop time input RTP (s) 0.00
 Locking additional time (s) 0.00
 Signal loss time (s) 0.00
 Enable ECO NO

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Time ECO (s) 0.0

 Enable reverse direction locking NO
 Time reverse direction locking (s) 0.0
 Protection trip masks
 Enable NO
 Unconditional trip mask
 Phase instantaneous zone 1 NO
 Phase time NO
 Ground instantaneous zone 1 NO
 Ground time NO
 Broken conductor NO
 Unbalance instantaneous NO
 Unbalance time NO
 Permissive trip mask
 Phase time NO
 Ground time NO
 Locking trip mask
 Phase time NO
 Ground time NO
 Thermal image protection
 Enable NO
 Heating time constant (min) 3

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Cooling time constant (min) 3

 Alarm threshold (%) 80
 Nominal current 5.00
 Restoration threshold (%) 50
 Power protection
 Minimum power
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%). 1.0
 Fixed time (sec) 0.00
 Maximum power (Hi-Set)
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%) 1.0
 Maximum power (Lo-Set)
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%) 1.0
 Reverse active power (Hi-Set)
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%) 1.0
 Reverse active power (Lo-Set)
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%) 1.0
 Reverse reactive power (Hi-Set)
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%) 1.0
 Reverse reactive power (Lo-Set)
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%) 1.0
 Power Nominal current (A) 1A
 Apparent power protection
 Minimum apparent power
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%) 1.0
 Maximum apparent power (Hi-Set)
 Enable NO
 Pick up (%) 1.0
 Maximum apparent power (Lo-Set)
 Enable NO

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Pick up (%) 1.0

 Fuse failure
 Enable NO
 Additional time (sec) 2.00
 TOC limitations ( to ground time characteristic)
 Ground curve limit current 100.00
 Neutral TOC block if IOC started NO
 Phase TOC limits ( to phases time characteristic)
 Phase TOC block if IOC started NO
 Second harmonic restraint
 Enable phases NO
 Enable ground NO
 Threshold %I2f/If 5
 Phase minimum current (A) 0.10
 Ground minimum current (A 0.10
 Digital inputs Flicker
 Minimum number of changes to activate flicker signal 0
 Maximum number of changes to remove flicker signal 0
 Flicker checking Interval (sec) 0
 Time cancellations
 Phase time Without locking
 Ground time Without locking
 Sensitive ground time Without locking
 Phase time high Without locking
 Ground time high Without locking
 Sensitive ground time high Without locking
 Unbalance time Without locking
 User curve 1
 Without programming
 User curve 2
 Fault locator
 Enable NO
 Real component of the single pole impedance (Ohms/Km) 0.0000
 Imaginary component of the single pole impedance (Ohms/Km) 0.0000
 Real component of the direct impedance (Ohms/Km) 0.0000
 Imaginary component of the direct impedance (Ohms/Km) 0.0000
 Line length (Kms) 0.0
 Direct sequence of the line admittance 0.0
 Single pole sequence of the line admittance 0.0
 Data of the rest of the net

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Real component of the direct impedance local source 0.000

 Imaginary component of the direct impedance local source 0.000
 Real component of the direct impedance remote source 0.000
 Imaginary component of the direct impedance remote source 0.000
 Real component of the direct impedance in parallel with the line 0.000
 Imaginary component of the direct impedance in parallel with the line 0.000
 Sensitivities
 Phase current sensitivity 0.0
 Ground current sensitivity 0.0
 Phase voltage sensitivity 0.0
 Ground voltage sensitivity 0.0
 Current detection NO
 Analogue output permanence time 0
 Synchronism checking
 Enable synchronism
 Enable function NO
 Enable condition A neither B NO
 Enable condition B but not A NO
 Enable condition A but not B NO
 Enable undervoltage conditions NO
 Enable frequency difference NO
 Enable Angle difference NO
 Pick up of the unit of voltage difference between side A and side B 2
 Pick up of the unit of angle difference between side A and side B 5
 Pick up of the unit of frequency difference between side A and side B 0.05
 Pick up of the undervoltage unit for permission in side A 50
 Pick up of the undervoltage unit for permission in side B 50
 Close permission checking time 0
 Side A phase for synchronism B
 Spring slack
 Spring slack time (se.). 15.0
 Voltage presence
 Primary nominal compound voltage (KV) 20.0
 Voltage absence threshold (% of the nominal) 50
 Voltage presence threshold (%of the nominal) 80
 Breaker supervision
 Excessive number of trips 10
 Time span for excessive number of trips 300
 Sum kI2 alarm for maintenance 65535
 Sum kI2 initial(setting) 0
 Enable trip circuit supervisión NO
 Enable close circuit supervisión NO
 KI2 calculation
 Calculation time KI2
 Waiting time (sec) 0.00

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Operation logic
 Trip sealing YES
 Opening failure time 0.500
 Closing failure time 0.500
 Pole discordance
 Enable NO
 Discordance time (s) 0.01
 Pole failure time (s) 0.00
 Definite opening time (s) 0.01
 Supervision
 External supply supervision
 Enable NO
 Minimum threshold (V) 20
 Maximum threshold (V) 24
 Temperature supervision
 Enable NO
 Minimum threshold (ºC) -40
 Maximum threshold (ºC) 50
 Recloser (1)
 Recloser in service NO
 Recloser time
 Time for recloser 1º for faults between phases 0.50
 Time for recloser 1º for faults to ground 0.50
 Time for recloser 2º for faults between phases 5
 Time for recloser 2º for faults to ground 5
 Cycle control
 Waiting time of reference voltaje 1
 Reclaim time for faults between phases 10
 Reclaim time for faults to ground 10
 Reclaim time after manual closing 10
 Number of programmed reclosers 4
 Sequence coordination of the recloser NO
 Recloser (2)
 Trip permission
 Units with trip permitted on standby
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 Broken conductor S
 External protection actuation S

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Isolated ground S
 IOC sensitive ground S
 TOC sensitive ground S
 Units with trip permitted reclaim time recloser 1º
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 Units with trip permitted reclaim time recloser external manual close
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 Recloser (3)
 Recloser permission
 Recloser permission 1º after trip due to:
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 Recloser permission2º after trip due to:
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S
 IOC phases S
 TOC phases S
 IOC ground S
 TOC ground S

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Recloser (5)
 Trip permission
 Units with trip permitted on standby
 Phase instantaneous H1 S
 Phase time H2 S
 Ground instantaneous H1 S
 Ground time H1 S
 Sensitive ground instantaneous H2 S
 Sensitive ground time H2 S

 Phase time H2 S
 Phase time H2 S
 Phase time H2 S
 Phase time H2 S

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Units with trip permitted reclaim time external manual closing
 Phase time H2 S
 Recloser (6)
 Recloser permission
 Phase time H2 S
 Phase time H2 S
 Phase time H2 S

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Phase time H2 S
 Locking(I)
 Current protection
 IOC phases Without locking
 TOC phases Without locking
 IOC ground Without locking
 TOC ground Without locking
 Broken conductor Without locking
 Directional Without locking
 TOC sensitive ground Without locking
 IOC sensitive ground Without locking
 Isolated ground Without locking
 Time Without locking
 Unbalance instantaneous Without locking
 Voltage protection
 Overvoltage time Without locking
 Overvoltage instantaneous Without locking
 Undervoltage time Without locking
 Undervoltage instantaneous Without locking
 Unbalance time Without locking
 Unbalance instantaneous Without locking
 Voltage generic (single pole overvoltage Without locking
 Instantaneous overvoltage
 Phase instantaneous (high) Without locking
 Ground instantaneous (high) Without locking
 Current protection (HIGH)
 TOC phases (HIGH) Without locking
 TOC ground (HIGH) Without locking
 IOC phases (HIGH) Without locking
 IOC ground (HIGH) Without locking
 TOC sensitive ground (HIGH) Without locking
 IOC sensitive ground (HIGH) Without locking
 Frequency protection
 Frequency protection Without locking
 Overvoltage protection, zones 2 and 3
 Settings for phases in zone 2 Without locking
 Frequency gradient
 Frequency gradient (1) Without locking

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Locking (II)
 Recloser
 Current recloser locking Without locking
 Breaker failure protection
 Pole discordance Without locking
 Breaker failure low load or ground Without locking
 Current protection-cold load
 TOC phases Without locking
 TOC ground Without locking
 IOC phases Without locking
 IOC ground Without locking
 TOC sensitive ground Without locking
 IOC sensitive ground Without locking
 Various
 Synchronism enabling Without locking
 Fuse failure Without locking
 Frequency recloser locking Without locking
 Recloser locking Without locking
 Voltage control
 Voltage control (phase time) Without locking
 Voltage control (phase instantaneous) Without locking
 Locking by high current
 Phases Without locking
 Ground Without locking
 Power protection
 Minimum power Without locking
 Maximum power (Hi-Set) Without locking
 Maximum power (Lo-Set) Without locking
 Reverse active power (Hi-Set) Without locking
 Reverse active power (Lo-Set) Without locking
 Thermal image Without locking
 Reverse reactive power (Hi-Set) Without locking
 Reverse reactive power (Lo-Set) Without locking
 Apparent minimum power Without locking
 Apparent maximum power (Hi-Set) Without locking
 Apparent maximum power (Lo-Set) Without locking
 Breaker failure locking
 Breaker failure locking with flashover Without locking
 Breaker failure locking when opening Without locking
 Rear arch detection locking Without locking
 Dead zone locking Without locking
 Generals
 Relay in service SI
 Breaker number (position) 9999
 Phase current transformatio ratio 1

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Ground current transformatio ratio 1

 Sensitive ground current transformatio ratio 1
 Voltage transformatio ratio 1
 Secondary nominal simple voltage(V) 63.5
 Voltage type Simple
 Voltage measurement A-B-C
 Measurement correction factor
 Constant for active energy counter 1
 Constant for reactive energy counter 1
 Constant for power 1.000
 Protocol TCP/IP
 P protection address 194.164.0.231
 Undernet mask 255.255.255.0
 Gateway 194.164.0.66
 Number of connections 1
 IP master address 0.0.0.0
 UCL address 0
 Configuration Digital inputs
 DI 1 52-Breaker status
 DI 2 52-Close command
 DI 3 52-Opening order
 DI 4 Not allocated input
 Normal status mask (open/ closed) of digital inputs
 DI 1 NA
 DI 2 NA
 DI 3 NA
 DI 4 NA
 DI 5 NA
 DI 6 NA
 DI 7 NA
 DI 8 NA

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 DI 9 NA
 DI 10 NA
 DI 11 NA
 DI 12 NA
 DI 13 NA
 DI 14 NA
 DI 15 NA
 DI 16 NA
 DI 17 NA
 Activation time (ms 0
 Logic input configuration
 LOGIC INPUT 1 Not allocated input
 Normal status of logic inputs
 LOGIC INPUT 1 Open
 Programming logic outputs

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Digital output configuration
 Output activation time (O1 to O14) 0.10
 S1 General trip OR 52-Breaker
opening order

 O2 79I-Recloser current OR 52-
Breaker closing order

 O3 trip 50/51 Phase A OR Trip
50/51 Phase B OR Trip 50/51 Phase C

 O4 50N- Ground Inst.Trip OR
50NH1- Ground Inst.Trip.(High1)
 OR 51N-Gnd. Inst.Trip

 O5
 O6
 O7
 O8 to O14 Not allocated.
 Leds Configuration
 LED 1
 LED 2 General trip. Type
 LED 3 Trip 50/51 Phase A OR Trip

50/51 Phase B OR Trip 50/51

 LED 4 50N- Gnd.Inst. trip OR
50NH1- Gnd.Inst. trip High1) OR
 51N-
 LED 6 79I- Intens. Definite time
 LED 7 79I-Locked Intens. recl. Type
 LED 8 HW
 Command configuration through keyboard

 Text configuration
 Measurement historical
 Time span for calculation of sample measurements 5
 Historical register interval 00:15
 Calendar ask with the days of the week YES
 Monday YES

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Tuesday YES
 Wednesday YES
 Thursday YES
 Friday YES
 Saturday YES
 Sunday YES
 Mask NO
 Daily register start time 0
 Daily register end time 24
 Oscillo configuration
 Digital signal to register in each channel
 Channel Nº 0 General trip
 Channel Nº 1 Trip 50/51 Phase A
 Channel Nº 2 Trip 50/51 Phase B
 Channel Nº 3 Trip 50/51 Phase C
 Channel Nº 4 50N-Gnd. Inst trip
 Channel Nº 5 50NH1- Gnd. Inst
trip.(High1)
 Channel Nº 6 51N- Gnd. time trip
 Channel Nº 7 50BF-Breaker failure trip
(BF)
 Channel Nº 8 79I- Intens.on-going cycle
 Channel Nº 9 79I-Locked.Intens.recloser
 Channel Nº 10 to 31 Not allocated channel
 Digital signals that cause pick up
 General trip Yes
 Overcurrent trip Yes
 Rest of the signals No
 Samples per messages Maximum
 Oscillo duration in cycles 30
 Prefault duration in cycles 10
 Event masks
 Communications
 Local mode (operation from keyboard and display) No
 Remote mode (operation through rear port) No
 Local mode (operation through front port) No
 Current protection (R-1)
 Phase A - Time pick up No
 Phase B - Time pick up No
 Phase C - Time pick up No
 Ground- Time pick up No
 Phase A - Instantaneous pick up No
 Phase B - Instantaneous pick up No
 Phase C - Instantaneous pick up No
 Ground- Instantaneous pick up No
 Phase A Time output activation No

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Phase B - Time output activation No

 Phase C - Time output activation No
 Ground- Time output activation No
 Phase A Instantaneous output activation No
 Phase B - Instantaneous output activation No
 Phase C - Instantaneous output activation No
 Ground- Instantaneous output activation No
 Sensitive ground Pick up No
 Sensitive ground Output activation No
 Sensitive ground - Time pick up No
 Sensitive ground - Instantaneous pick up No
 Sensitive ground - Time output activation No
 Sensitive ground - Instantaneous output activation No
 Current unbalance - Time pick up No
 Current unbalance - Instantaneous pick up No
 Current unbalance - Time output activation No
 Current unbalance - Instantaneous output activation No
 Current protection (R-3)
 Broken conductor detection unit pick up No
 Broken conductor detection Output activation No
 Activation of breaker failure output No
 Activation of trip circuit failure output(coil supervision) No
 Activation of close circuit failure output (coil supervision) No
 Exceed the limit of the breaker supervision accumulator No
 Breaker supervision accumulator overflow No
 Voltage protection (R-2)
 Time pick up phase A overvoltage No
 Time pick up phase B overvoltage No
 Time pick up phase C overvoltage No
 Time pick up ground overvoltage No
 Instantaneous pick up phase A overvoltage No
 Instantaneous pick up phase B overvoltage No
 Instantaneous pick up phase C overvoltage No
 Ground instantaneous pick up overvoltage No
 Activation time output phase A overvoltage No
 Activation time output phase B overvoltage No
 Activation time output phase C overvoltage No
 Activation time output ground overvoltage No
 Activation instantaneous output phase A overvoltage No
 Activation instantaneous output phase B overvoltage No
 Activation instantaneous output phase C overvoltage No
 Activation instantaneous output ground overvoltage No
 Time pick up phase A undervoltage No
 Time pick up phase B undervoltage No
 Time pick up phase C undervoltage No
 Instantaneous pick up phase A undervoltage No
 Instantaneous pick up phase B undervoltage No

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Instantaneous pick up phase C undervoltage No

 Activation time output phase A undervoltage No
 Activation time output phase B undervoltage No
 Activation time output phase C undervoltage No
 Activation instantaneous output phase A undervoltage No
 Activation instantaneous output phase B undervoltage No
 Activation instantaneous output phase C undervoltage No
 Inputs (R-1)
 Activation digital input IN-1 No
 Deactivation digital input IN-1 No
 Inputs (R-2)
 Recloser
 Recloser internal locking (generic) No
 Recloser external unlocking No
 Recloser external locking No
 No reference voltaje No
 Recloser order No
 Definitive trip No
 Recloser at rest No

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 On-going cycle recloser No

 Command
 Excessive number of trips No
 Breaker close command No
 Breaker open command No
 Breaker closing No
 Breaker opening No
 Command protection
 Thermal image alarm No
 Thermal image trip No
 Voltage unbalance pick up No
 Phase reverse pick up No
 Voltage unbalance trip No
 Phase reverse trip No
 Synchronism
 Close permission due to undervoltage side A No
 Close permission due to undervoltage side B No
 Close permission due to synchronism No
 No Close permission No
 Outputs
 Activation digital output OUT-1 No
 Deactivation digital output OUT-1 No

DEFAULT SETTINGS

 Logic signals
 Activation digital signal 1 No
 Deactivation digital signal 1 No
 Rear arch detection verification V
 Trip Flash 1 rear arch detect. verif. V Pole A No
 Pick up rear arch detect. verif V Pole A No
 Trip Flash 2 rear arch detect. verif. V Pole A No
 Restor. rear arch detect. verif V Pole A No
 Trip Flash 1 rear arch detect. verif. V Pole B No
 Pick up rear arch detect. verif V Polo B No
 Trip Flash 2 rear arch detect. V Pole B No
 Restor. rear arch detect. Verif. V Polo B No
 Trip Flash 1 rear arch detect. verif V Pole C No
 Pick up rear arch detect. verif. V Polo C No
 Trip Flash 2 rear arch detect. verif. V Pole C No
 Restor. rear arch detect. verif. V Pole C No
 Trip Flash 1 rear arch detect. verif. V No
 Pick up rear arch detect. verif V No

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Trip Flash 2 rear arch detect. verif. V No

 Restor. rear arch detect. verif. V No
 Inputs (R-3)
 Digital input activation IN-16 No
 Digital input activation IN-17 No
 Digital input deactivation IN-16 No
 Digital input deactivation IN-17 No
 Breaker failure
 Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Phase A No
 Pick up Failure 52 through Int.Phase A No
 Trip Failure 52 through Int.Phase A No
 Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Phase A No
 Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Phase B No
 Pick up Failure 52 through Int.Phase B No
 Trip Failure 52 through Int.Phase B No
 Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Phase No
 Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Phase C No
 Pick up Failure 52 through Int.Phase C No
 Trip Failure 52 through Int.Phase C No
 Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Phase C No
 Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Neutral No
 Pick up Failure 52 through Int. Neutral No
 Trip Failure 52 through Int.Neutral No
 Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Neutral No
 Retrip Failure 52 through Int.Phase No
 Pick up Failure 52 through Int.Phase No
 Trip Failure 52 through Int.Phase No
 Restoration Failure 52 through Int.Phase No
 Breaker failure when opening
 Failure 52 in Load 1 Phase A No
 Failure 52 in Load 1 Phase B No
 Failure 52 in Load 1 Phase C No
 Failure 52 in Load 1 No
 Failure 52 in Load No
 Failure 52 in Load 2 No
 Restoration Failure 52 in Load No
 Dead zone pick up No
 Dead zone trip No
 Dead zone restoration No
 Rear arch detection
 Pick up Rear arch detection Pole A No
 Trip Rear arch detection Pole A No
 Restoration Rear arch detection Pole A No
 Pick up Rear arch detection Pole B No
 Trip Rear arch detection Pole B No

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Restoration Rear arch detection Pole B No

 Pick up Rear arch detection Pole C No
 Trip Rear arch detection Pole C No
 Restoration Rear arch detection Pole C No
 Pick up Rear arch detection No
 Trip Rear arch detection No
 Restoration Rear arch detection No
 Control measurement selection
 MEASUREMENT 0 I maximum
 MEASUREMENT 1 Free
 MEASUREMENT 2 VA
 MEASUREMENT 3 VB
 MEASUREMENT 4 VC
 MEASUREMENT 5 V average
 MEASUREMENT 6 VAB
 MEASUREMENT 7 VBC
 MEASUREMENT 8 VCA
 MEASUREMENT 9 U compound average
 MEASUREMENT 10 IN
 MEASUREMENT 11 IA
 MEASUREMENT 12 IB
 MEASUREMENT 13 IC
 MEASUREMENT 14 I average
 MEASUREMENT 15 P(Active power)
 MEASUREMENT 16 Q(Reactive power)
 MEASUREMENT 17 S(Apparent power)
 MEASUREMENT 18 Frequency
 MEASUREMENT 20 Cos A
 MEASUREMENT 21 Cos B
 MEASUREMENT 22 Cos C
 MEASUREMENT 23 Cosine average
 MEASUREMENT 24 Distortion IC (ICD)
 MEASUREMENT 25 Distortion IB (IBD)
 MEASUREMENT 26 Distortion IA (IAD)
 MEASUREMENT 27 Distortion VC (VCD)
 MEASUREMENT 28 Distortion VB (VBD)
 MEASUREMENT 29 Distortion VA (VAD)
 MEASUREMENT 30 Average distortion I (ID)
 MEASUREMENT 31 Average distortion V (VD)
 MEASUREMENT 32 INS
 MEASUREMENT 33 VN
 MEASUREMENT 34 INAIS
 MEASUREMENT 35 Single pole Sequence I

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 MEASUREMENT 36 Direct sequence I

 MEASUREMENT 37 Reverse sequence I
 MEASUREMENT 38 Single pole Sequence V
 MEASUREMENT 39 Direct sequence V
 MEASUREMENT 40 Reverse sequence V
 MEASUREMENT 42 Temperature
 MEASUREMENT 43 Opening 52 Total
 MEASUREMENT 44 Count. total Reclosers
 MEASUREMENT 45 Count. 1º Recloser
 MEASUREMENT 49 Opening 52 trips
 MEASUREMENT 50 P(Active P.) phase A
 MEASUREMENT 51 P(Active P.) phase B
 MEASUREMENT 52 P(Active P.) phase C
 MEASUREMENT 53 Q(Reactive P.) phase A
 MEASUREMENT 54 Q(Reactive P.) phase B
 MEASUREMENT 55 Q(Reactive P.) phase C
 MEASUREMENT 56 P maximum
 MEASUREMENT 57 Q maximum
 MEASUREMENT 58 P phase A maximum
 MEASUREMENT 59 P phase B maximum
 MEASUREMENT 60 P phase C maximum
 MEASUREMENT 61 Q phase A maximum
 MEASUREMENT 62 Q phase B maximum
 MEASUREMENT 63 Q phase C maximum
 MEASUREMENT 64 I fault phase A
 MEASUREMENT 65 I fault phase B
 MEASUREMENT 66 I fault phase C
 MEASUREMENT 67 I fault ground
 MEASUREMENT 68 I fault Sensitive ground
 MEASUREMENT 69 Sum KI2 pole A
 MEASUREMENT 70 Sum KI2 pole B
 MEASUREMENT 71 Sum KI2 pole C
 Control digital signal selection
 Digital Signal 0 General pick up
 Digital Signal 1 General trip
 Digital Signal 2 General pick up without
Sens. ground
 Digital Signal 3 General trip without Sens.
ground
 Digital Signal 4 Overcurrent pick up

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Digital Signal 5 Overcurrent trip

 Digital Signal 6 Overcurrent pick up without
Sens. ground
 Digital Signal 7 Overcurrent trip without
Sens. ground
 Digital Signal 8 Trip 50/51 Phase A
 Digital Signal 9 Trip 50/51 Phase B
 Digital Signal 10 Trip 50/51 Phase C
 Digital Signal 11 Free
 Digital Signal 15 50- Pick up Phases Inst.
 Digital Signal 16 50- Trip Phases Inst
 Digital Signal 17 50N- Pick up Neutral Inst.
 Digital Signal 18 50N- Trip Neutral Inst.
 Digital Signal 19 50NS- Pick up Sens Neutral
Inst.
 Digital Signal 20 50NS- Trip Sens Neutral
Inst.
 Digital Signal 21 50H1- Pick up. Phases Inst
(High1)
 Digital Signal 22 50H1- Trip Phases Inst
(High1)
 Digital Signal 23 50NH1- Pick up Neutral
Inst.(High1)
 Digital Signal 24 50NH1- Trip. Neutral
Inst.(High1)
 Digital Signal 39 50HC- Pick up HI-
CURR.Phases
 Digital Signal 40 50HC- Trip. HI-CURR.
Phases

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Digital Signal 41 50NHC- Pick up.HI-

CURR.Neutral
 Digital Signal 42 50NHC- Trip..HI-CURR.
Neutral
 Digital Signal 43 51- Pick up Phase time
 Digital Signal 44 51- Trip. Phase time
 Digital Signal 45 51N- Pick up Neutral time
 Digital Signal 46 51N- Trip. Neutral time
 Digital Signal 47 51NS- Pick up Sens.Neutral
time.
 Digital Signal 48 51NS- Trip Sens.Neutral
time
 Digital Signal 55 67NA-Pick up Isolated
neutral
 Digital Signal 56 67NA- Trip Isolated neutral
 Digital Signal 57 49- Thermal image warning
 Digital Signal 58 49- Thermal image Trip
 Digital Signal 59 46T- Pick up unbalance time
 Digital Signal 60 46T- Trip. unbalance time
 Digital Signal 61 46- Pick up unbalance
instant.
 Digital Signal 62 46- Trip unbalance instant.
 Digital Signal 63 46FA- Pick up Broken
conductor
 Digital Signal 64 46FA- Trip Broken conductor
 Digital Signal 65 50BF- Pick up breaker failure
(BF)
 Digital Signal 66 50BF- Trip. breaker failure
(BF)
 Digital Signal 75 50V-Activation 50V
 Digital Signal 76 51V- Activation 51V (Modo2)
 Digital Signal 77 51V- Activation 51V (Mode1)

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Digital Signal 78 CF- Cold load pick up

 Digital Signal 79 FF- Fuse failure pick up
 Digital Signal 80 FF- Activation fuse failure

DEFAULT SETTINGS

 Digital Signal 133 79I-.Intens. recloser. In
service
 Digital Signal 134 79I- Intens. recloser.Locked
 Digital Signal 135 79I- Recloser and current
 Digital Signal 136 79I- On going Intens.cycle
 Digital Signal 137 79I-Definite Intens. trip
 Digital Signal 138 79I- Instantaneous
cancellation
 Digital Signal 139 79I-Excessive number of
trips
 Digital Signal 140 79I- On going cycle 1
 Digital Signal 144 79I-Reclaim time man. close
 Digital Signal 145 79I- Reclaim time 1º Recl.
 Digital Signal 148 79I-T Reclaim time 4º Recl.
 Digital Signal 149 Voltage Pres. side A
 Digital Signal 150 Voltage Pres. side B
 Digital Signal 157 Oscillo pick up
 Digital Signal 159 52-Breaker closed
 Digital Signal 160 52-Breaker opening failure
 Digital Signal 161 52-Breaker closing failure

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Digital Signal 162 52-Breaker closing order

 Digital Signal 163 52-Breaker opening order
 Digital Signal 164 52-Trip circuit failure.1
 Digital Signal 165 52-Trip circuit failure.2
 Digital Signal 166 52-Close circuit failure 1
 Digital Signal 167 52-Close circuit failure 2
 Digital Signal 168 52-Exceeded kI2
 Digital Signal 169 52-Exceeded kI2 phase A
 Digital Signal 170 52 Exceeded kI2 phase B
 Digital Signal 171 52-Exceeded kI2 phase C
 Digital Signal 172 AUT- Local status
 Digital Signal 173 AUT-Open spring
 Digital Signal 174 AUT-Voltage presence
 Digital Signal 175 50CSC-Regulator locking
 Digital Signal 176 Forward phase A
 Digital Signal 177 Reverse phase A
 Digital Signal 178 Forward phase B
 Digital Signal 179 Reverse phase B
 Digital Signal 180 Forward phase C
 Digital Signal 181 Reverse phase C
 Digital Signal 182 Forward Ground
 Digital Signal 183 Reverse Ground
 Digital Signal 184 Forward Sensitive ground
 Digital Signal 185 Reverse Sensitive ground
 Digital Signal 186 FF
 Digital Signal 187 FR
 Digital Signal 188 Direct. retrolocking
 Digital Signal 189 Non direct. retrolocking
 Digital Signal 190 Prelocking
 Digital Signal 191 Pretrip
 Digital Signal 192 Retrotrip
 Digital Signal 199 Counter set to 0
 Digital Signal 200 Table 1 active

DEFAULT SETTINGS

 Digital Signal 206 ST-Recloser
 Digital Signal 207 ST- Phase inst
 Digital Signal 208 ST-Phase inst H1
 Digital Signal 210 ST-Phase time
 Digital Signal 212 ST- Ground inst
 Digital Signal 213 ST-Ground inst H1
 Digital Signal 215 ST-Ground time
 Digital Signal 217 ST- Sensitive ground inst
 Digital Signal 219 ST- Sensitive ground time
 Digital Signal 221 ST-Time unbalance
 Digital Signal 222 ST-Instantaneous unbalance
 Digital Signal 223 ST-Broken conductor
 Digital Signal 224 ST-Isolated ground
 Digital Signal 225 ST-Cold load
 Digital Signal 226 ST-Thermal image
 Digital Signal 227 RTS Control
 Digital Signal 228 Input 1
 Digital Signal 245 Output 1

DEFAULT SETTINGS

 Digital Signal 259 Logic 1
 Digital Signal 274 Relay in service
 Digital Signal 275 HW state
 Control order selection
 Order 0 Free
 Order 1 Activate output 1

DEFAULT SETTINGS

 Order 15 Free
 Order 16 Free
 Order 17 Free
 Order 18 Free
 Order 19 Free
 Order 20 Free
 Order 21 Free
 Order 22 Breaker 52. Open
 Order 23 Free
 Order 24 Breaker 52. Close
 Order 25 Free
 Order 26 Recloser in service
 Order 27 Free
 Order 28 Recloser out of service
 Order 29 Free
 Order 30 Free
 Order 31 Free
 Order 32 Free
 Order 33 Free
 Order 34 Free
 Order 35 Free
 Order 36 Free
 Order 37 Free
 Order 38 Free
 Order 39 Free
 Order 40 Free
 Order 41 Free
 Order 42 Free
 Order 43 Free
 Order 44 Free
 Order 45 Free
 Order 46 Free
 Order 47 Free
 Order 48 Free
 Order 49 Free
 Order 50 Free
 Order 51 Free
 Order 52 Free
 Order 53 Free
 Order 54 Free
 Order 55 Free
 Order 56 Free

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Order 57 Free
 Order 58 Free
 Order 59 Free
 Order 60 Table 1 activation
 DNP3 Generals
 LCU address 1
 MASTER address 0
 Baud rate 9600
 Parity without parity
 Stop Bits 1
 RTS fixed NO
 Communication Control NO
 ACK waiting time (csec) 500
 Synchronization time (min) 0
 ACK confirmation at linkage level NO
 Number of max. application bytes 1024
 Change sending Absolute
 Counter freezing with time
 State sending 0
 Number of measurement bits 16 bits
 Number of counter bits 32 bits
 Non-requested messages NO
 Preventing collisions NO
 Definite collision time (csec) 10
 Variable collision time (csec) 7
 Resend time (sec) 20
 Number of non-requested repetitions 0
 Special 0
 Measurement format Counts
 CTS waiting time (msec) 200
 Carrier waiting time (msec) 40
 Stabilization time (msec) 40

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 DNP3 digital signal selection

DNP3 NUMBER BD SIGNAL REVERSE CLASS
0 50- Phases Inst. Pick up 1
1 ON- Ground Inst. Pick up 1
2 50NS- Sens Ground Inst. Pick up 1
3 50H1- Phases Inst. Pick up (High1) 1
4 50NH1- Ground Inst. Pick up(High1) 1
5 51-Phase time pick up 1
6 51N- Ground pick up 1
7 51NS- Sens Ground time pick up 1
8 67NA-Isolated ground pick up 1
9 46T-Unbalance time pick up 1
10 46- Unbalance Inst. Pick up 1
11 46BC-Broken conductor pick up 1
12 50BF-Breaker failure pick up(BF) 1
13 50- Phases Inst. trip 1
14 50N- Ground Inst. trip 1
15 50NS- Sens Ground Inst trip 1
16 50H1- Phases Inst trip (High1) 1
17 50NH1- Ground Inst. trip (High1) 1
18 51- Phase time trip 1
19 51N- Ground time trip 1
20 51NS- Sens Ground time trip 1
21 67NA- Isolated ground trip 1
22 46T- Unbalance time trip 1
23 46- Unbalance inst trip 1
24 46FA- Broken conductor trip 1
25 50BF- Breaker failure (BF) trip 1
26 Trip 50/51 Phase A 1
27 Trip 50/51 Phase B 1
28 Trip 50/51 Phase C 1
29 Overcurrent pick up 1
30 Overcurrent trip . 1
31 52- Exceeded kI2 1
32 52- Exceeded kI2 phase A 1
33 52- Exceeded kI2 phase B 1
34 52- Exceeded kI2 phase C 1
37 Relay in service 1
38 HW status 1
39 52-breaker closed 1
40 AUT- Local status 1
42 52- Breaker opening failure 1
43 52- Breaker closing failure 1
44 52- Breaker closing command 1
45 52- Breaker opening command 1
46 General pick up 1
46 General trip 1
48 52- Trip 1 circuit failure 1
49 52- Trip 2 circuit failure 1
50 52- Trip 1 close failure 1
51 52- Trip 2 close failure 1
54 Input 1 1
55 Input 2 1
56 Input 3 1
57 Input 4 1
58 Input 5 1
59 Input 6 1
60 Input 7 1
61 Input 8 1

DEFAULT SETTINGS

62 Output 1 1
63 Output 2 1
64 Output 3 1
65 Output 4 1
66 Output 5 1
67 Output 6 1
68 Output 7 1
69 Logic 1 1
70 Logic 2 1
71 Logic 3 1
72 Logic 4 1
73 Logic 5 1
74 Logic 6 1
75 Logic 7 1
76 Logic 8 1
77 Logic 9 1
78 Logic 10 1
79 Logic 11 1
80 Logic 12 1
81 Logic 13 1
82 Logic 14 1
83 Logic 15 1
86 79I- Intens. Recloser.In service 1
87 79I- Intens. on-going cycle 1
88 79I- Intens. definite trip 1
89 79I-Excessive No. of trips 1
90 79I-Intens. Recloser locked 1
91 79I-Current recloser.. 1
94 Input 9 1
95 Input 10 1
96 Input 11 1
97 Input 12 1
98 Input 13 1
99 Input 14 1
100 Input 15 1
101 Input 16 1
102 Input 17 1
103 Output 8 1
104 Output 9 1
105 Output 10 1
106 Output 11 1
107 Output 12 1
108 Output 13 1
109 Output 14 1
120 59T- Phase OverV .time pick up 1
121 27T- UnderV .time pick up 1
122 59- Phase OverV inst pick up 1
123 27- UnderV .inst pick up 1
124 64T- Neutral OverV .time pick up 1
125 64- Neutral OverV .inst. pick up 1
126 47T- V unbalance pick up 1
127 47- Phase reverse pick up 1
128 81- Frequency pick up level 1 1
133 59T- Phase OverV .time trip 1
134 27T- UnderV .time trip 1
135 59- Phase OverV .inst trip 1

DEFAULT SETTINGS

136 27- UnderV .Inst.trip 1
137 64T- Neutral OverV .time trip 1
138 64- Neutral OverV .Inst.trip 1
139 47T- V unbalance trip 1
140 47- Phase reverse trip 1
141 81- Frequency trip level 1 1
146 81- Frequency trip 1
147 Voltage prot. Pick up 1
148 Voltage prot trip 1
 DNP3 measurement configuration
DNP3 NUMBER BD MEASUREMENT DEADBAND CLASS

0 VA 0 2
1 VB 0 2
2 VC 0 2
3 V average 0 2
4 VAB 0 2
5 VBC 0 2
6 VCA 0 2
7 U compound average 0 2
8 VN 0 2
9 IA 0 2
10 IB 0 2
11 IC 0 2
12 I average 0 2
13 IN 0 2
14 INS 0 2
15 I maximum 0 2
16 P(Active power) 0 2
17 Q(Reactive power) 0 2
18 Mean cosine 0 2
19 Frequency 0 2
 DNP3 counter configurations

DNP3 NUMBER COUNTER BD DEADBAND CLASS
Without programming
 DNP3 order configuration
NUMBER DNP3 ORDER BD ON/OFF
1 Activate output 1 On

DEFAULT SETTINGS
22 Breaker 52. Opening On
24 Breaker 52. closing On
26 Recloser in Service On
28 Recloser out of Service On
 Measurement format (DNP3 and MODBUS)
MEASUREMENTS DECIMAL NUMBERS RANGE

Without programming
 MODBUS Generals
 Remote station address 1
 Baud rate 19200
 Parity Without parity
 RTS activation waiting time(msec) 1
 Carrier stabilization waiting time(msec) 10
 Deactivation waiting time(msec) 4
 MODBUS digital signal configuration
MODBUS NUMBER BD SIGNAL REVERSE

0 50-Phase Inst.Pick up
1 50N-Ground Inst.Pick up
2 50NS- Sens Ground Inst.Pick up
3 50H1- Phase Inst.Pick up (High1)
4 50NH1- Ground Inst.Pick up.(High1)
5 51- Phase time pick up
6 51N- Ground time pick up
7 51NS- Isolate ground pick up
9 46T-Unbalance time pick up
10 46- Unbalance inst. pick up
11 46BC Broken conductor pick up
12 50BF-Breaker failure pick up (BF)
13 50- Phase Inst.trip
14 50N- Ground Inst. trip
15 50NS- Sens Ground Inst trip
16 50H1- Phase Inst. Trip (High1)
17 50NH1- Ground Inst.trip (High1)
18 51-Phase time trip
19 51N-Neutral time trip
20 51NS- Sens Ground trip
21 67NA- Isolate ground trip
22 46T- Unbalance time trip
23 46- Unbalance inst trip
24 46FA- Broken conductor trip
25 50BF- Breaker failure trip(BF)
26 Trip 50/51 Phase A
27 Trip 50/51 Phase B

DEFAULT SETTINGS

28 Trip 50/51 Phase C
29 Overcurrent pick up
30 Overcurrent trip
31 52-Exceeded kI2
32 52-Exceeded kI2 phase A
33 52-Exceeded kI2 phase B
34 52-Exceeded kI2 phase C
37 Relay in service
38 HW status
39 52-breaker closed
40 AUT- Local status
42 52-Breaker opening failure
43 52- Breaker closing failure
44 52- Breaker opening order
45 52- Breaker closing order
46 General pick up
47 General trip
48 52-Circuit failure Trip.1
49 52-Circuit failure Trip.2
50 52-Close Circuit failure 1
51 52-Close Circuit failure 2
54 Input 1
55 Input 2
56 Input 3
57 Input 4
58 Input 5
59 Input 6
60 Input 7
61 Input 8
62 Output 1
63 Output 2
64 Output 3
65 Output 4
66 Output 5
67 Output 6
68 Output 7
69 Logic 1
70 Logic 2
71 Logic 3
72 Logic 4
73 Logic 5
74 Logic 6
75 Logic 7
76 Logic 8
77 Logic 9
78 Logic 10
79 Logic 11
80 Logic 12
81 Logic 13
82 Logic 14
83 Logic 15
86 79I- Intens. recloser in service
87 79I- Intens. on-going cycle
88 79I- Intens. definite trip
89 79I-Excessive No. of trips
90 79I- Intens. Reclos.locked
91 79I-recloser current
94 Input 9
95 Input 10
96 Input 11

DEFAULT SETTINGS

97 Input 12
98 Input 13
99 Input 14
100 Input 15
101 Input 16
102 Input 17
103 Output 8
104 Output 9
105 Output 10
106 Output 11
107 Output 12
108 Output 13
109 Output 14
120 59T- Phase OverV time pick up
121 27T- UnderV time pick up
122 59- Phase Overv. Inst. Pick up
123 27- UnderV. Inst. Pick up
124 64T- Neutral OverV time pick up
125 64- Neutral OverV inst pick up
126 47T- V unbalance pick up
127 47- Phase reverse pick up
128 81- Frequency pick up level 1
133 59T-Phase OverV time trip
134 27T- Phase UnderV time trip
135 59- Phase OverV inst trip
136 27- UnderV time trip
137 64T- Neutral OverV time trip
138 64- Neutral OverV inst trip
139 47T-.V unbalance trip
140 47- Phase reverse trip
141 81-Frequency trip level 1
142 81- Frequency trip level 2
146 81- Frequency trip
147 Voltage protection pick up
148 Voltage protection trip
 MODBUS measurement configuration
MODBUS NUMBER MEASUREMENT BD

0 VA
1 VB
2 VC
3 V average
4 VAB
5 VBC
6 VCA
7 U compound average
8 VN
9 IA
10 IB

DEFAULT SETTINGS
11 IC
12 I average
13 IN
14 INS
15 I maximum
16 P(Active Power)
17 Q(Reactive Power)
18 Average Cosine
19 Frequency
 MODBUS counter configurations
NUMBER MODBUS COUNTER BD

Without programming
 MODBUS order configuration
MODBUS number ORDER BD ON/OFF

22 Breaker 52. Opening On
24 Breaker r 52. Losing On
26 Recloser in service On
28 Recloser out of service On
 IEC60870-5-101 Protocol
 Generals (1)
 Linking address 32
 Application address 32
 Swing mode NO
 Baud rate 4800
 Channel type Direct
 RTS/CTS Control NO
 Parity Even
 Stop Bits 1
 CTS activation waiting time (csec) 0
 Carrier waiting time (csec) 0
 RTS activation time (csec) 0

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 RTS deactivation time (csec) 0

 Response waiting time (csec) 100
 Minimum time between transmissions (csec) 100
 Number of transmissions 2
 "Address Field of the Link" 1
 "Common Address of ASDU" 2
 "Cause of transmission" 1
 "Information Object Address" 2
 Time format 3 bytes
 Measurements with time YES
 Counters with time NO
 Generals (2)
 Simple signal address 10001
 Event address 0
 Double signal address 0
 Measurement address 30001
 Transformer tap address 0
 Counter address 0
 Bitstrings address 0
 Simple order address C 20001
 Simple order address C0 0
 Double order address C1 0
 Double order address C2 0
 Measurement parameter address 0
 Queue full indication address 60001
 Queue half-full indication address 60002
 GPS indication address 0
 GPS synchronized indication address 0
 Queue full (%) 80
 Queue empty (%) 20
 Event refreshment position 128
 Command execution mode Mode6
 Use of return order information Mode4
 Counter freezing Mode 1
 Same address parameters and measurements NO
 Reduced meta profile NO
 GPS NO
 Time correction factor 50
 ASDU maximum time 254
 SQ bit usage YES
 Broadcast synchronization response NO
 Cyclical measurement period (min) 10
 Digital signal 101 configuration
NUNBER 101 SIGNAL BD NELEM REVERSE TYPE CIN
1 50-Phase Inst.Pick up 1 0 0 0
2 50N-Ground Inst.Pick up 2 0 0 0
3 50NS-Sens Ground Inst.Pick up 3 0 0 0
4 50H1- Phase Inst.Pick up (High1) 4 0 0 0

DEFAULT SETTINGS

5 50NH1- Ground Inst.Pick up (High1) 5 0 0 0
6 51- Phase time pick up 6 0 0 0
7 51N- Ground time pick up 7 0 0 0
8 51NS- Sensitive ground pick up 8 0 0 0
9 67NA- Isolated ground pick up 9 0 0 0
10 46T- Unbalance time pick up 10 0 0 0
11 46- Unbalance inst. pick up 11 0 0 0
12 46BC- Broken conductor pick up 12 0 0 0
13 50BF- Breaker failure pick up (BF 13 0 0 0
14 50- Phase Inst. Trip 14 0 0 0
15 50N- Neutral Inst. Trip 15 0 0 0
16 50NS- Sens Ground Inst trip 16 0 0 0
17 50H1- Phase Inst. Trip (High1) 17 0 0 0
18 50NH1- Neut. Inst. Trip (High1) 18 0 0 0
19 51- Phase time trip 19 0 0 0
20 51N- Neutral time trip 20 0 0 0
21 51NS- Sens Ground trip. 21 0 0 0
22 67NA- Isolate ground trip 22 0 0 0
23 46T- Unbalance time trip 23 0 0 0
24 46- Unbalance inst. trip 24 0 0 0
25 46BC- Broken conductor trip 25 0 0 0
26 50BF- Breaker failure trip (BF) 26 0 0 0
27 Trip 50/51 Phase A 27 0 0 0
28 Trip 50/51 Phase B 28 0 0 0
29 Trip 50/51 Phase C 29 0 0 0
30 Overcurrent pick up 30 0 0 0
31 Overcurrent trip 31 0 0 0
32 52-Exceeded kI2 32 0 0 0
33 52-Exceeded kI2 phase A 33 0 0 0
34 52-Exceeded kI2 phase B 34 0 0 0
35 52-Exceeded kI2 phase C 35 0 0 0
38 Relay in service 38 0 0 0
39 HW status 39 0 0 0
40 52-Breaker close 40 0 0 0
41 AUT- Local status 41 0 0 0
43 52- Breaker opening failure 43 0 0 0
44 52- Breaker closing failure 44 0 0 0
45 52- Breaker closing order 45 0 0 0
46 52- Breaker opening order 46 0 0 0
47 General pick up 47 0 0 0
48 General trip 48 0 0 0
49 52- Circuit Trip failure.1 49 0 0 0
50 52- Circuit Trip failure 2 50 0 0 0
51 52- Close Circuit failure 1 51 0 0 0
52 52- Close Circuit failure 2 52 0 0 0
55 Input 1 55 0 0 0
56 Input 2 56 0 0 0
57 Input 3 57 0 0 0
58 Input 4 58 0 0 0
59 Input 5 59 0 0 0
60 Input 6 60 0 0 0
61 Input 7 61 0 0 0
62 Input 8 62 0 0 0
63 Output 1 63 0 0 0
64 Output 2 64 0 0 0
65 Output 3 65 0 0 0
66 Output 4 66 0 0 0
67 Output 5 67 0 0 0
68 Output 6 68 0 0 0
69 Output 7 69 0 0 0

DEFAULT SETTINGS

70 Logic 1 70 0 0 0
71 Logic 2 71 0 0 0
72 Logic 3 72 0 0 0
73 Logic 4 73 0 0 0
74 Logic 5 74 0 0 0
75 Logic 6 75 0 0 0
76 Logic 7 76 0 0 0
77 Logic 8 77 0 0 0
78 Logic 9 78 0 0 0
79 Logic 10 79 0 0 0
80 Logic 11 80 0 0 0
81 Logic 12 81 0 0 0
82 Logic 13 82 0 0 0
83 Logic 14 83 0 0 0
84 Logic 15 84 0 0 0
87 79I- Curr. Reclos in service 87 0 0 0
88 79I- Curr. on-going cycle 88 0 0 0
89 79I- Curr. Definit. Trip 89 0 0 0
90 79I-Excessive No. of trips 90 0 0 0
91 79I- Curr. Reclos locked 91 0 0 0
92 79I-Reclose current 92 0 0 0
95 Input 9 95 0 0 0
96 Input 10 96 0 0 0
97 Input 11 97 0 0 0
98 Input 12 98 0 0 0
99 Input 13 99 0 0 0
100 Input 14 100 0 0 0
101 Input 15 101 0 0 0
102 Input 16 102 0 0 0
103 Input 17 103 0 0 0
104 Output 8 104 0 0 0
105 Output 9 105 0 0 0
106 Output 10 106 0 0 0
107 Output 11 107 0 0 0
108 Output 12 108 0 0 0
109 Output 13 109 0 0 0
110 Output 14 110 0 0 0
121 59T- Phase OverV time pick up 121 0 0 0
122 27T- UnderV time pick up 122 0 0 0
123 59- Phase Overv. Inst. Pick up 123 0 0 0
124 27- UnderV. Inst. Pick up 124 0 0 0
125 64T- Neutral OverV time pick up 125 0 0 0
126 64- Neutral OverV inst pick up 126 0 0 0
127 47T- V unbalance pick up 127 0 0 0
128 47- Phase reverse pick up 128 0 0 0
129 81- Frequency pick up level 1 129 0 0 0
134 59T- Phase OverV time trip 134 0 0 0
135 27T- Phase UnderV time trip 135 0 0 0
136 59- Phase OverV inst trip 136 0 0 0
137 27- Phase OverV inst trip 137 0 0 0
138 64T- Neutral OverV time trip 138 0 0 0
139 64- Neutral OverV inst trip 139 0 0 0
140 47T- V unbalance trip 140 0 0 0
141 47- Phase reverse trip 141 0 0 0
142 81- Frequency trip level 1 142 0 0 0

DEFAULT SETTINGS

147 81- Frequency trip 147 0 0 0
148 Voltage protection pick up 148 0 0 0
149 Voltage protection trip 149 0 0 0
 101 measurement configuration
N.101 MEASUREMENT BD DEADBAND PERIOD LOW HIGH BACKGROUND TYPE

VA 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
VB 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
VC 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
V average 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
VAB 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
VBC 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
VCA 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
U compound average 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
VN 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
IA 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
IB 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
IC 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
I average 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
IN 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
INS 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
I maximum 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
P(Active Power) 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
Q(Reactive Power) 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
Average Cosine 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
Frequency 200 200 -4095 4095 0 0
 101 counter configuration
NUMBER 101 COUNTER BD PERIOD GROUP

Without programming
 101 order configuration
NUMBER 101 ORDER BD ON/OFF TYPE SIGNAL STATE TIME.

20001 Breaker 52. Opening Off 0 0 500
20001 Breaker 52. Closing On 0 0 500
20002 Recloser in service On 0 0 0500
20002 Recloser out of service Off 0 0 500
 101 group configuration
GROUP IOA START IOA END

Without programming
 IEC60870-5-103 Protocol

DEFAULT SETTINGS
 Generals
 Remote station address 1
 Baud rate 38400
 Parity Even
 Stop Bits 1
 RTS activation time(msec) 0
 Carrier waiting time (msec) 0
 RTS deactivation time (msec) 0
 Sending format Extended private range
 103 digital signal configuration
BD SIGNAL TYP INF GI REVERSE
50-Phase Inst.pick up 130 1 X
50N-Neutral Inst.pick up 130 2 X
50NS-Sens neut. Inst.pick up 130 3 X
50H1- Phase Inst.pick up (High1) 130 4 X
50NH1- Neutral Inst.pick up.(High1) 130 5 X
51- Phase time pick up 130 6 X
51N- Neutral time pick up 130 7 X
51NS- Sens neut.time pick up. 130 8 X
67NA-Isolated neut.time pick up 130 9 X
46T-Unbalance time pick up 130 10 X
46- Unbalance inst. pick up 130 11 X
46FA-Broken conductor pick up 130 12 X
50BF-Breaker failure pick up (BF) 130 13 X
50- Phase Inst trip 130 14 X
50N- Neutral Inst trip 130 15 X
50NS- Sens neut Inst trip.N Sens 130 16 X
50H1- Phase Inst.Inst trip.Fases(High1) 130 17 X
50NH1- Neutral Inst Inst trip.Neut.(High1) 130 18 X
51-D Phase time trip 130 19 X
51N-Neutral time trip 130 20 X
51NS- Sens neut time trip. 130 21 X
67NA- Isolated neut time trip 130 22 X
46T- Unbalance time pick up 130 23 X
46- Unbalance inst. pick up 130 24 X
46FA- Broken conductor trip 130 25 X
50BF- Breaker failure trip(BF) 130 26 X
Trip 50/51 Phase A 130 27 X
Trip 50/51 Phase B 130 28 X
Trip 50/51 Phase C 130 29 X
Overcurrent pick up 130 30 X
Overcurrent trip 130 31 X
52-Exceeded kI2 130 32 X
52-Exceeded kI2 phase A 130 33 X
52-Exceeded kI2 phase B 130 34 X
52-Exceeded kI2 phase C 130 35 X
Relay in service 130 38 X
HW status 130 39 X
52-Breaker closed 130 40 X
AUT- Local status 130 41 X
52-Breaker opening failure 130 43 X
52- Breaker closing failure 130 44 X
52- Breaker closing order 130 45 X
52- Breaker opening order 130 46 X
General pick up 130 47 X
General trip 130 48 X
52-Trip circuit failure 1 130 49 X
52-Trip circuit failure.2 130 50 X

DEFAULT SETTINGS

52-Close circuit failure 1 130 51 X
52- lose circuit failure 2 130 52 X
Input 1 130 55 X
Input 2 130 56 X
Input 3 130 57 X
Input 4 130 58 X
Input 5 130 59 X
Input 6 130 60 X
Input 7 130 61 X
Input 8 130 62 X
Output 1 130 63 X
Output 2 130 64 X
Output 3 130 65 X
Output 4 130 66 X
Output 5 130 67 X
Output 6 130 68 X
Output 7 130 69 X
Logic 1 130 70 X
Logic 2 130 71 X
Logic 3 130 72 X
Logic 4 130 73 X
Logic 5 130 74 X
Logic 6 130 75 X
Logic 7 130 76 X
Logic 8 130 77 X
Logic 9 130 78 X
Logic 10 130 79 X
Logic 11 130 80 X
Logic 12 130 81 X
Logic 13 130 82 X
Logic 14 130 83 X
Logic 15 130 84 X
79I- Intens. Reclos. In service 130 87 X
79I- Intens. on-going cycle 130 88 X
79I- Intens. Definite trip 130 89 X
79I-Excessive No. of trips 130 90 X
79I- Intens. Reclos locked 130 91 X
79I-Recloser current 130 92 X
Input 9 130 95 X
Input 10 130 96 X
Input 11 130 97 X
Input 12 130 98 X
Input 13 130 99 X
Input 14 130 100 X
Input 15 130 101 X
Input 16 130 102 X
Input 17 130 103 X
Output 8 130 104 X
Output 9 130 105 X
Output 10 130 106 X
Output 11 130 107 X
Output 12 130 108 X
Output 13 130 109 X
Output 14 130 110 X
Phase OverV time pick up 130 121 X
27T- UnderV time pick up 130 122 X
59- Phase Overv. Inst. Pick up 130 123 X
27- UnderV. Inst. Pick up 130 124 X
64T- Neutral OverV time pick 130 125 X
64- Neutral OverV inst pick up 130 126 X

DEFAULT SETTINGS

47T- V unbalance pick up 130 127 X
47- Phase reverse pick up 130 128 X
81- Frequency pick up level 1 130 129 X
59T- Phase OverV time trip 130 134 X
27T- Phase UnderV time trip 130 135 X
59- Phase OverV inst trip 130 136 X
27- Phase UnderV inst. trip 130 137 X
64T- Neutral OverV time trip 130 138 X
64- Neutral OverV inst. p 130 139 X
47T- V unbalance trip 130 140 X
47- Phase reverse trip 130 141 X
81-Frequency trip level 1 130 142 X
81- Frequency trip level 2 130 143 X
81- Frequency trip 130 147 X
Voltage protection pickup 130 148 X
Voltage protection trip 130 149 X
 103 measurement Configuration
MEASUREMENT BD NUMBER
VA 0
VB 1
VC 2
V 3
VAB 4
VBC 5
VCA 6
U compound average 7
VN 8
IA 9
IB 10
IC 11
I average 12
IN 13
INS 14
I maximum 15
P(Active Power) 16
Q(Reactive Power) 17
Average cosine 18
Frequency 19
 103 order Configuration
ORDER BD TYP INF DCO

Activate output 1 131 1 On

DEFAULT SETTINGS

Breaker 52.Opening 131 22 On
Breaker 52. Closing 131 24 On
Recloser in service 131 26 On
Recloser out of service 131 28 On

DEFAULT SETTINGS10
48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain
Tel + 34 944 039 600
Fax +34 944039 679
technology@ingeteam.com
PL300 User Manual Ingeteam Power Technology, S.A. 357

www.ingeteam.com

PL300 Multifunction Protection PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PL300 Multifunction Protection PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PL300 Multifunction Protection PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PL300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION

© All rights reserved. No part of this

Ingeteam Power Technology reserves the right

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................... 10

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual III

4.1 9BP7 hase overcurrent protection ............................................................................................................. 61

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual IV

4.15.1 205BGeneral description ................................................................................................................ 89

PL300 User Manual V

4.31 109Bundercurrent PROTECTION (37) .................................................................................................... 124

PL300 User Manual VI

9. OPERATION MODE ......................................................................................................... 155

PL300 User Manual VII

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual VIII

X.3.3.3. Tripping times through curves ............................................................................................. 292

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual IX

1.1 SCOPE OF THE MANUAL

describes the functions of the specific model and its

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual 10

 Thermal image (49)

protections console or by activation of a digital input.

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual 11

1.3 MODEL CODING

The PL300 protection family has the following models:

Distributed generation interconnection:

For distribution centres:

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual 12

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual 13

See transformer arrangement examples in the wiring diagrams.

1.4 USER INTERFACE

 Local. The front board has:

 2 line, 16-character LCD

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual 14

 Ethernet communication (RJ45, GFO)

1.5 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

Here below is a description of the hardware possibilities defined in specific models:

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual 15

 Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)

Digital inputs voltage range:

Ingeteam Power Technology S.A.

PL300 User Manual 16

 RS232 + Ethernet (RJ45)

Inputs 1, 2 and 3 are used for phase currents measurement.

Input 4 is used for neutral current measurement.

Input 5 depends on model. There are the next possibilities:

Input 9 depends on model. There are the next possibilities:

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Operating temperature -20 up to 85 ºC

1.7.1 Electrical tests

ND, NE, DD, DE y DF models (with V0 calculated cod. 1*****01)

ND, NE, DD, DE and DF models (with IN calculated, , cod. 1*****02)

DB model (cod. DB 1****0)

DC model (cod. DC 1***00)

IB, IC models (cod. I* 1***00)